ggcontracting.ca...winchester public school childcare renovation 00 01 01 mca file no. 18044 project...

PROJECT MANUAL

VOLUME II

CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS and ARCHITECTURAL SPECIFICATIONS

Durham District School Board Tender No. T20-30

WINCHESTER PUBLIC SCHOOL INTERIOR RENOVATIONS

70 WATFORD ST., WHITBY ON, L1M 1E8

File No. 18044 April 9, 2020

Winchester Public School Childcare Renovation 00 01 01 MCA File No. 18044 Project Title Page

00 01 01 - 1

April 9, 2020

PROJECT NAME WINCHESTER PUBLIC SCHOOL CHILDCARE RENOVATION

Tender No. T20-30

OWNER DURHAM DISTRICT SCHOOL BOARD 400 Taunton Road East Whitby, ON L1R 2K6 Tel: 905-666-6924 Fax: 905-666-6439 Attn: Mr. Chris Thaler E-mail: [email protected]

CONSULTANT MC Architects Inc. 1881 Yonge Street, Suite 400 Toronto, Ontario M4S 3C4 Tel: 416-489-4646 Fax: 416-489-6989 Attn: Mr. Richard Kowalski E-mail: [email protected]

STRUCTURAL SUB-CONSULTANT Engineering Link Incorporated

207 Adelaide St. E., Suite 200 Toronto, ON M5A 1M8 Tel: 416-599-5465 x 118 Fax: 416-471-6083 Attn: Mr. Randall DeLong, P.Eng. E-mail: [email protected]

MECHANICAL Durham Energy Specialist SUB-CONSULTANT 209 Dundas St. E, #106

Whitby, ON L1N 7H8 Tel: 905-430-7151 Attn: Ms. Leanne Skribe E-mail: [email protected]

ELECTRICAL SUB-CONSULTANT Durham Energy Specialist

209 Dundas St. E, #106 Whitby, ON L1N 7H8 Tel: 905-430-7151 Attn: Ms. Leanne Skribe E-mail: [email protected]

END OF DOCUMENT

mailto:[email protected]





Winchester Public School Childcare Renovation 00 01 07 MCA File No. 18044 Seals Page

00 01 07 - 1

April 9, 2020

CONSULTANT=S SEAL This seal governs: DIVISION 1 to 10, 12, 31 & 32

END OF DOCUMENT

Winchester Public School Childcare Renovation 00 01 10 MCA File No. 18044 Table of Contents Document No. Title No. of Pages

mc | architects 00 01 10 - 1 April 9, 2020

VOLUME I BIDDING REQUIREMENTS

INTRODUCTORY INFORMATION

00 01 01 Project Title Page .............................................................................................................................. 1 00 01 10 Table of Contents .............................................................................................................................. 3 00 01 60 List of Prequalified Bidders ............................................................................................................... 6

BIDDING REQUIREMENTS

DDSB Tender Documents (by DDSB) ............................................................................................... 42 00 21 00 Instructions to Bidders ...................................................................................................................... 7 00 31 00 Available Project Information ........................................................................................................... 1

Designated Substances Survey Report ................................................................................................ 00 43 00 Supplementary Bid Form .................................................................................................................. 7

VOLUME II CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS and

ARCHITECTURAL SPECIFICATIONS

INTRODUCTORY INFORMATION

00 01 01 Project Title Page .............................................................................................................................. 1 00 01 07 Seals Page.......................................................................................................................................... 1 00 01 10 Table of Contents .............................................................................................................................. 3 00 01 80 List of Abbreviations ......................................................................................................................... 4

CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS

00 52 00 Agreement Form, Definitions AND General Conditions .................................................................... 1 DDSB Supplementary Conditions (by DDSB) ................................................................................... 20

DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

01 00 00 General Requirements .................................................................................................................... 10

DIVISION 2 – EXISTING CONDITIONS

02 41 13 Sitework Demolition and Removal.................................................................................................... 2 02 41 19 Selective Demolition ......................................................................................................................... 3

DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE

03 35 00 Concrete Floor Finishing ................................................................................................................... 3

DIVISION 4 - MASONRY

04 20 00 Masonry ............................................................................................................................................ 7

00 01 10 Winchester Public School Childcare Renovation Table of Contents MCA File No. 18044 Document No. Title No. of Pages

00 01 10 - 2 mc | architects April 9, 2020

DIVISION 5 – METALS Not Used

DIVISION 6 – WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES

06 10 00 Rough Carpentry ............................................................................................................................... 2 06 20 00 Finish Carpentry ................................................................................................................................ 3 06 41 05 Plastic Laminates ............................................................................................................................... 2 06 41 10 Architectural Woodwork ................................................................................................................... 4 06 41 93 Cabinet and Miscellaneous Hardware .............................................................................................. 2

DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

07 21 13 Board Insulation ................................................................................................................................ 2 07 21 16 Batt and Blanket Insulation ............................................................................................................... 1 07 27 00 Air Barriers ........................................................................................................................................ 3 07 84 00 Fire Stopping and Smoke Seals ......................................................................................................... 3 07 92 00 Sealants ............................................................................................................................................. 4

DIVISION 8 - OPENINGS

08 11 00 Steel Doors and Frames .................................................................................................................... 6 08 14 00 Wood Doors ...................................................................................................................................... 3 08 71 00 Door Hardware.................................................................................................................................. 5

Door Hardware List ........................................................................................................................... 4 08 80 00 Glazing ............................................................................................................................................... 7

DIVISION 9 - FINISHES

09 22 16 Non-Structural Metal Framing .......................................................................................................... 2 09 29 00 Gypsum Board ................................................................................................................................... 3 09 30 13 Ceramic Tiling .................................................................................................................................... 4 09 51 00 Acoustical Ceilings ............................................................................................................................. 4 09 65 19 Resilient Tile Flooring ........................................................................................................................ 3 09 91 00 Painting ............................................................................................................................................. 8

DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES

10 11 15 Markerboards ................................................................................................................................... 3 10 11 20 Tackboards ........................................................................................................................................ 2 10 28 13 Washroom Accessories ..................................................................................................................... 3 10 57 13 Coat Hooks and Hat Racks ................................................................................................................ 1 DIVISION 11 – EQUIPMENT Not Used

DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS

12 24 13 Window Shades................................................................................................................................. 2

Winchester Public School Childcare Renovation 00 01 10 MCA File No. 18044 Table of Contents Document No. Title No. of Pages


12 93 00 Site Furnishings ................................................................................................................................. 1

DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION Not Used

DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING EQUIPMENT Not Used

DIVISION 31 - EARTHWORK

31 23 00 Grading, Excavating and Backfilling .................................................................................................. 5

DIVISION 32 - EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS

32 12 16 Asphalt Pavement ............................................................................................................................. 5 32 16 00 Concrete Frost Slabs and Curbs ........................................................................................................ 2 32 18 13 Synthetic Turf Surface ....................................................................................................................... 4 32 31 13 Chain Link Fences and Gates ............................................................................................................. 3 32 91 19 Topsoil and Finish Grading ................................................................................................................ 3 32 92 23 Sodding ............................................................................................................................................. 2 32 93 00 Plants ................................................................................................................................................. 5

DIVISION 33 – UTILITIES Not Used

DIVISION 41 – MATERIAL PROCESSING AND HANDLING Not Used

END OF DOCUMENT

Winchester Public School Childcare Renovation 00 01 80 MCA File No. 18044 List of Abbreviations

00 01 80 - 1

April 9, 2020

A

& AND @ AT ACT ACOUSTICAL TILE ADJ ADJUSTABLE AFF ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR ALT ALTERNATE ALU ALUMINUM ANOD ANODIZED AP ACOUSTICAL PANEL APPROX APPROXIMATE A/V AUDIO VISUAL AUTO AUTOMATIC

B

BF BARRIER-FREE BBS BASKETBALL BACKSTOP BD BOARD BITUM BITUMINOUS BLDG BUILDING BLKG BLOCKING BM BEAM BOT BOTTOM BRK BRICK BUR BUILT-UP ROOFING

C

CA COMMUNICATIONS ASSEMBLY CAB CABINET CAR CARPET C/B CATCH BASIN CB CHALKBOARD CBD CEMENT BOARD C/C CENTRE TO CENTRE CEP COMPOSITE EXTERIOR PANELS CJ CONTROL JOINT CL CENTRE LINE CLG CEILING CMT CERAMIC MOSAIC FLOOR TILE CMU CONCRETE MASONRY UNIT COL COLUMN CONC CONCRETE CONT CONTINUOUS CP CONTROL PANEL C/W COMPLETE WITH CWF CUSHIONED WOOD FLOORING CWT CERAMIC WALL TILE

D

D DEEP (DEPTH) DAMP DAMPPROOFING DET DETAIL DF DRINKING FOUNTAIN DFJ DRINKING FOUNTAIN-JUNIOR ELEM DFK DRINKING FOUNTAIN-KINDERGARTEN DIA DIAMETER DIAG DIAGONAL DIM DIMENSION DN DOWN DW DISHWASHER DWG DRAWING

E

EL ELECTRIC(AL) ELEV ELEVATION EP ELECTRICAL PANEL EPF EPOXY FLOORING EQ EQUAL EQ.T EQUIVALENT THICKNESS EXP EXPANSION EXIST EXISTING EXS EXPOSED STRUCTURE

F

FAWP FABRIC WRAPPED ACOUSTIC WALL PANELS

FD FLOOR DRAIN FE FIRE EXTINGUISHER FEC FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINET FFL FINISHED FLOOR FFS FLOATING FROST SLAB FH FIRE HYDRANT FHC FIRE HOSE CABINET FIN FINISH(ED) FLEX FLEXIBLE FLR FLOOR FPC FLUOROPOLYMER COATING FPR FIRE PROTECTION RATING FR FIRE RETARDANT FRG FIRE-RATED GLASS FRR FIRE RESISTANCE RATING FS FIRE SEPARATION FSG FLOOR SOCKET-GYMNASTIC TYPE FSP FLOOR SOCKET-POST TYPE FTG FOOTING

00 01 80 Winchester Public School Childcare Renovation List of Abbreviations MCA File No. 18044

00 01 80 - 2 April 9, 2020

G

GALV GALVANIZE GB GRAB BAR GBA GYPSUM BOARD-ABUSE RESISTANT GBD GYPSUM BOARD GBW GYPSUM BOARD-WATER RESISTANT GL GLASS (GLAZING) GRND GROUND GYP GYPSUM

H

h HOUR H HIGH (HEIGHT) HB HOSE BIBB HBGC HIGH BUILD GLAZED COATING HCW HOLLOW CORE WOOD HD HAND DRYER HM HOLLOW METAL HORIZ HORIZONTAL HP HIGH POINT HU HEATING UNIT HVAC HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR

CONDITIONING HWT HOT WATER TANK

I

ID INSIDE DIAMETER IGU INSULATING GLASS UNIT IMP INSULATED METAL PANEL INSUL INSULATION

J

JCT JUNCTION JT JOINT

L

L LONG (LENGTH) LAB LABORATORY LAM LAMINATE / D / ION LAV LAVATORY LCT LINOLEUM COMPOSITION TILE LGL LAMINATED GLASS LLH LONG LEG HORIZONTAL LLV LONG LEG VERTICAL LP LOW POINT LS LIGHT STANDARD LSF LINOLEUM SHEET FLOORING

LWC LIGHTWEIGHT CONCRETE LWD LINEAR WOOD CEILINGS

M

MAX MAXIMUM MB MARKER BOARD MECH MECHANICAL MH MANHOLE MHU MECHANICAL HEATING UNIT MIN MINIMUM MIR MIRROR MISC MISCELLANEOUS MO MASONRY OPENING MP METAL PANEL MTD MOUNTED

N

NBCC NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF CANADA N/A NOT APPLICABLE NFHB NON FREEZE HOSE BIBB NIC NOT IN CONTRACT No. NUMBER NOM NOMINAL NRFS NON-RATED FIRE SEPARATION NTS NOT TO SCALE NWC NORMAL WEIGHT CONCRETE

O

OBC ONTARIO BUILDING CODE O/C ON CENTRE OD OUTSIDE DIAMETER O/H OVERHEAD OWSJ OPEN WEB STEEL JOIST

P

PA PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEM PAP PREFINISHED ALUMINUM PANELS PCP PRECAST CONCRETE PAVER PDO POWER DOOR OPERATOR PERIM PERIMETER PERP PERPENDICULAR PL PLATE PLAM PLASTIC LAMINATE PLWD PLYWOOD POR PORCELAIN FLOOR TILE PMP PREFINISHED METAL PANEL PT PAINT P/C PRECAST

Winchester Public School Childcare Renovation 00 01 80 MCA File No. 18044 List of Abbreviations

00 01 80 - 3

April 9, 2020

PREFAB PREFABRICATED PRE PREFINISHED PTD PAPER TOWEL DISPENSER PUF POLYURETHANE FLOORING

Q

QT QUARRY TILE

R

R RADIUS RA RETURN AIR RACP RIGID ACOUSTICAL CEILING PANEL RAD RADIATOR RAWP RIGID ACOUSTICAL WALL PANEL RB RESILIENT (RUBBER) BASE RD ROOF DRAIN REF REFERENCE REFR REFRIGERATOR REINF REINFORCE / D / ING / MENT REQ REQUIRED REV REVERSE RFL RUBBER TILE FLOORING RFT RESILIENT FLOOR TILE RM ROOM RSF RUBBER SHEET FLOORING RST RUBBER STAIR TREAD RTT RESILIENT TERRAZZO TILE RSI THERMAL RESISTANCE (m2

C/W) RWL RAIN WATER LEADER

S

SAN SANITARY SB SUPPLEMENTARY STANDARDS TO THE

OBC SBO SUPPLIED BY OWNER SCW SOLID CORE WOOD SCHED SCHEDULE SD SOAP DISPENSER SF SAFETY FLOORING SFS STRUCTURAL FROST SLAB SGL SPANDREL GLASS SIM SIMILAR SLC SEALED CONCRETE SLF SHEET LINOLEUM FLOORING SNB SANITARY NAPKIN DISPOSAL BIN SND SANITARY NAPKIN DISPENSER SP SPANDREL PANEL SPEC SPECIFICATIONS SPK SPEAKER

SSF SYNTHETIC SHEET FLOORING SS SERVICE SINK SST STAINLESS STEEL STV STAIN AND VARNISH STD STANDARD STL STEEL STRUCT STRUCTURE / STRUCTURAL SUPPL SUPPLEMENT(ARY) SUSP SUSPEND(ED) SVF SHEET VINYL FLOORING S/W SIDEWALK SWC SPECIAL WALL COATING SYM SYMBOL SYMM SYMMETRICAL

T

T THICK TAPS TACTILE ATTENTION PATTERN SURFACE TB TACKBOARD T&B TOP AND BOTTOM TD TOWEL DISPENSER TEL TELEPHONE TEMP TEMPORARY TER TERAZZO TERM TERMINAL TEX TEXTURED TGL TEMPERED GLASS T&G TONGUE AND GROOVE T/O TOP OF TPD TOILET PAPER DISPENSER TR TRANSOM TRGL TRANSLUCENT GLASS TYP TYPICAL

U

U URINAL UBF URINAL - BARRIER-FREE UC UNDERCUT UJ URINAL - JUNIOR ELEMENTARY UL UNDERWRITERS’ LABORATORIES ULC UNDERWRITERS= LABORATORIES OF

CANADA U/N UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE UNFIN UNFINISHED U/P UTILITY POLE U/S UNDER SIDE OF US URINAL - SENIOR ELEMENTARY UTIL UTILITY

00 01 80 Winchester Public School Childcare Renovation List of Abbreviations MCA File No. 18044

00 01 80 - 4 April 9, 2020

V

VB VINYL BASE VCB VENTED COVE BASE VCT VINYL COMPOSITION TILE VERT VERTICAL VP VISION PANEL VR VAPOUR RETARDER VRB VENTED RUBBER BASE VT VINYL TILE VWF VINYL WALL FABRIC

W

W WIDE W/ WITH

WB WHITEBOARD (MARKERBOARD) WC WATERCLOSET WCA WINDOW CLEANERS=ANCHOR WD WOOD WF WASH FOUNTAIN WFJ WASH FOUNTAIN-JUNIOR ELEMENTARY WGL WIRED GLASS WH WARNOCK HERSEY WP WEATHERPROOF(ING) WPF WATERPROOF FLOORING WR WASTE RECEPTACLE W/R WATER RESISTANT

END OF DOCUMENT

Winchester Public School Childcare Renovation 00 52 00 MCA File No. 18044 Agreement Form, Definitions, and General Conditions

00 52 00 - 1

April 9, 2020

1. AGREEMENT FORM AND DEFINITIONS .1 The Agreement and Definitions of Standard Construction Document–CCDC 2-2008, Stipulated Price

Contract, English version, and as amended and modified in Durham District School Board, Supplementary Conditions, forms the basis of Agreement between the Owner and Contractor including the Definitions of specific words and terms.

.2 Where these amendments, additions, and modifications specifically reference changes to the Agreement or Definitions, these amendments, additions, and modifications shall govern.

2. GENERAL CONDITIONS .1 The General Conditions of Standard Construction Document–CCDC 2-2008, Stipulated Price

Contract, English version, Parts 1 to 12 inclusive, are the General Conditions between the Owner and the Contractor.

3. SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS .1 Refer to Durham District School Board, Supplementary Conditions for amendments, additions, and

modifications to these General Conditions. .2 Where these amendments, additions, and modifications specifically reference changes to the

General Conditions, these amendments, additions, and modifications shall govern.

END OF DOCUMENT

DURHAM DISTRICT SCHOOL BOARD

SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS Page 1 Revised: September 13, 2019

The General Condition of the Contract contained in the Canadian Standard Construction Document CCDC 2 Stipulated Price Contract, 2008 Edition, together with the requirements contained herein, are applicable to all persons engaged in the Work of this Contract. The Contractor will be required to sign the foregoing document and to sign the Contract copy of drawings and specifications. The following conditions supplement the General Conditions of the Canadian Standard Construction Document CCDC 2 Stipulated Price Contract, 2008 Edition. Where the General Conditions of the Contract are not in agreement with the Supplementary Conditions, the Supplementary Conditions shall govern. ARTICLE A-1 THE WORK Delete present text of 1.3 and substitute the following:

“The date for Substantial Performance of the Work shall be the date stated on the Tender Form.” ARTICLE A-5 PAYMENT Delete present text of 5.1 and substitute the following:

“Payments equal to 90% of the value of the Work completed shall be made within 28 days following receipt by the Owner of the Contractor’s Proper Invoice.”

Delete present text of 5.3.1 and substitute the following:

“Interest does not accrue until the expiry of the twenty eight (28) day period noted above. Interest payable shall be one percentage point more than the bank rate of the Bank of Canada at Contract date for short term advances to the chartered banks.”

SUPLEMENTARY DEFINITIONS 8. Contract Time Delete present text of this definition and substitute the following:

“The Contract Time is the time period from the commencement of the Work to the date stated on the Tender Form for Substantial Performance of the Work.”

21. Supplemental Instruction Add the follow note:

“Supplemental Instructions shall also be called Jobsite Instructions and shall be issued as such by the Consultant.”



SUPLEMENTARY DEFINITIONS – CONT’D …..

Add new definition number 27

“27. Constructor

The Constructor is as defined in the Occupational Health and Safety Act, R.S.O. 1990 (latest amendment), referring o the person undertaking the Project for the Owner, and for the purposes of this Project, shall be the Contractor.”

“28. As-Built Documents “As-Built Documents refer to reproductions of the original Drawings and Specifications which

have been marked up to accurately show all changes from the original documents.” “29. Install Install means the completion of the following activities:

.1 Remove Product from storage and locate for placement,

.2 Position and adjust Product for final placement,

.3 Affix and anchor Product in final placement, in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions,

.4 Make all Mechanical and Electrical connections required to complete installation” “30. Proper Invoice A proper invoice shall be as defined in the Construction Act and shall additionally conform to the

requirements for Applications for Progress Payment in CCDC2-2008 General Condition GC 5.2, as amended by these Supplementary Conditions, and shall include all submissions required under the Contract to be submitted with an Application for Payment. A proper invoice may also be referred to as a ‘Formal Application for Payment’.”

“31. Record Documents Record Documents refer to a complete set of documents which have been amended to

incorporate all changes to the Work, as marked up on the As-build Documents. Record Documents are to be submitted in an electronic form which is stored on a CD.”

“32. Submittals Submittals are documents or items required by the Contract Documents to be provided by the

Contractor, such as: .1 Shop Drawings, samples, models, mock-ups to indicate details or characteristics, before

the portion of the Work that they represent can be incorporated into the Work; and .2 As-built Documents and manuals to provide instructions to the operation and

maintenance of the Work.” “33. Supply Supply means completion of the following activities: .1 Fabricate or purchase Product, .2 Deliver Product to the Place of the Work, .3 Unload Product, .4 Store Product in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.”



GC1.1 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS Add the following to the end of subparagraph 1.1.2.2: “except where the Consultant shall be indemnified as a third party beneficiary as provided in

subparagraphs 9.2.7.4, 9.5.3.4, and in 12.1.3.” Add new paragraph after 1.1.7.5: 1.1.7 .5 “and, in general, where discrepancies occur among various parts of the Drawings or

Specifications, the Contractor shall Provide the greatest amount of labour and/or materials referred to.”

Delete present text of paragraph 1.1.8 and substitute the following: 1.1.8 .1 “The Owner shall provide the Contractor, without charge:

Five (5) sets of the Drawings and Specifications upon which the Contract is based. Sets issued for permits and the Contractor’s Contract signing sets are excluded in the amount.”

.2 “Two (2) copies of detail drawings (drawings issued after the signing of the Contract).” .3 “All other copies of drawings and Specifications will be furnished to the Contractor at

the cost of printing.” Add new paragraph 1.1.11, as follows: “1.1.11 Bylaws, codes or standards quoted shall be the latest edition, including revisions or amendments

prior to date of bid submission.” GC2.2 ROLE OF THE CONSULTANT To paragraph 2.2.3, last line, after “to the Contractor”, add: “and to the Owner” Add at the end of paragraph 2.2.9: “The Owner and the Contractor shall waive any claims against the Consultant arising out of the

making of such interpretations and findings made in accordance with paragraphs 2.2.7, 2.2.8, and 2.2.9.”

To paragraph 2.2.13, add additional clause and new sentences: 2.2.13 “and if it is agreed that no change to the Contract Price is involved, the Contractor shall proceed

to make the required change. If, in the opinion of the Contractor, a Supplemental Instruction involves an adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Time, the Contractor shall, within seven (7) days of receipt of a Supplemental Instruction, advise the Consultant in writing accordingly. Failure to provide written notification within the time stipulated shall imply acceptance of the Supplemental Instruction by the Contractor.”



GC2.2 ROLE OF THE CONSULTANT - CONT’D ….

To paragraph 2.2.14, delete comma after the word “Submittals” and add the words ” which are provided” before the words “in accordance”. To paragraph 2.2.15 add new sentence: “If it is the Contractor’s opinion that a Supplemental Instruction, Change Order or Change

Directive, as issued by the Consultant, will delay the Project, he shall within three (3) days after receipt of such Supplemental Instruction or Change Form notify the Consultant in writing accordingly.”

GC2.3 REVIEW AND INSPECTION OF THE WORK To paragraph 2.3.2, replace the words “the Consultant” with “the Consultant and the Owner” Add new sentence: “Unless agreed otherwise, the Contractor shall give the Consultant and the Owner at least three

(3) working days’ notice of the date and time fixed for all required tests, and shall supply all labour, material, fuel, etc., and shall carry out such tests (unless otherwise specified).”

To paragraph 2.3.3, add new sentence: “Such certificates and reports are to be reviewed by the Consultant and one copy is to be

forwarded for the Owner’s review.” GC2.4 DEFECTIVE WORK To paragraph 2.4.1, add new subparagraphs 2.4.1.1 and 2.4.1.2:

“2.4.1.1 The Contractor shall rectify, in a manner acceptable to the Owner and the Consultant, all defective work and deficiencies throughout the Work, whether or not they are specifically identified by the Consultant.” .2 the Contractor shall prioritize the correction of any defective work which, in the sole discretion of the Owner, adversely affects the day to day operation of the Owner.”

Add new paragraph 2.4.4 as follows: “2.4.4 Where work has been identified as defective by the Owner or Consultant, and the Contractor fails

to make corrections to the Work, the cost of correcting the Work shall be determined by the Consultant and the amount may be deducted from the Progress Payment”

Add new paragraph 2.4.5 as follows:

“2.4.5 The Contractor shall prepare a monthly status report on the deficiency corrections identified by

the Consultant. Where deficiencies remain on the status report for a period of more than two Progress Applications, the trade responsible for the deficiency will have an amount withheld from their draw in the amount of ten times the cost to correct the deficiency.”



GC3.1 CONTROL OF THE WORK

Add new paragraph 3.1.3 as follows: “3.1.3 Prior to commencing individual procurement, fabrication and construction activities, the

Contractor shall verify, at the Place of Work, all relevant measurements and levels necessary for proper and complete fabrication, assembly and installation of the Work and shall further carefully compare such field measurements and conditions with the requirements of the Contract Documents. Where dimensions are not included or contradictions exist, or exact locations are not apparent, the Contractor shall immediately notify the Consultant in writing and obtain written instructions from the Consultant before proceeding with any part of the affected work.”

Add new paragraph 3.1.4 as follows:

“3.1.4 Once the building is occupied, the Contractor may be required by the Owner, from time to time, to suspend or alter noisy or otherwise objectionable operations, should such operations cause undue interference with the Owner’s business or activities.”

GC3.2 CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR OTHER CONTRACTORS Change paragraph 3.2.2.2 to read: 3.2.2.2 .2 “assume responsibility for compliance with health and safety legislation at the Place of

the Work as it applies to such work.” GC3.3 TEMPORARY WORK In paragraph 3.3.2, on the second line after the words “where required by law”, insert “or by the Consultant,” GC3.4 DOCUMENT REVIEW Delete paragraph 3.4.1 in its entirety and substitute new paragraph 3.4.1: 3.4.1 The Contractor shall review the Contract Documents and shall report promptly to the Consultant

any error, inconsistency or omission the Contractor may discover. Such review by the Contractor shall comply with the standard of care described in paragraph 3.14.1 of the Contract. If the Contractor shall not proceed with the work affected until the Contractor has received corrected or missing information from the Consultant.”

GC3.5 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE Add at the end of subparagraph 3.5.1.1

“This schedule shall enable the Owner and the Consultant to monitor the progress of the Work on a weekly basis. The Contractor shall attend job site meetings every two weeks and any meetings of the Owner when reasonably called upon to do so to discuss the said schedule and subsequent progress of construction relating to said schedule.”



GC3.6 SUPERVISION In paragraph 3.6.1 on the first line after the words “who shall be in” insert “full time”, and at the end of the third line after “valid reason” insert “ and in consultation with the Consultant and the Owner and which shall be provided in writing.” Add the following paragraphs: “3.6.3 The supervisory staff assigned to the Project shall also be fully competent to implement

efficiently all requirements for scheduling, coordination, field engineering, reviews, inspections and Submittals defined in the Specifications, and have a minimum 10 years documented Superintendent/Project Management experience.”

“3.6.4 The Consultant and the Owner shall reserve the right to review the record of experience and

credentials of supervisory staff assigned to the Project prior to commencement of Work.” “3.6.5 The Contractor’s Supervisor shall remain on the job until the Contract is complete to the

satisfaction of the Consultant and the Owner.” “3.6.6 The Project Management staff assigned to the Project shall also be fully competent to implement

efficiently all requirements for scheduling, coordination, field engineering, reviews, inspections and Submittals defined in the Specifications, and have a minimum 10 years documented Supervisor/Project Management experience.”

GC3.7 SUBCONTRACTORS AND SUPPLIERS In subparagraph 3.7.1.2 after the words “the Contract Documents” insert “including required Bonding.” Add new sentence to paragraph 3.7.2 as follows: “The Contractor shall not change accepted Subcontractors without written permission of the

Owner.” GC3.8 LABOUR AND PRODUCTS Change paragraph 3.8.3 to read: “3.8.3 The Contractor shall maintain good order and discipline among workers engaged on the Work

and shall not employ or permit to be employed anyone not skilled in the tasks assigned.” Add new paragraphs: “3.8.4 The Contractor is responsible for the safe on-site storage of Products and their protection

(including Products supplied by the Owner and other contractors to be installed under the Contract) in such ways as to avoid dangerous conditions or contamination to the Products or other persons or property and in locations at the Place of Work to the satisfaction of the Owner and the Consultant. The Owner shall provide all relevant information on the Products to be supplied by the Owner.”

“3.8.5 The foreperson of each trade engaged on the Work must be able to speak and understand the

English language well enough to comprehend and carry out all instructions issued and to work in complete co-ordination with other trades.”



GC3.8 LABOUR AND PRODUCTS – CONT’D… “3.8.6 The hours of work, the working conditions and the rates of wages shall be in accordance with the

local conditions and requirements and the Contractor shall not pay less than the minimum wages established by customary standards in the locality of the site for the same or a similar class of work. Information necessary to confirm compliance with these requirements shall be provided by the Contractor to the Owner on request.”

“3.8.7 The site superintendent assigned to the Project will be required to submit to a Police Records

Check in accordance with provincial legislation for those who may have contact with students.” “3.8.8 Products which are specified by their proprietary names or by part or catalogue number shall

form the basis for the Specifications and tenders. No substitutes for these may be used without the Consultants approval in writing. When requesting approval for the use of substitutes, the Contractor shall”

.1 submit documentation proving, to the Consultants satisfaction, that the substitute is equal to the specified product, and is compatible in every respect with the configuration and design of the Project, not requiring and change thereto to accommodate the substitution.

.2 provide with each application, a list of properties of the specified product and the proposed substitute. No application to use substitutes will be considered unless made in this way.

.3 include in the submission any effect that the substitute may have on the Contract Price, and be prepared to reimburse the Owner for all costs that may become evident later as a result of the substitution.

.4 submit requests well in advance of deadlines for ordering specified products. Substitutes will be considered only when submitted in sufficient time to permit proper investigation by the Consultant.”

3.8.9 “All deficiencies identified by the Owner and/or Consultant shall be corrected within 15 days of being notified of such deficiency.” GC3.10 SHOP DRAWINGS Revise the title GC3.10 to read “SHOP DRAWINGS AND OTHER SUBMITTALS” Add “and Submittals” after the words “Shop Drawings” in paragraphs 3.10.1, 3.10.2, 3.10.4, 3.10.5, 3.10.7, 3.10.8, 3.10.8.2, 3.10.9, 3.10.10, 3.10.11 and 3.10.12. Delete paragraph 3.10.3 and replace with the following:

“Prior to the first application for payment, the Contractor and the Consultant shall jointly prepare a schedule of dates for submission and return of Shop Drawings and any Submittals.”

Add new paragraphs: 3.10.13 “Only Shop Drawings and Submittals indicated as “Reviewed” or “Reviewed as noted” and

bearing the Consultant’s review date and initials, shall be used at the Place of the Work.” 3.10.14 ”Reviewed Shop Drawings and Submittals shall not authorize changes to cost to the Owner nor

shall they authorize changes to the construction schedule.” 3.10.15 “Any fabrication work done before receiving final reviewed Shop Drawings and Submittals shall

be at the Contractor’s and their Subcontractors and/or Suppliers risk.”



GC3.12 CUTTING AND REMEDIAL WORK Change paragraph 3.12.1 to read: “The Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating all cutting and remedial work that may be

required to make the several parts of the Work come together properly.” GC3.13 - CLEANUP

Revise paragraph 3.13.1 as follows: Add the words “snow and ice and” after the word “of” to read:... “free from the accumulation of

snow and ice and waste products and...” Change paragraph 3.13.2 as follows: In the second line, after the word “remove”, add the words “snow and ice and” to read: …. “ shall

remove snow and ice and waste products and debris….” GC3.14 PERFORMANCE BY THE CONTRACTOR Add new General Condition 3.14 – PERFORMANCE BY THE CONTRACTOR Add new paragraphs: 3.14.1 “In performing its services and obligations under the Contract, the Contractor shall exercise a

standard of care, skill and diligence that would normally be provided by an experienced and prudent contractor supplying similar services for similar projects. The Contractor acknowledges and agrees that throughout the Contract, the Contractor’s obligation, duties and responsibilities shall be interpreted in accordance with this standard. The Contractor shall exercise the same standard of due care and diligence in respect of any products, personnel, or procedures which it may recommend to the Owner.”

3.14.2 “The Contractor further represents covenants and warrants to the Owner that: .1 The personnel it assigns to the Project are appropriately experienced; .2 It has sufficient staff of qualified and competent personnel to replace its designated

supervisor and project manager, subject to the Owner’s approval, in the event of death, incapacity, removal or resignation.”

GC4.1 CASH ALLOWANCE Add new subparagraph 4.1.1.1:: 4.1.1 “Cash allowances cover the net cost to the Contractor of services, products, labour, materials,

construction machinery and equipment, freight, unloading, handling, storage, installation and other authorized expenses incurred in performing the Work stipulated under the cash allowances including duties and applicable taxes but not including HST. ”



GC4.1 CASH ALLOWANCE – CONT’D… Delete paragraph 4.1.4 and replace with the following: “4.1.4 Where costs exceed the amount allocated under an individual allowance, unexpended amounts

from the cash allowances will be reallocated at the Consultant’s direction to cover the shortfall without additional overhead and profit charges attributed. Overhead and profit charges may only be charged to overruns on the sum total of cash allowances. The maximum mark up on

authorized overrun on cash allowance shall be 10%.” Delete paragraph 4.1.5 and replace with the following: “4.1.5 The net amount of any unexpended cash allowance, after providing for any reallocations as

contemplated in paragraph 4.1.4, shall be deducted from the Contract Price by Change Order.”

Delete paragraph 4.1.7 and replace with the following: “4.1.7 At the commencement of the Work, the Contractor shall prepare for the review and acceptance

of the Owner and the Consultant, a schedule indicating the times, within the construction schedule referred to in GC3.5, that items called for under cash allowance, and items that are specified to be Owner purchased and Contractor installed or hooked up, are required to be ordered and delivered to the site to avoid delaying the progress of the Work.”

Add new paragraph 4.1.8 “4.1.8 The Owner reserves the right to call, or to have the Contractor call, for competitive bids for

portions of the Work, to be paid for from the cash allowances.” GC4.2 CONTINGENCY ALLOWANCE Delete this entire clause including paragraphs 4.2.1, 4.2.2, 4.2.3 and 4.2.4. GC5.1 FINANCING INFORMATION REQUIRED OF THE OWNER Delete this entire clause including paragraphs 5.1.1 and 5.1.2 GC5.2 APPLICATIONS FOR PROGRESS PAYMENT

Change paragraph 5.2.3 to read: “The amount claimed shall be for the value, proportionate to the amount of the Contract, of

Work performed to that date and also of products incorporated into the Work, unless otherwise approved by the Consultant.”

Change paragraph 5.2.7 to read: “Claims for products delivered to the Place of the Work but not yet incorporated into the Work,

provided such products are Project specific and cannot readily be used elsewhere, may be considered for payment on an individual basis and shall be supported by such evidence as the Consultant may reasonably require to establish the value and delivery of the products."



GC5.2 APPLICATIONS FOR PROGRESS PAYMENT – CONT’D… Add new paragraphs 5.2 through 5.2.12, as follows: “5.2.8 The Contractor shall electronically submit their Proper Invoice for monthly payments to the

Consultant and the Owner on the Owner’s standard combined ‘Application for Payment and Certification by Consultant’ Form. All Change Forms as approved during the preceding months shall be entered on the application form and invoiced for portions of Work completed and shall be kept up to date month by month. All expenditures against the Cash Allowance shall be similarly claimed for the month that they were invoiced and must be supported by accompanying invoices at that time. No claims for expenses against the Cash Allowance shall be allowed that are not supported by invoice copies.”

“5.2.9 Applications for monthly payments shall be reviewed in rough draft form and approved by the

Owner, Consultant, and Contractor. Drafts are to be in triplicate with one (1) copy each retained by the Owner and Consultant. This is to be done prior to the Contractor issuing their proper invoice on the Owner’s combined form.”

“5.2.10 The Contractor must provide with each application after the first, a Statutory Declaration on

CCDC Form No. 9A, certifying that all accounts have been paid for which the Contractor has received payment.”

“5.2.11 The Contractor must provide with each application, a current Certificate of Clearance from the

WSIB.” “5.2.12 Prior to each application for payment, the Contractor, Consultant and Owner and sub-consultants

shall jointly check the progress of the Work at the site.” GC5.3 PROGRESS PAYMENT Add new paragraphs: “5.3.2 In the event of construction lien action affecting the Project, the Contractor agrees to indemnify

and compensate the Durham District School Board for any expenses incurred. The Board reserves the right to secure the possible cost of construction liens by retaining from the amount of the next payment certificate a sum equal to the amount of any lien claim plus the usual 25% increased amount for future possible claim expenses, plus the sum of $5,000.00 to compensate the Board for its legal and professional consultant expenses, as may be necessary to protect the Board’s interest in having any liens removed from the Board’s project. Funds so retained, and not so expended, shall be released to the Contractor upon the full discharge of all liens and dismissal of all actions against the Owner.

“5.3.3 The requirements of the Construction Act, Revised Statutes of Ontario, 1990, c. C.30, and the

Regulations under the Act, including Ontario Regulation 304/18, shall govern this Contract.” “5.3.4 All progress payments are not conclusive as to the value or quality of services provided and are

subject to further evaluation and readjustment on future and final progress payments. The submission of monthly draw amounts by the Contractor and Subcontractors must reflect accurate valuations for Work completed and installed. The Contractor shall review and evaluate all Subcontractors work and be responsible for verifying the monthly draw amounts claimed.”



GC5.3 PROGRESS PAYMENT – CONT’D… “5.3.5 Once Substantial Performance of the Work has been achieved, no further applications for

payment will be considered until the application for final payment. Final payment will be authorized when all Work is 100% complete and all deficiencies are corrected.”

GC5.5 PAYMENT OF HOLDBACK UPON SUBSTANTIAL PERFORMANCE OF THE WORK Add new subparagraph 5.5.1.3 as follows: “.3 Submit a declaration that no notices of lien have been received.” Add new subparagraph 5.5.1.4 as follows: “.4 Submit Workplace Safety & Insurance Board Clearance Certificate.” Add new subparagraph 5.5.1.5 as follows: “.5 Submit written confirmation from the bonding company that it has been notified of the intent to claim release of holdback money.” Delete paragraph 5.5.3 and replace with the following: “5.5.3 The Contractor must provide certification of publication of the Certificate of Substantial

Performance of the Work with the release of holdback application.” Delete paragraph 5.5.5 and replace with the following: “5.5.5 Failure by the Contractor to publish the Substantial Performance Certificate places no onus on

the Consultant or Owner to do so. If that certificate is not published, the Owner shall release the holdback to the Contractor sixty (60) days after the Contract is Deemed Complete, again having satisfied himself as above.”

GC5.6 PROGRESSIVE RELEASE OF HOLDBACK Change paragraph 5.6.1 as follows: 5.6.1 In the 2nd line, after “Substantial Performance of the Work” add: “... and where the Owner has agreed in writing to such separate partial certification for holdback

release for a Subcontractor or Supplier as provided in paragraph 5.4.1, … “ Delete paragraph 5.6.2 in its entirety.



GC5.9 NON-CONFORMING WORK Add new paragraph: “5.9.2 The Owner, its agents, and Other Contractors shall have the right to enter upon, and the Owner

shall have the right to take possession of the Work in whole or in part for the purpose of placing fittings and equipment or for other use before the completion of the Contract, if, in the opinion of the Consultant, such entry and taking of possession does not prevent or interfere with the Contractor’s work to complete the Work within the time specified. Such entry and taking of possession shall not be considered as acceptance of the Work nor in any way shall it relieve the Contractor of his responsibility to complete the Contract.”

Add new General Condition GC5.10 – NO CLAIMS FOR ANTICIPATED PROFIT GC5.10 NO CLAIMS FOR ANTICIPATED PROFIT Add new paragraph: “5.10.1 If any change or deviation in, or omission from the Work is made by which the cost of Work to be

done is decreased, or if the whole or any portion of the Work is dispensed with, or if the Contractor should stop work or terminate the Contract in accordance with the provisions of GC7.2, no compensation shall be claimable by the Contractor or Subcontractor for any loss of anticipated profits in respect thereof.”

GC6.1 CHANGES Add new paragraph: “6.1.3 No extension to Contract Time shall be granted for changes in the Work unless the Contractor

can clearly demonstrate that such changes significantly alter the overall construction schedule submitted at the commencement of the Work.”

GC6.2 CHANGE ORDER

Add new paragraph: “6.2.3 The method of valuation and the procedure for certification of changes to the Work shall be as

follows: The value of additional work done by Subcontractors shall be the cost to the Subcontractor plus 10% for overhead and profit. For additional work done by Subcontractors, the General Contractor shall be entitled to 10% for overhead and profit of the value of the additional work done by the Subcontractor. The value of additional work done by the General Contractor’s own forces shall be the cost to the General Contractor plus 15% for overhead and profit. If credits are issued, the amount of the credit shall be the cost, but no amount for overhead or profit or other expenses shall be included in this cost. “The Cost” as mentioned in this paragraph means the actual cost of material and labour, including vacation pay, WSIB, and unemployment insurance and shall be documented by material quantities and unit costs, together with labour and machine hours and unit costs. “Overhead” as mentioned in this paragraph, means all expenses to carry on work, except items included in the cost as defined above and shall include but shall not be limited to: Use of Plant, tools, supervisory staff, bonds, and insurance.” Where a change involves an extra/credit of more than $10,000, smaller mark-up percentages must be negotiated to reflect a fair mark-up considering the volume of work involved.”



GC6.3 CHANGE DIRECTIVE In paragraph 6.3.6, delete subparagraph 6.3.6.3 and replace with the following: “The Contractor’s fee for overhead and profit shall be calculated as described under GC6.2

CHANGE ORDER.” GC6.4 CONCEALED OR UNKNOWN CONDITIONS Add new paragraph 6.4.5: “6.4.5 The Contractor confirms that, prior to bidding the Project, it carefully investigated

the Place of the Work. The Contractor is not entitled to compensation or to an extension of the Contract Time for conditions which would reasonably have been ascertained by the Contractor by such careful investigation undertaken prior to the submission of the bid.”

GC6.5 DELAYS To paragraph 6.5.1, in the third line, after the words “with the Contractor”, delete the period and add: “and as accepted in writing by the Owner.” To paragraph 6.5.1, delete the period at the end of the paragraph and add the following words to the end of the sentence: “, but excluding any consequential, indirect or special damages.” To paragraph 6.5.2, in the fourth line, after the words “with the Contractor”, delete the period and add: “and as accepted in writing by the Owner.” To paragraph 6.5.3, in the ninth line, after the words “with the Contractor”, delete the period and add: “and as accepted in writing by the Owner.” To paragraph 6.5.4, in the first line, after the words “to the Consultant”, add: “and accepted in writing by the Owner.”



GC6.5 DELAYS – CONT’D… Add new paragraph 6.5.6 as follows: “6.5.6 If the Contractor is delayed in the performance of the Work by an act or omission of the

Contractor or anyone employed or engaged by the Contractor directly or indirectly, or by any cause within the Contractor’s control, then the Contract Time shall be extended for such reasonable time as the Consultant may decide in consultation with the Contractor and the Owner. The Owner shall be reimbursed by the Contractor for all reasonable costs incurred by the Owner as the result of such delay, including all services required by the Owner from the Consultant as a result of such delay by the Contractor and, in particular, the cost of the Consultant’s services during the period between the date of Substantial Performance of the Work in Article A-1 herein as the same may be extended through the provisions of these General Conditions and any later, actual date of Substantial Performance of the Work achieved by the Contractor.”

GC 6.6 CLAIMS FOR A CHANGE IN CONTRACT PRICE Revise paragraph 6.6.5 as follows:

.1 In the second line, add the words “as noted in paragraph 6.6.3”, after the words “of the claim”.

.2 At the end of the paragraph, delete the period and add the words “and the Consultant.”

GC7.1 OWNER’S RIGHT TO PERFORM WORK, TERMINATE THE CONTRACTOR’S RIGHT TO CONTINUE

WITH THE WORK, OR TERMINATE THE CONTRACT.

Add new subparagraph 7.1.3.4 as follows: “7.1.3.4 An “acceptable schedule” as referred to in 7.1.3.2 of the General Conditions means a schedule

approved by the Consultant and the Owner wherein the default can be corrected within the balance of the Contract Time and shall not cause delay to any other aspect of the Work or the work of other contractors, and in no event shall it be deemed to give a right to extend the Contract Time.”

Add new paragraph 7.1.7 as follows: “7.1.7 If the Owner proceeds to correct a default, as provided in paragraph 7.1.4.1, when the Contractor

has failed to correct a default within the time period specified or otherwise agreed to in writing, the Owner may arrange for correction of such Work by other forces without further notice. The cost of such Work shall be deducted from the Contract Amount regardless of whether the Work has been previously been certified for payment.”



GC7.2 CONTRACTOR’S RIGHT TO STOP THE WORK OR TERMINATE THE CONTRACT 7.2.3 Delete paragraph 7.2.3.1 to conform to the deletion of GC5.1. Add subparagraph 7.2.3.5 as follows: “7.2.3.5 The foregoing defaults in contractual obligations shall not apply to the withholding of certificates

or payments, or both, in accordance with the General Conditions, because of the Contractor’s failure to pay all legitimate claims promptly, nor because of the registration of liens against the Owner’s property, until such claims and liens are discharged.”

Change paragraph 7.2.4 as follows: In the second line, delete “5 Working Days” and replace with “10 Working Days.” Change paragraph 7.2.5 as follows: Delete the words “and such other damages as the Contractor may have sustained as the result of

the termination of the Contract.” GC7.2 CONTRACTOR’S RIGHT TO STOP THE WORK OR TERMINATE THE CONTRACT – CONT’D Add new paragraph 7.2.6 as follows: “7.2.6 If the Contractor stops the Work or terminates the Contract in accordance with the paragraphs

above, he shall leave the site and the Work in a secure condition as required by jurisdictional authorities and the Contract Documents.”

GC8.2 NEGOTIATION, MEDIATION AND ARBITRATION After paragraph 8.2.8, add new paragraphs 8.2.9 to 8.2.15 inclusive: “8.2.9 Within five (5) days of receipt of the notice of arbitration by the responding party under

paragraph 8.2.6, the Owner and the Contractor shall give the Consultant a written notice containing:

.1 a copy of the notice of arbitration .2 a copy of paragraphs 8.2.9 to 8.2.15 of this Contract, and; .3 any claims or issues which the Contractor or the Owner, as the case may be, wishes to raise in relation to the Consultant, arising out of the issues in dispute in the arbitration.”

“8.2.10 The Owner and the Contractor agree that the Consultant may elect, within ten (10) days of

receipt of the notice under paragraph 8.2.9, to become a full party to the arbitration under paragraph 8.2.6 if the Consultant:

.1 has vested or contingent financial interest in the outcome of the arbitration .2 gives the notice of election to the Owner and the Contractor before the arbitrator is

appointed .3 agrees to be a party to the arbitration within the meaning of the rules referred to in

paragraph 8.2.6, and, .4 agrees to be bound by the arbitral award made in the arbitration.”



GC8.2 NEGOTIATION, MEDIATION AND ARBITRATION – CONT’D…

“8.2.11 If an election is made under paragraph 8.2.10, the Consultant may participate in the appointment of the arbitrator and, notwithstanding the rules referred to in paragraph 8.2.6, the time period for reaching agreement on the appointment of the arbitrator shall begin to run from the date the Owner receives a copy of the notice of arbitration.

“8.2.12 The arbitrator in the arbitration in which the Consultant has elected under paragraph 8.2.10 to

become a full party may: .1 on application of the Owner or the Contractor, determine whether the Consultant has

satisfied the requirements of paragraph 8.2.10, and; .2 make any procedural order considered necessary to facilitate the addition of the Consultant

as a party to the arbitration.” “8.2.13 The provisions of paragraph 8.2.9 shall apply mutatis mutandis to written notice to be given by

the Consultant to any subconsultant.” “8.2.14 In the event of notice of arbitration given by a Consultant to a subconsultant, the subconsultant

is not entitled to any election with respect to the proceeding as outlined in paragraph 8.2.10, and is deemed to be bound by the arbitration proceeding.”

GC9.1 PROTECTION OF WORK AND PROPERTY Delete subparagraph 9.1.1.1 in its entirety and substitute new subparagraph 9.1.1.1: “9.1.1.1 Errors in the Contract Documents which the Contractor could not have discovered applying the

standard of care described in paragraph 3.14.1;” Delete paragraph 9.1.2 in its entirety and replace with the following: “9.1.2 Before commencing any Work, the Contractor shall determine the locations of all underground

utilities and structures indicated in the Contract Documents, or that are discoverable by applying to an inspection of the Place of the Work the degree of care and skill described in paragraph 3.14.1.”

GC9.2 TOXIC AND HAZARDOUS SUSSTANCES Add to paragraph 9.2.6, in the second line after the word “responsible”, the following:

“or whether any toxic or hazardous substances or materials already at the Place of the Work (and which were then harmless or stored, contained or otherwise dealt with in accordance with legal and regulatory requirements) were dealt with by the Contractor or anyone for whom the Contractor is responsible in a manner which does not comply with legal and regulatory requirements, or which threatens human health and safety or the environment, or material damage to the property of the Owner or others,”

Add “and the Consultant” after the word “Contractor” in subparagraph 9.2.7.4.



GC9.2 TOXIC AND HAZARDOUS SUSSTANCES – CONT’D… Add to paragraph 9.2.8 after the word “responsible”, the following:

“or that any toxic or hazardous substances or materials already at the Place of the Work (and

which were then harmless or stored, contained or otherwise dealt with in accordance with legal and regulatory requirements) were dealt with by the Contractor or anyone for whom the Contractor is responsible in a manner which does not comply with legal and regulatory requirements, or which threatens human health and safety or the environment, or material damage to the property of the Owner or others,”

GC9.4 CONSTRUCTION SAFETY In paragraph 9.4.1 on the first line delete the words “Subject to paragraph 3.2.2.2 of GC3.2 – CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR OTHER CONTRACTORS, the” and replace with the word “The”. GC9.6 OCCUPANCY PRIOR TO SUBSTANTIAL PERFORMANCE OF THE WORK Add new General Condition 9.6 – OCCUPANCY PRIOR TO SUBSTANTIAL PERFORMANCE OF THE WORK. Add new paragraphs 9.6.1 through 9.6.4, as follows: “9.6.1 The Owner, its agents and other Contractors shall have the right to enter upon, and the Owner

shall have the right to take possession of, the Work in whole or in part for the purpose of placing fittings and equipment or for other use before the completion of the Contract, if, in the opinion of the Consultant, such entry and taking possession does not prevent or interfere with the Contractor’s work to complete the Work within the time specified. Such entry and taking possession shall not be considered as acceptance of the Work nor in any way shall it relieve the Contractor of his responsibility to complete the Contract.”

“9.6.2 The Contractor shall, as directed by the Consultant to give priority to certain parts of the Work

and bring such parts to a “ready to use” status. Such instructions may require installation of temporary stairs and exits and temporary services, all of which shall be provided and subsequently removed.”

“9.6.3 The Contractor shall maintain full access to the building for the Owner’s use, as required. The

Contractor shall maintain or restore heat and power to the above areas when necessary or as scheduled. Keep existing utilities and services functional.”

“9.6.4 The Contractor shall inform Insurance or Surety Company or Companies who have issued

Performance Bonds, Liability Insurance and Property Insurance for this Contract, of the extent of the occupancy. If the occupancy by the Owner requires adjustments of the bonds, or insurances, the Contractor shall, subject to the Owner’s approval, initiate and pay for such adjustments on behalf of the Owner and a Change Order will be issued.”

GC10.2 LAWS, NOTICES, PERMITS AND FEES In paragraph 10.2.2 insert the following at the end of the paragraph: “The Contractor shall pay construction damage deposits levied by the municipality in connection

with the issuance of the building permit.”



GC10.2 LAWS, NOTICES, PERMITS AND FEES – CONT’D… Revise paragraph 10.2.5, by revising the beginning of the first sentence to read: “Subject to GC3.14, paragraph 3.14.1, the Contractor shall not be…” Add new paragraphs as follows: “10.2.8 The Building Permit Copy” of the Drawings and Specifications approved by the Chief Building

Official and issued as part of the Building Permit shall be reviewed by the Consultant for any requirements which could affect the Contract Documents. It shall then be kept on the job and maintained in good condition from commencement to completion of the Work. On completion of the Work this Building Permit copy shall be delivered in good condition to the Consultant.”

GC10.2 LAWS, NOTICES, PERMITS AND FEES – CONT’D… “10.2.9 The Contractor shall pay any Municipal security deposits required by the Authorities as a

condition of the issuance of the Building Permit. The Contractor shall be responsible for removing mud and other debris that accumulates on the public street during construction. If the Contractor does not comply with notification from the Municipality to clean the affected street within twenty-four (24) hours, then the local authority having jurisdiction shall have the right to clean the affected street at the sole expense of the Contractor.”

GC11.1 INSURANCE Add new subparagraphs: “11.1.9 In addition to general liability insurance to be carried by the Contractor, the Contractor shall

provide fire insurance acceptable to the Owner, with standard extended coverage endorsement, in the joint names of the Owner, the Contractor and the Consultant for the full amount of the Contract, payable to the Owner and Contractor as their respective interests may appear, and protecting each in such terms as will preclude subrogation claims by the Insurer against anyone insured thereunder. The insurance coverage shall provide for the standard fire and extended coverage perils, endorsement K, and malicious damage endorsement”.

“11.1.10 The Contractor and Subcontractors shall be responsible for fire insurance on their own plant and

equipment”. “11.1.11 Prior to the commencement of any work hereunder, the Contractor shall file with the Owner a

copy of each insurance policy and certificate required. All such insurance shall be maintained until issuance of the Consultant’s final certificate for payment under the Contract and payment by the Owner to the Contractor of the final payment under the Contract including the making good of faulty work or materials; except that coverage of completed operations liability shall in any event be maintained for twelve (12) months from date of final payment as certified by the Consultant”.



GC11.1 INSURANCE – CONT’D… “11.1.12 In the event of a loss, the Contractor shall act on behalf of the Owner and himself for the purpose

of adjusting the amount of such loss with the Insurer. On completion of such adjustment the Contractor shall repair the damage and complete the Work, and shall be entitled to receive from the Owner (in addition to any sum due under the Contract) the amount at which the Owner’s interest has been appraised in the adjustment, to be paid as the work of restoration proceeds in accordance with the Consultant’s certificates. Damage shall not affect the rights and obligations of either party under the Contract except as aforesaid, and except that the Contractor shall be entitled to such reasonable extension of time for completion of the work as the Consultant may decide”.

GC11.2 CONTRACT SECURITY Add new paragraphs 11.2.3 to 11.2.7 inclusive: “11.2.3 The Contractor, after receiving written notification from the Owner, within forty-eight (48) hours

of such notification, and prior to the signing of the Contract, shall provide a performance bond and a labour and materials payment bond, each in the amount of 50% of the Contract Price issued by a duly incorporated and nationally recognized surety company approved by the Owner, guaranteeing the faithful performance of the Contract in accordance with the Contract Documents including the requirements for warranties as provided for in paragraph GC12.3 WARRANTY, and the payment of all obligations incurred in the event of the Contractor’s default, including, but not limited to the following.

.1 The payment of all legal, accounting, architectural, engineering and other Consultant’s expenses incurred by the Owner in determining the extent of Work executed and any additional work required as a result of the interruption of the Work, and its completion.

.2 The payment of additional expenses to the Owner in the form of security guard services, light, heat, power, and other related costs, payable over the period between the default of the Contract and commencement of the Work under the terms of this Article.”

“11.2.4 Without limiting the foregoing in any way, the bonds shall indemnify and hold harmless the

Owner from and against any and all costs and expenses (including legal and Consultant services and court costs) arising out of or as a consequence of any default of the Contractor under this Contract.”

“11.2.5 The form of such bonds shall be in accordance with the latest edition of the CCDC approved bond

forms, modified as may be necessary to incorporate the requirements stated herein.” “11.2.6 The Contractor shall be responsible for notifying the surety company of any changes made to the

Contract during the course of construction.” “11.2.7 Should the Owner require additional bonds by the Contractor or any of his Subcontractors, after

the receipt of bids for the Work, the Contract Price shall be increased by all costs attributable to providing such bonds. The Contractor shall promptly provide the Owner, through the Consultant, with any such bonds that may be required.”



GC12.1 INDEMNIFICATION Add new subparagraph 12.1.1.3. “12.1.1 .3 The Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless the Consultant, its agents and

employees from and against claims, demands, losses, costs, damages, actions, suits, or proceedings by third parties that arise out of, or are attributable to, the Contractor’s performance of the Contract, provided such claims are attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease, or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property, and caused by negligent acts or omissions of the Contractor or anyone for whose acts the Contractor may be liable, and made in writing within a period of six (6) years from the date of Substantial Performance of the Work as set out in the certificate of Substantial Performance of the Work, or within such shorter period as may be prescribed by any limitation statute or the province or territory of the Place of the Work.”

Amend subparagraph 12.1.2.2 as follows: In the third line, delete the amount “$2,000,000.” and substitute “$5,000,000.” G12.3 WARRANTY Change paragraph 12.3.2 to read: “The Contractor expressly warrants and guarantees to the Owner that the Work performed by

the Contractor and by all workers, suppliers, and subcontractors conforms to the requirements of the Contract Documents and is performed in a safe and careful manner.”

To paragraph 12.3.4 add new sentence: “The warranty period shall recommence for corrected work.” Add new paragraph 12.3.7 as follows: “12.3.7 The Contractor shall commence to correct any deficiency within five (5) Working Days after

receiving a notice from the Consultant and complete the Work as expeditiously as possible, except that in the case of urgent repairs, where the deficiency would prevent maintaining security or operating, as designed, of basic systems essential to the ongoing business of the Owner, all necessary corrections and/or installations or temporary replacements shall be carried out immediately as an emergency service. Should the Contractor fail to provide this emergency service within eight (8) hours of a request received during normal business hours of the Contractor the Owner is authorized, irrespective of the conditions of GC7.1, to carryout all necessary repairs or replacements at the Contractor’s expense.”

Winchester Public School Childcare Renovation 01 00 00 MCA File No. 18044 General Requirements


PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

.1 Work covered by Contract Documents.

.2 Cash Allowances.

.3 Contingency Allowance.

.4 Alternatives.

.5 Project coordination and organization.

.6 Cutting and patching.

.7 Project meetings.

.8 Submittals.

.9 Schedules.

.10 Quality control.

.11 Construction facilities and temporary controls.

.12 Material and equipment.

.13 Project closeout.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

.1 Document 00 21 00 - Instructions to Bidders.

.2 Document 00 52 00 - Agreement Form, Definitions and General Conditions.

1.03 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

.1 Title and Description of the Work: The Work of this Contract is identified as Winchester Public School Childcare Renovation and is comprised of selected interior demolition and renovations; limited site work including new parking spaces, curbs, sodding, paving, fencing, synthetic grass surfaces, tree planting, sandboxes; structural, mechanical and electrical associated works. The Project is located at 70 Watford Street, Brooklin, ON.

.2 Contract Method: CCDC2 - 2008, Stipulated Price Contract, English version.

.3 Work by Others: .1 Work excluded from this Contract: Furniture, equipment, furnishings, and fixtures installed

by the Owner and identified as ‘NIC’ in the Contract Documents. .2 Work of this Project shall include coordinating delivery, storage, and handling, and

providing installation of items supplied by the Owner which are identified as ‘SBO’ in the Contract Documents.

.4 Regulating Authorities and Documents: .1 Conform to the requirements of Authorities Having Jurisdiction including Public Utilities. .2 Waste Auditing and Reduction:

.1 Comply with O.Reg. 102/94, Waste Audits and Waste Reduction Workplans and O. Reg. 103/94, Industrial, Commercial and Institutional Source Separations Programs.

.5 Dates for the Work: .1 Anticipated Project Start Date: July 1, 2020 .2 The Contract shall be Substantially Performed by December 1, 2020. Occupancy Permit

must be signed off by the municipal building department. .6 This project is based on the International System of Units (SI). Measurements are expressed in

metric (SI) units. All dimensions shall be expressed in metres and millimetres.

1.04 CASH ALLOWANCES

.1 Refer to GC 4.1 - CASH ALLOWANCES

.2 Supply only cash allowances, unless otherwise specified, cover net cost to the Contractor of Products, delivery to site, taxes and duties, but exclude H.S.T.

01 00 00 Winchester Public School Childcare Renovation General Requirements MCA File No. 18044


.3 Supply and installation cash allowances, unless otherwise specified, cover net cost to the Contractor of services, Products, Labour, Construction Equipment, freight, delivery to site, handling, unloading, storage, installation, taxes, and other authorized expenses incurred in performing the Work, but exclude H.S.T.

.4 Inspection and testing cash allowances, unless otherwise specified, cover net cost to the Contractor of inspection and testing services, and taxes, but exclude H.S.T.

.5 The Contract Price, and not the cash allowance, includes the Contractor=s coordination and overhead and profit in connection with such cash allowance.

.6 The total cash allowance amount will be adjusted in whole by way of Change Order prior to the issuance of the final Certificate of Payment.

.7 Supply Only Cash Allowances: Not Used.

.8 Supply and Installation Cash Allowances: .1 Interior signage. .2 Window blinds

.9 Inspection and Testing Cash Allowances: .1 Grading, excavation and backfilling. .2 Asphalt paving inspection and testing. .3 Concrete inspection and testing .4 Masonry and mortar testing

.10 Total Cash Allowance Amount: $ 60,000.00

1.05 CONTINGENCY ALLOWANCE

.1 No contingency allowance is included in the Contract.

1.06 ALTERNATES

.1 Indicate variation of Bid Price for Alternates described below and listed in the Bid Form. Note that this form requests a ‘difference’ in Bid Price by adding to or deducting from the Bid Price.

.2 The Owner reserves the right to accept or reject any alternate. Unless an alternate is formally accepted in writing by the Owner, the Contractor shall provide the specified Base Bid Product, material, or system.

.3 Refer to Document 00 21 00 - Instructions to Bidders: Product/System Options for Contractor proposed alternates to specified work.

.4 Refer to Material and Equipment article below for procedures regarding substitutions.

1.07 PROJECT COORDINATION

.1 Coordinate progress of the Work, progress schedules, submittals, use of site, temporary utilities, construction facilities and controls.

.2 Existing Utilities: When breaking into or connecting to existing services or utilities, execute work at times directed by local governing authorities, with a minimum of disturbance to the Work, building occupants, and pedestrian and vehicular traffic.

.3 Protect, relocate or maintain existing active services. When services are encountered, cap off in a manner approved by the authority having jurisdiction, stake and record location of capped services.

.4 Owner Occupancy: .1 Construct the Work in stages to accommodate the Owner’s continued use of the premises

during construction. .2 Maintain public usage of building facilities and exits. Ensure fire protection equipment and

fire alarms are operational at all times. .3 Coordinate any necessary interruptions with the Owner and obtain approval prior to

interrupting safety systems.



.4 Take reasonable measures to control noise and other objectionable effects. Schedule these operations for off hours, whenever possible, and obtain Owner’s approval prior to proceeding with such work when this is not possible.

1.08 CUTTING AND PATCHING

.1 Approvals: Submit written request in advance of cutting or alteration which affects: .1 Structural integrity of any element of project. .2 Integrity of weather-exposed or moisture-resistant elements. .3 Efficiency, maintenance, or safety of any operational element. .4 Visual qualities of sight-exposed elements. .5 Work of Owner or separate contractor.

.2 Inspection: .1 Inspect existing conditions, including elements subject to damage or movement during

cutting and patching. .2 After uncovering, inspect conditions affecting performance of work. .3 Beginning of cutting or patching means acceptance of existing conditions.

.3 Execution: .1 Perform cutting, fitting, and patching (including excavation and fill), to complete the Work. .2 Remove and replace defective and non-conforming work. .3 Provide openings in non-structural elements of the Work for penetrations of mechanical

and electrical work. .4 Perform work to avoid damage to other work. .5 Prepare proper surfaces to receive patching and finishing. .6 Employ original installer to perform cutting and patching for weather-exposed and

moisture-resistant elements, and sight-exposed surfaces. .7 Cut rigid materials using power saw or core drill. Pneumatic or impact tools are not

allowed. .8 No dry cutting is permitted on site. Wet cutting only. .9 Restore work with new products in accordance with Contract Documents. .10 Fit work tight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through surfaces. .11 At penetration of fire-rated wall, ceiling, or floor construction, completely seal voids with

fire-rated material, specified in Section 07 84 00 - Fire Stopping and Smoke Seals, full thickness of construction element.

.12 Refinish surfaces to match adjacent finishes; for continuous surfaces refinish to nearest intersection; for an assembly, refinish entire unit.

1.09 PROJECT MEETINGS

.1 Schedule and administer project progress meetings throughout progress of work.

.2 Distribute to the Owner and Consultant written notice of each meeting four working days in advance of meeting date to Consultant and Owner.

.3 Provide physical space and make arrangements for meetings.

.4 Record minutes. Include significant proceedings and decisions. Identify action by parties in the right-hand column of the minutes page.

.5 Reproduce and distribute copies of minutes within three working days after each meeting and transmit to meeting participants, affected parties not in attendance, the Consultant and the Owner.

1.10 SUBMITTALS

.1 Administrative: .1 Submit to the Consultant submittals listed for review. Submit with reasonable promptness

and in an orderly sequence so as to not cause delay in the Work. .2 Work affected by the submittal shall not proceed until the review is complete.



.3 Review submittals prior to submission to Consultant. This review represents that necessary requirements have been determined and verified, or will be, and that each submittal has been checked and co-ordinated with requirements of the Work and Contract Documents.

.4 Verify field measurements and affected adjacent works are coordinated.

.5 For sections of the Work where both shop drawing and sample submissions are specified, the requested samples shall be submitted together with the shop drawings. Shop drawing submissions not accompanied by the appropriate samples shall be considered incomplete.

.2 Shop Drawings and Product Data: .1 Refer to GC 3.10 - SHOP DRAWINGS AND OTHER SUBMITTALS. .2 Manufacturer’s Certification:

.1 Product manufacturers shall review, stamp, and initial shop drawings prior to the Consultant’s review.

.2 For sections of the Work where Products are specified by manufacturer=s name and Product name or model number, shop drawing submissions shall be accompanied by a letter of certification prepared by the Product manufacturer.

.3 The manufacturer’s letter of certification shall be dated and include the following: .1 Name of Project and the Consultant’s Project number. .2 Name of the Subcontractor. .3 Name of the manufacturer’s contact person with telephone and fax numbers. .4 A complete list of Products, including series numbers, model numbers, and styles. .5 Certification that the details shown on the Shop Drawings accurately depict the

identified manufacturer’s Products. .6 Certification that the Subcontractor has issued a purchase order, letter of intent,

or otherwise entered into a contract with the Product manufacturer. .4 Refer to Material and Equipment article below for requirements regarding

manufacturer’s inspection and certification. .3 ‘Shop Drawings’ means drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules, performance charts,

brochures and other data which are to be provided by the Contractor to illustrate details of a portion of the Work.

.4 Indicate materials, methods of construction and attachment or anchorage, erection diagrams, connection, explanatory notes and other information necessary for completion of work.

.5 Adjustments made on Shop Drawings by Consultant are not intended to change the Contract Price.

.6 Make changes in Shop Drawings as the Consultant may require.

.7 Submit one electronic PDF copy Shop Drawings for each requirement requested in specification sections and as the Consultant may reasonably request.

.8 Submit 2 copies of product data sheets or brochures for requirements requested in specification sections and as the Consultant may reasonably request where Shop Drawings will not be prepared due to standardized manufacture of product.

.3 Samples: .1 Submit for review, samples in duplicate as requested in respective specification Sections. .2 Deliver samples prepaid to the Consultant’s business address.

.4 Operating and Maintenance Manuals: .1 Two weeks prior to date of Substantial Performance of the Work, submit to the

Consultant, two copies of operating and maintenance manuals. .2 Manuals shall contain operational information on equipment, cleaning and lubrication

schedules, filters, overhaul and adjustment schedules and similar maintenance information.

.3 Bind contents in three-ring, hard covered, plastic jacketed binders. Organize contents into applicable categories of work, parallel to specifications sections.

.5 As-Built Drawings:



.1 After award of the Contract, the Consultant will provide a set of drawings for the purpose of maintaining as-built drawings. Accurately and neatly record deviations from Contract Documents caused by site conditions and changes ordered by the Consultant.

.2 Record locations of concealed components of mechanical and electrical services.

.3 Identify drawings as ‘Project As-Built Copy”. Maintain in new condition and make available for inspection on site by the Consultant.

.4 On completion of work and prior to final inspection, submit as-built documents to the Consultant.

1.11 SCHEDULES

.1 Schedules Required: .1 Construction Progress Schedule. .2 Submittal Schedule for Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples.

.2 Format: .1 Prepare schedule in form of horizontal bar chart. .2 Provide separate bar for each trade or operation. .3 Provide horizontal time scale identifying first work day of each week. .4 Format for listings: List of Contents of this specification

.3 Submissions: .1 Submit initial schedules within 15 days after award of the Contract. .2 Submit 2 copies to be retained by Consultant. .3 Consultant will review schedule and return reviewed copy within 10 days after receipt. .4 Resubmit finalized schedule within 7 days after return of reviewed copy.

1.12 QUALITY CONTROL

.1 Inspection: .1 Refer to GC 2.3 - REVIEW AND INSPECTION OF THE WORK. .2 The Owner and the Consultant shall have access to the Work. .3 Give timely notice requesting inspection if work is designated for special tests, inspections

or approvals by Consultant instructions, or law of the Place of the Work. .4 If the Contractor covers or permits to be covered work that has been designated for special

tests, inspections or approvals before such is made, uncover such work, have the inspections or tests satisfactorily completed and make good such work.

.2 Independent Inspection Agencies: .1 Independent Inspection and Testing Agencies will be engaged by the Consultant for

purpose of inspecting and testing portions of the Work. Cost of such services will be borne by Owner.

.2 Provide equipment required for executing inspection and testing by appointed agencies. .3 Reports:

.1 Submit 2 copies of inspection and testing reports promptly to the Consultant.

.2 Provide copies to Subcontractor of work being inspected or tested. Manufacturer/fabricator of material being inspected or tested.

1.13 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS

.1 Installation and Removal: .1 Provide construction facilities and temporary controls in order to execute the Work

expeditiously. .2 Remove from site all such work after use.

.2 Hoarding:



.1 Erect site and interior hoarding where indicated on Drawings and as may be required by the owner and consultant on site to protect the public and workers from injury, and public and private property from damage.

.2 Provide site hoarding comprised of leased modular wire fencing 1.80m high complete with all required fittings and bases. Provide lockable gates within hoarding for access to site by workers and vehicles.

.3 Provide interior hoarding comprised of 11mm OSB (Aspenite) on 90mm steel studs at 600mm on centre. Interior hoarding to extend from finished floor up to underside of existing suspended ceiling system.

.3 Weather Enclosures: .1 Provide weathertight closures to unfinished openings in exterior walls. .2 Close off floor areas where walls are not finished; seal off other openings; enclose building

interior work area for temporary heat. .4 Dust Tight Screens:

.1 Provide dust tight screens or partitions to localize dust generating activities, and for protection of workers, finished areas of Work and the public.

.2 Maintain and relocate protection until such work is complete. .5 Protection of Building Finishes and Equipment:

.1 Provide protection for finished and partially finished building finishes and equipment during performance of the Work.

.2 Provide necessary screens, covers, and hoarding as required.

.3 Be responsible for damage incurred due to lack of or improper protection. .6 Dewatering: Provide temporary drainage and pumping facilities to keep excavations and site

free from standing water. .7 Site Storage and Loading:

.1 Refer to GC 3.11 - USE OF THE WORK

.2 Confine the Work and operations of employees to limits indicated by the Contract Documents. Do not unreasonably encumber premises with Products.

.8 Sanitary Facilities: .1 Provide sufficient sanitary facilities for workers in accordance with local health authorities. .2 Maintain in clean condition and keep stocked with supplies. .3 Existing facilities as designated may be used during construction period.

.9 Water Supply: .1 The existing building water service may be used to supply potable water for construction

use. .10 Temporary Heating:

.1 Provide temporary heating required during construction period, including attendance, maintenance and fuel.

.2 Construction heaters used inside building must be vented to outside or be non-flameless type. Solid fuel salamanders not permitted.

.3 Maintain temperatures of minimum 10 degrees Celsius in areas where construction is in progress, unless indicated otherwise in specifications.

.4 Ventilate heated areas and keep building free of exhaust or combustion gases.

.5 Permanent heating system of building, or portions thereof, may be used when available. Be responsible for damage thereto.

.11 Temporary Power and Light: .1 The existing building electrical service may be used during construction for temporary

lighting and operation of power tools, to maximum supply allowed by the existing electrical service.

.2 Provide and maintain temporary lighting throughout the Project. Level of illumination on all floors and stairs shall not be less than 162 lx (15 foot candles).

.12 Temporary Computer, and Fax:



.1 Provide and maintain on site a computer with E-mail capability.

.2 Provide and maintain a fax machine on site complete with a separate dedicated telephone line.

.13 Equipment, Tool, and Materials Storage: .1 Provide and maintain, in clean and orderly condition, lockable weatherproof sheds for

storage of tools, equipment and materials. .2 Locate materials not required to be stored in weatherproof sheds on site in manner to

cause least interference with work activities. .14 Project Cleanliness and Property Protection:

.1 Maintain the Work in tidy condition, free from accumulation of waste products and debris.

.2 Remove waste material and debris from the Work and deposit in waste container or remove from site at end of each working day.

.3 Clean interior areas prior to start of finish work, maintain areas free of dust and other contaminants during finishing operations.

.4 Protect surrounding private and public property from damage during performance of the Work.

.5 Keep municipal roadways and sidewalks adjacent to the site clean and free of mud, dust, dirt, and debris.

.6 No dry cutting of any masonry is permitted. Wet cutting only.

1.14 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT

.1 Product and Material Quality: .1 Refer to GC 3.8 - LABOUR AND PRODUCTS. .2 Products, materials, equipment and articles (referred to as Products throughout

specifications) incorporated in the Work shall be new, not damaged or defective, and of best quality (compatible with specifications) for purpose intended. If requested, furnish evidence as to type, source and quality of Products provided.

.3 Defective Products, will be rejected, regardless of previous inspections. Inspection does not relieve responsibility, but is precaution against oversight or error. Remove and replace defective Products at own expense and be responsible for delays and expenses caused by rejection.

.4 Should any dispute arise as to quality or fitness of Products, the decision rests strictly with the Consultant based upon requirements of the Contract Documents.

.2 Availability and Substitutions: .1 Provide products as specified in these specifications or as identified on Drawings. Where

several proprietary Products are specified for an item, and they are not identified as alternatives, then any one of the several is acceptable. Refer to Alternates article above for procedures to incorporate specified alternatives into the Work.

.2 During the bid period and prior to the Contract signing alternates may be proposed by the Contractor. Refer to Document 00 21 00 - Instructions to Bidders: Product/System Options for procedures to incorporate proposed alternates into the Work.

.3 Except as provided in subparagraphs .4 and .5, no substitutions to specified Products will be accepted after the Contract has been signed.

.4 Immediately upon signing the Contract, review Product delivery requirements and anticipate foreseeable supply delays for any items. If delays in supply of Products are foreseeable, or if it is found that specified materials have become unavailable for incorporating into the Work, notify the Consultant of such, in order that substitutions or other remedial action may be authorized in ample time to prevent delays in the performance of the Work.

.5 In the event of failure to notify the Consultant at the commencement of the Work and should it subsequently appear that the Work may be delayed for such reason, the Consultant reserves the right to substitute more readily available products of similar



character, at no increase in the Contract Price. In every case the Contractor shall be responsible for changes in space requirements regarding substituted Products.

.3 Transportation, Storage, Handling and Protection: .1 Pay transportation costs of Products required in the performance of the Work. .2 Handle and store products in manner to prevent damage, adulteration, deterioration and

soiling and in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions when applicable. .3 Store packaged or bundled Products in original and undamaged condition with

manufacturer’s seals and labels intact. .4 Store products subject to damage from weather in weatherproof enclosures.

.4 Manufacturer’s Instructions: .1 Unless otherwise indicated in Specifications install or erect Products in accordance with

manufacturer’s instructions. Do not rely on labels or enclosures provided with Products. Obtain written instructions directly from manufacturers.

.2 Notify the Consultant in writing, of conflicts between the specifications and manufacturer’s instructions, so that the Consultant may establish the course of action.

.3 Improper installation of erection of Products, due to failure in complying with these requirements, authorizes the Consultant to require removal and reinstallation at no increase in Contract Price.

.5 Manufacturer’s Inspection and Certification: .1 Whenever indicated on the drawings, in the Specifications, or in manufacturers= or

Suppliers’ written instructions, manufacturers’ representatives shall inspect work that incorporates their materials or Products.

.2 When manufacturer inspection is required, the manufacturer’s representative shall be on site at the start of work that incorporates the manufacturer’s Products, in order to verify that the correct Products are installed and proper installation procedures are followed.

.3 When the work incorporating the manufacturer’s Products is completed, the manufacturer’s representative shall carry out a final inspection in order to verify that the work as installed complies with the Contract Documents and the approved shop drawings.

.4 After the manufacturer’s final inspection, the manufacturer shall prepare a letter of certification of inspection. This letter shall be submitted to the Contractor for inclusion with the documentation required in the Project Closeout article below.

.5 The letter of certification of inspection shall be dated and include the following: .1 Name of Project and the Consultant’s Project number. .2 Name of Subcontractor. .3 Name of manufacturer’s contact person, and on-site representative if different,

with telephone and fax numbers. .4 Dates of on-site inspections, including start-up and final inspection. .5 Certification that the work as installed incorporates the correct materials and

Products and satisfies the requirements of the Contract Documents and approved shop drawings.

.6 Workmanship and Coordination: .1 Workmanship shall be best quality, executed by workers experienced and skilled in the

respective duties for which they are employed. Immediately notify the Consultant if required work is such as to make it impractical to produce required results.

.2 Do not employ any unfit person or anyone unskilled in their required duties.

.3 Decisions as to quality or fitness of workmanship in cases of dispute rest solely with the Consultant, whose decision is final.

.4 Ensure cooperation of workers in laying out work. Maintain efficient and continuous supervision. Coordinate placement of openings, sleeve, and accessories.

.7 Concealment: .1 In finished areas, conceal pipes, ducts and wiring in floors, walls and ceilings, except where

indicated otherwise.



.2 Before installation, inform the Consultant if there is a contradictory situation. Install as directed by the Consultant.

1.15 PROJECT CLOSEOUT

.1 Final Cleaning: .1 Refer to GC 3.13 - CLEANUP .2 When the Work is Substantially Performed, remove surplus products, tools construction

machinery and equipment not required for performance of the remaining work. .3 Contractor will be responsible for the removal of the dust protection of the furniture and

equipment in rooms 238-241 and the cleaning of the entire classrooms prior to turning the rooms over to the school.

.4 Contractor will be responsible for the cleaning of the entire General Office area and Spec. Ed. Room prior to turning the rooms over to the school.

.5 Remove waste materials and debris from site at regularly scheduled times or dispose of as directed by the Consultant. Do not burn waste materials on site, unless approved by the Consultant.

.6 Leave work broom clean before inspection process commences.

.7 Clean and polish glass, mirrors, hardware, wall tile, stainless steel, chrome, porcelain enamel, baked enamel, plastic laminate, mechanical and electrical fixtures. Replace broken, scratched or disfigured glass.

.8 Remove stains, spots, marks and dirt from decorative work, electrical and mechanical fixtures, furniture fitments, walls.

.9 Vacuum clean and dust building interiors, behind grilles, louvres and screens.

.10 Wax, seal, or prepare floor finishes, as recommended by the manufacturer.

.11 Broom clean and power wash exterior walks, steps and surfaces.

.12 Remove dirt and other disfigurations from exterior surfaces. .2 Systems Demonstrations:

.1 Prior to final inspection, demonstrate operation of each system to the Owner

.2 Instruct personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of equipment and systems, using provided operation and maintenance data as basis for instruction.

.3 Documents: .1 Collect reviewed submittals and assemble documents executed by Subcontractors,

suppliers, and manufacturers. .2 Submit material prior to final Application for Payment. .3 Submit operation and maintenance data, record (as-built) drawings, and manufacturers=

letters of certification of inspection. .4 Provide warranties and bonds fully executed and notarized. .5 Execute transition of Performance and Labour and Materials Payment Bond to warranty

period requirements. .6 Submit a final statement of accounting giving total adjusted Contract Price, previous

payments, and monies remaining due. .7 The Consultant will issue a final change order reflecting approved adjustments to the

Contract Price not previously made. .4 Spare Parts and Maintenance Materials:

.1 Provide spare parts and maintenance and extra materials in quantities specified in individual specification sections.

.2 Provide items of same manufacture and quality as items in the Work.

.3 Deliver to Project site in location as directed; place and store.

.4 Submit inventory list to the Consultant. Include approved lists in Maintenance Manual specified in Submittals article above.

.5 Inspection and Takeover Procedures:



.1 Comply with the provisions of OAA/OGCA Document No. 100, Take-Over Procedures, except as modified in these specifications.

.2 Prior to application for certificate of Substantial Performance, carefully inspect the Work and ensure it is complete, that major and minor construction deficiencies are complete, defects are corrected and building is clean and in condition for occupancy. Notify the Consultant, in writing, of satisfactory completion of the work and request an inspection.

.3 During the Consultant’s inspection, a list of deficiencies and defects will be tabulated. Correct same.

.4 When the Consultant considers deficiencies and defects have been corrected and it appears requirements of the Contract have been performed, make application for certificate of Substantial Performance. Refer to General Conditions Article GC 5.4 - SUBSTANTIAL PERFORMANCE OF THE WORK for specifics to the application.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not Used.

PART 3 EXECUTION

Not Used.

END OF SECTION

Winchester Public School Childcare Renovation 02 41 13 MCA File No. 18044 Sitework Demolition and Removal

02 41 13 - 1

April 9, 2020

PART 1 GENERAL


.1 Removal of asphalt pavement.

.2 Removal of Portland cement concrete pavement.

.3 Removal of curbs.

.4 Removal of miscellaneous site items.


.1 Section 01 00 00 - General Requirements.

.2 Section 02 41 19 - Selective Demolition.

.3 Section 31 23 00 - Grading, Excavating and Backfilling.

.4 Section 32 91 19 - Topsoil and Finish Grading.

1.03 STORAGE AND PROTECTION

.1 Protect in accordance with Section 31 23 00 - Grading, Excavating and Backfilling.

.2 Protect existing pavement and items designated to remain and items designated for salvage. In the event of damage to such items, immediately replace or make repairs to the approval of the Consultant and at no cost to the Owner.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not Used

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

.1 Inspect the site with the Consultant and verify the extent and location of items designated for removal, disposal, salvage and items to remain.

.2 Locate and protect utilities. Preserve active utilities traversing site in operating condition.

.3 Notify and obtain approval of utility companies before starting demolition.

3.02 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION

.1 Removal: .1 Remove items as indicated. .2 Do not disturb items designated to remain in place. .3 In removal of pavements, curbs and gutters:

.1 Square up adjacent surfaces to remain in place by neatly saw cutting or other method approved by the Consultant.

.2 Protect adjacent joints and load transfer devices.

.3 Protect underlying and adjacent granular materials. .4 Prevent contamination of removed asphalt pavement by topsoil, underlying gravel or other

materials. .5 Use equipment and methods of removal and hauling which do not tear, gouge, break, or

otherwise damage or disturb pavement to remain. .6 When removing pipes under existing or future pavement areas, excavate at least 300mm

below pipe invert. .7 Provide for suppression of dust generated by the removal process.

.2 Items to be Removed and Reused: .1 Carefully dismantle items designated for reuse or relocation and store in a secure location

or reinstall immediately. .2 Refer to site plan for items to be removed and reused or relocated.

02 41 13 Winchester Public School Childcare Renovation Sitework Demolition and Removal MCA File No. 18044

02 41 13 - 2 April 9, 2020

.3 Sealing: Seal pipe ends and walls of manholes or catch basins as required. Securely plug to form watertight seal.

.4 Disposal of Material: Dispose off-site materials not designated for salvage or re-use in the Work.

.5 Backfill in areas as indicated and in accordance with Section 31 23 00 - Grading, Excavating and Backfilling.

3.03 RESTORATION

.1 Restore areas and existing works outside areas of demolition to match condition of adjacent, undisturbed areas.

3.04 CLEANUP

.1 Upon completion of work, remove debris, trim surfaces and leave work site clean.

.2 Sweep remaining surfaces clean of debris resulting from removal operations using rotary power brooms and hand brooming as required.

END OF SECTION

Winchester Public School Childcare Renovation 02 41 19 MCA File No. 18044 Selective Demolition

02 41 19 - 1

April 9, 2020

PART 1 GENERAL


.1 Demolition and removal of interior non-load bearing walls and partitions.

.2 Demolition and removal of portions of interior load bearing walls.

.3 Demolition of portions of exterior walls at new openings.

.4 Salvaging and cleaning of existing brick from demolition at new openings in exterior walls.

.5 Removal of surface finishes, suspended ceilings, millwork, fitments, doors and windows.

.6 Removal of hazardous and designated substances.



1.03 STANDARDS

.1 Comply with O. Reg. 213/91, Regulations for Construction Projects, made under the Occupational Health and Safety Act.

1.04 ASBESTOS

.1 Demolition of spray or trowel applied asbestos can be hazardous to health. Should material resembling spray or trowel-applied asbestos be encountered, stop work and notify the Consultant immediately.

.2 Do not proceed until written instructions have been received from the Consultant.

.3 Refer to the Limited Designated Substance Survey Report for asbestos abatement procedures bound in Volume 1, Section 00 31 00 - Available Product Information.

1.05 PROTECTION

.1 Prevent movement, settlement, or other damage to adjacent structures, utilities, and parts of building to remain in place. Provide bracing and shoring as required. Shoring shall be designed by a Professional Engineer licensed to practise in the Province of Ontario.

.2 Keep noise, dust, and inconvenience to occupants to minimum.

.3 Protect building systems, services and equipment. Protect existing finished surfaces to remain in areas of the Work.

.4 During stages of the Work when portions of the building may be occupied by the Owner, maintain protected egress and access to exits at all times.

.5 Provide temporary barriers, security devices, dust screens, covers, railings, supports and other protection as required.

.6 Provide dust screens to limit spread of dust generated during demolition operations.

.7 Prevent debris from blocking surface drainage system, and mechanical and electrical systems which must remain in operation.

.8 Take precautions to support affected construction to remain during demolition of adjacent elements.

.9 Demolition Dust Control: .1 Designate truck loading points to avoid trucks tracking demolition debris off site. Loading

points shall be on a gravel base or paved area. Maintain in a clean condition. .2 Clean all vehicles leaving the site of dust from demolition debris. Include the washing of

tires and sweeping or washing of exteriors and tailgates by a designated labourer. .3 Tarp all vehicles leaving the site which are loaded with demolition debris.

.10 Waste Auditing and Reduction: .1 Demolition and construction waste shall be audited and source-separated as required

under the Environmental Protection Act. Materials that shall be source-separated include corrugated cardboard, brick, concrete, steel, wood, and gypsum board.

02 41 19 Winchester Public School Childcare Renovation Selective Demolition MCA File No. 18044

02 41 19 - 2 April 9, 2020

.2 Comply with O.Reg. 102/94, Waste Audits and Waste Reduction Workplans and O.Reg. 103/94, Industrial, Commercial and Institutional Source Separation Programs.

1.06 SHOP DRAWINGS

.1 Before proceeding with demolition or breaking out of load bearing walls or structure requiring shoring, provide to Authority Having Jurisdiction as may be required, shoring and underpinning drawings showing proposed methods prepared, sealed, and signed by a qualified Professional Engineer, licensed to practise in the Province of Ontario.

1.07 NOTICE

.1 Notify the Consultant before disrupting building access or services. Do not proceed with such disruption until directed to do so by the Consultant.

.2 Cease operations and notify the Consultant immediately if adjacent structures appear to be in danger. Do not resume operations until corrective measures have been taken.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not Used.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

.1 Erect and maintain weatherproof closures for exterior openings as specified in Section 01 00 00 – General Requirements.

.2 Erect and maintain temporary partitions to prevent the spread of dust, fumes, noise, and smoke and allow for Owner occupancy as specified in Section 01 00 00 – General Requirements.

.3 Protect existing items which are not indicated to be altered. Make Good any damage caused by alterations.

.4 Disconnect and remove or cap designated utility services in accordance with Authorities Having Jurisdiction. Mark locations of disconnected utilities. Identify and indicate locations on Project Record Documents.

.5 Do not disrupt active or energized utilities designated to remain undisturbed. Post warning signs on lines and equipment that must remain energized during demolition.

.6 Remove existing equipment, services and obstacles where required for re-finishing or making good of existing surfaces, and replace as work progresses.

.7 Natural gas lines shall only be removed by qualified trades people in accordance with the gas utility company=s instructions.

3.02 DEMOLITION, SALVAGE, AND DISPOSAL

.1 Review schedule of demolition with the Consultant to minimize disruption to the Owner.

.2 At the end of each day=s work, leave work in a safe condition so that no part is in danger of toppling or falling.

.3 Protect interiors of parts of building not to be demolished from exterior elements at all times.

.4 Remove parts of existing building to permit new construction, as indicated. Protect existing foundations, supporting structural members and items designated to remain or to be reused.

.5 Remove materials to be re-installed or retained in a manner to prevent damage. Store and protect in accordance with the requirements of Section 01 00 00 - General Requirements.

.6 Remove items identified to be reused or turned over to Owner and store as directed by the consultant.

Winchester Public School Childcare Renovation 02 41 19 MCA File No. 18044 Selective Demolition

02 41 19 - 3

April 9, 2020

.7 Items to be reused, where shown on the Drawings shall be installed under the appropriate section of the specifications. The Contractor shall coordinate such work with the Subcontractors affected.

.8 Carefully remove and salvage masonry units, as indicated on the Drawings, for re-use elsewhere in the Work. Removal shall be done with care and executed as required to maximize the number of salvageable units. Clean and prepare salvaged units as required for proper re-installation.

.9 Remove existing floor finishes for extent indicated on Drawings. Ensure that all existing floor finish and adhered adhesive are removed and that the substrate surface is clean and ready to accept new floor finish.

.10 Remove and dispose of contaminated or dangerous materials in accordance with Ministry of the Environment regulations and local by-laws. Do not burn materials on site.

.11 Dispose of removed materials, except where specified otherwise, in accordance with the Authority Having Jurisdiction. Except where noted otherwise, immediately remove demolished materials from the site. Upon completion of work leave areas of work in clean condition.

3.03 HAZARDOUS AND DESIGNATED SUBSTANCES

.1 Refer to the Limited Designated Substance Survey Report bound with document 00 31 00 - Information Available to Bidders for an inventory of the location of known hazardous and asbestos-containing materials.

.2 The Contractor and all Subcontractors shall review the Survey Report prior to commencing work.

.3 The Contractor shall post a copy of the Limited Designated Substance Survey Report in the workplace.

.4 The Contractor shall coordinate work involving asbestos, asbestos removal and removal of any other hazardous materials with the Owner=s Representative.

.5 Upon locating unexpected asbestos-containing materials or hazardous substances during the Work, immediately cease work in the areas and contact the consultant. Do not proceed with work until directed to do so by the Consultant.

.6 Comply with all regulations relating to asbestos. The removal and disposal of asbestos shall be in accordance with the Regulation Respecting Asbestos on Construction Projects and in Buildings and Repair Operations made under the Occupational Health and Safety Act.

END OF SECTION

Winchester Public School Childcare Renovation 03 35 00 MCA File No. 18044 Concrete Floor Finishing

03 35 00 - 1

April 9, 2020

PART 1 GENERAL


.1 Finishing concrete floor surfaces.



.2 Section 09 65 19 – Resilient Tile Flooring

1.03 REFERENCES

.1 ACI-302.1R-96, Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction.

.2 ASTM-C171-97a, Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete.

.3 ASTM-C309-98a, Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete.

.4 CSA-A23.1-09, Concrete Materials and Methods of Concrete Construction.

.5 CSA-A23.2-14, Test Methods and Standard Practices for Concrete.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

.1 Submit under provisions of Section 01 00 00 – General Requirements.

.2 Product Data and Shop Drawings: .1 Provide list of Products proposed for use on Project where such Products are not specified

by trade name or where Specification permits choice or alternates. Include descriptive manufacturer or Supplier literature.

.2 Include application instructions for concrete curing compound.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

.1 Conform to CSA-A23.1, CSA-A23.2, and ACI 302.1R.

1.06 QUALIFICATIONS

.1 Concrete Finishes Company specializing in commercial floor finishing with a minimum of five years documented experience, approved by the Consultant.

1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

.1 Deliver Products to site under provisions of Section 01 00 00 - General Requirements.

.2 Store and protect Products under provisions of Section 01 00 00 - General Requirements.

.3 Take delivery of and store packaged materials on site in original undamaged condition with manufacturers= packing, labels and seals intact.

1.08 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

.1 Temporary Lighting: Minimum one 200 W light source, placed 2.5 m above the floor surface, for each 40m2 of floor being finished.

.2 Temporary Heat: Ambient temperature of 10 degrees C minimum.

.3 Ventilation: Sufficient to prevent carbon monoxide or high levels of carbon dioxide and other injurious gases from affecting concrete.

.4 Electrical Power: Sufficient to operate equipment normally used.

1.09 WARRANTY

.1 Provide a warranty for the work of this section in accordance with the General Conditions but for a period of three years.

.2 The warranty shall cover defects in concrete floor finishing due to faults in workmanship or materials provided in this section.

03 35 00 Winchester Public School Childcare Renovation Concrete Floor Finishing MCA File No. 18044

03 35 00 - 2 April 9, 2020

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

.1 Water: clean, potable and not detrimental to quality of concrete.

.2 Concrete Materials: Conform to Structural Drawings. Air content of concrete shall not exceed 3%.

.3 Concrete Sealer (SLC): clear water-based concrete densifier and chemical hardener. .1 Construction Products: Cipadeck Cure and Seal WB. .2 W.R. Meadows of Canada: Liqui-Hard Ultra.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

.1 Verify that substrate surfaces are ready to receive work and elevations are as indicated on Shop Drawings and as instructed by the finish flooring manufacturer.

.2 Beginning of installation shall mean acceptance of substrate and site conditions.

3.02 PREPARATION

.1 Steel trowel concrete slabs to receive resilient flooring.

.2 Where concrete slabs are to receive ceramic tile, screed off to true lines and levels and leave ready to receive finish. Depress slabs to accommodate floor finish thickness

.3 Where floor drains occur, floor shall be level around perimeter walls with a minimum 5mm per metre uniform pitch to drains, unless indicated otherwise.

3.03 FINISHING CONCRETE FLOORS

.1 Finish concrete to CSA-A23.1 and CSA-A23.2.

.2 When concrete is placed, strike off or rod surface with a straight edge. Darby or bull float the surface to smooth and level the concrete.

.3 When the concrete has hardened enough to leave only slight footprints on the surface, float the surface with metal floats and power finishing machines and bring surface to a true elevation. Do not over float. Avoid bringing water and fines to the surface.

.4 Concrete Floors for Applied Resilient Flooring Finish: .1 After floating, allow bleed water or sheen to disappear. .2 Steel trowel the surface by means of power and hand trowels. .3 Do not bring water and fines to the surface by over trowelling. .4 Allow slight interval for concrete to harden further and repeat trowelling operation. .5 Leave the surface with a smooth, level, extremely fine textured but not burnished finish. .6 Cure by any of the curing methods specified below. Ensure that any curing and sealing

compounds used are compatible with the resilient flooring adhesive. .5 Sprinkling of dry cement or dry cement and sand mixture over concrete surfaces is not

acceptable. .6 Rub exposed sharp edges of concrete with carborundum to produce 3 mm radiused edges.

3.04 CURING

.1 Cure concrete in accordance with CSA-A23.1 and CSA-CSA-A23.2.

.2 Moist Curing Method: .1 Cover the concrete with burlap or canvas coverings. .2 Keep the surface continuously wet by sprinkling or fog spray.

Winchester Public School Childcare Renovation 03 35 00 MCA File No. 18044 Concrete Floor Finishing

03 35 00 - 3

April 9, 2020

.3 Concrete shall be kept moist for a minimum of seven consecutive days when normal Portland cement is used, and for a minimum of three consecutive days when high early strength Portland cement is used.

.3 Sealed Surface Curing Method: .1 Cover the concrete with waterproof paper or polyethylene sheets. Lap all joints and tape. .2 Coverings shall be sufficiently heavy to be resistant to tearing and puncturing. .3 Coverings shall be kept in place for a minimum of seven consecutive days when normal

Portland cement is used, and for a minimum of three consecutive days when high early strength Portland cement is used.

.4 Liquid Applied Curing Compound Method: .1 Apply liquid curing compounds in strict accordance with the manufacturer=s instructions. .2 Ensure that curing compounds are compatible with applied floor finish adhesives.

.5 After curing and when concrete is dry, seal control joints and joints at junction with vertical surfaces with sealing compound.

.6 Concrete Sealer Application: .1 Ensure concrete surface is clean and free of standing water. Remove all material that may

prevent sealer adhesion. .2 Prime concrete surface as recommended by the concrete sealer manufacturer. .3 Apply concrete sealer at a uniform coverage by spray or roller application as

recommended by the concrete sealer manufacturer. .4 Apply second coat of concrete sealer, as recommended by the manufacturer, within 24

hours of first coat application.

3.05 TOLERANCES

.1 Exposed High Wear Resistance Surface Dense Trowelled: 6mm in 3000mm.

.2 Level concrete slab to achieve the following tolerances: .1 Under vinyl tile flooring 7mm in 3000mm .2 Under thin set ceramic tile 3mm in 3000mm and

1.5mm in 305mm maximum .3 Correct defects in the concrete floor only by grinding or removal and replacement of the

defective slabs. Areas requiring corrective work will be identified by the Consultant. Re-measure corrected areas. Costs of corrective work shall be borne by the Contractor.

3.06 PROTECTION

.1 Protect finished installation in accordance with the requirements of Section 01 00 00 - General Requirements.

END OF SECTION

Winchester Public School Childcare Renovation 04 20 00 MCA File No. 18044 Masonry

04 20 00 - 1

April 9, 2020

PART 1 GENERAL


.1 Procedures for unit masonry work.

.2 Procedures for incorporating products to be built into unit masonry.

.3 Mortar for unit masonry.

.4 Masonry accessories, reinforcement, and connectors.

.5 Concrete unit masonry.

.6 Construction of new interior non load bearing masonry walls.

.7 Construction of new openings in interior load bearing masonry walls

.8 Infilling of existing openings in interior load bearing masonry walls.

.9 Construction of new openings in exterior walls.

1.02 PRODUCTS INSTALLED BUT NOT SUPPLIED UNDER THIS SECTION

.1 Division 5: Supply of bearing plates, built-in anchors, and loose steel lintels.

.2 Section 08 11 00 - Steel Doors and Frames: Supply of hollow metal door frames and windows for installation in masonry walls and partitions.



.2 Section 07 21 13 - Board Insulation.

.3 Section 07 27 00 - Air Barriers.

.4 Section 07 84 00 - Fire Stopping and Smoke Seals.

.5 Section 07 92 00 - Sealants: Sealants and caulking procedures.

.6 Section 08 11 00 - Steel Doors and Frames: Supply of hollow metal frames.

.7 Section 09 91 00 - Painting.

1.04 REFERENCES

.1 ASTM-A153/A153M-09, Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware.

.2 ASTM-C207-06(2011), Standard Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes.


.4 CAN/CSA-A165 Series - 04 (R2009), CSA Standards on Concrete Masonry Units.

.5 CAN/CSA-A179-04 (R2009), Mortar and Grout for Unit Masonry.

.6 CAN/CSA-A370-14, Connectors for Masonry.

.7 CAN/CSA-A371-04 (R2009), Masonry Construction for Buildings.

.8 CAN/CSA-A3001-13, Cementitious Materials for Use in Concrete.

.9 CAN/CSA-A3002-13, Masonry and Mortar Cement.

.10 CAN/CSA-G30.18-09, Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement.

.11 CSA-S304.1-04, Design of Masonry Structures.

.12 CSA-W186-M1990 (R2007), Welding of Reinforcing Bars in Reinforced Concrete Construction.


.1 Masonry work shall be carried out by experienced masons under the continuous supervision of a competent foreman with a minimum of 5 years’ experience with work of similar size and complexity.

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

.1 Deliver materials to job site in dry condition.

.2 Keep materials dry until use except where wetting of bricks is specified.

04 20 00 Winchester Public School Childcare Renovation Masonry MCA File No. 18044

04 20 00 - 2 April 9, 2020

.3 Store under waterproof cover on pallets or plank platforms held off ground by means of plank or timber skids.


.1 Hot Weather Requirements: Protect freshly laid masonry from drying too rapidly, by means of waterproof, non-staining coverings.

.2 Protect masonry and other work from marking and other damage. Protect completed work from mortar droppings. Use non-staining coverings.


.1 Mortar prepared on-site based on proportion specifications: .1 Prior to the commencement of masonry work prepare on-site, under the supervision of the

inspection and testing company, mortar mixes for each mortar type specified. .2 The inspection and testing company will sample and test the mortar mixes to determine a

site aggregate/cement ratio Control Value for each mortar type. .3 Once Site Control Values are established these will form the basis of acceptance for all

subsequent Sample Ratio Tests conducted during the course of the work. .2 Mortar prepared off-site based on property specifications:

.1 Prior to the commencement of masonry work the inspection and testing company will sample and perform laboratory tests for each mortar type prepared off-site to verify compliance with the specifications.

.2 Testing shall consist of the determination of: .1 Aggregate/cement ratio. .2 Water retention. .3 Compressive strength. .4 Air content.

.3 Once acceptable values are established these will form the basis of acceptance for tests conducted during the course of the work.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

.1 Mortar Materials: to CAN/CSA-A179. .1 Use the same brands of materials and source of aggregate for the entire project. .2 Portland Cement: Type GU, in accordance with CSA-A3001. .3 Masonry Cement: in accordance with CSA-A3002. .4 Hydrated Lime: Type S, in accordance with ASTM-C207. .5 Sand: in accordance with CSA-A179. .6 Water: potable and in accordance with CSA-A179. Water shall not contain acids, alkalis,

oils, and organic material. .2 Masonry Grout: Refer to Structural Drawings for masonry grout specifications. .3 Masonry Accessories:

.1 Horizontal Control Joint Filler: purpose-made elastomer for minimum compression of 25% of uncompressed size. .1 Emseal Corporation: Greyflex. .2 Tremco Commercial Sealants & Waterproofing: illmod 600.

.2 Vertical Control Joint Filler: preformed expanding elastomer for minimum compression of 25% of uncompressed size. .1 Emseal Corporation: Greyflex. .2 Tremco Commercial Sealants & Waterproofing: illmod 600.

.3 Lap Adhesive: recommended by masonry flashing manufacturer.


04 20 00 - 3

April 9, 2020

.4 Weep Hole Vents: purpose-made PVC: .1 Clear plastic tube: Dur-O-Wal Limited: DA1005 Weephole Tube. .2 Plastic Vent:

.1 Blok-Lok Limited: Weep Hole No. 343.

.2 Goodco Ltd: Goodco Brick Vent. .5 Vent Holes: minimum 100mm high.

.1 Blok-Lok Limited: Cell Vent.

.2 Dur-O-Wal Limited: DA 1069 Cell Vent. .6 Compressible Joint Filler at Penetrations and Top of Masonry Partitions:

.1 AD Fire Protection Systems Inc.: A/D Firebarrier Mineral Wool Firestopping Insulation.

.2 Roxul Inc.: RXL Safe Fire Stop Batt. .7 Cavity Wall Flashing: 1.0mm minimum thickness SBS modified self-adhesive or adhesive

applied membrane. .1 Henry Company Canada: Blueskin TWF. .2 Soprema Inc.: Sopraseal Membrane Flashing. .3 W.R. Grace and Co. of Canada Ltd.: Perm-A-Barrier Wall Flashing. .4 W.R. Meadows of Canada Ltd.: Sealtight Air-Shield Flashing Membrane.

.8 Flexible Through-Wall Flashing: .1 Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.: Nuflex Flashing Membrane. .2 Lexsuco Canada Limited.: F-20 membrane with CA-105 adhesive. .3 W.R. Meadows of Canada Ltd.: Sealtight Flex-Guard PVC Masonry Flashing with Vinyl

Flash Adhesive Compound. .9 Flexible Wall Flashing: 1.0mm minimum thickness laminated SBS modified asphalt and

white polyethylene film membrane. Dur-O-Wall Limited: Dur-O-Barrier. .10 Cavity Wall Air Space Filler: compressible, closed cell neoprene. .11 Mortar Dropping Control Device: Trapezoidal-shaped mesh with integral insect screen.

.1 Blok-Lok Limited: Mortar Net.

.2 Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.: Mortar Trap.

.3 MortarNet USA Ltd.: MortarNet with Insect Barrier. .4 Masonry Reinforcement and Connectors:

.1 Bar Reinforcement: to CAN/CSA-A371 and CAN/CSA-G30.18.

.2 Wire Joint Reinforcement - Single Wythe Walls: to CAN/CSA-A371, ladder type, 4.76mm diameter wire, size to suit wall thickness. .1 Blok-Lok Limited: BL-10 Ladder Reinforcement. .2 Dur-O-Wal: DA3200 Single Wythe Ladur.

.3 Cavity Wall Connectors: to CAN/CSA-A370. Hot dip galvanized, to ASTM-A153/A153M, Class B2, 458g/m2 minimum coating. .1 Existing concrete masonry unit backings:

.1 Blok-Lok Limited: BL-407 surface mounted anchors spaced at 800mm on centre horizontally and 400mm on centre vertically complete with Wedge-Lok insulation fasteners.

.2 Fero Corporation: Heavy Duty Holed RAP Tie, surface mounted spaced at 800mm on centre horizontally and 400mm on centre vertically complete with insulation supports.

.4 Corrosion Protection for Wire Joint Reinforcement: galvanized to ASTM-A153/A153M. .1 Exterior Wall: Hot dip galvanized, Class B2, 458g/m2 minimum coating. .2 Interior Wall: Mill galvanized.

.5 Cavity Wall Insulation Fasteners: .1 Blok-Lok Limited: Plastic wedge shaped, purpose made to wedge between masonry

reinforcing and cavity wall insulation. Wedge-Lok. .2 Fero Corporation: Polyethylene, purpose made to fit over connector and secure

insulation in place. Fero Insulation Support.


04 20 00 - 4 April 9, 2020

2.02 MORTAR MIXES

.1 Except where specified otherwise, the basis of acceptance for mortar prepared on-site shall be the proportion specifications in CAN/CSA-A179.

.2 The basis of acceptance for mortar prepared off-site shall be the property specifications in CAN/CSA-A179.

.3 Mortar for Exterior Masonry Above Grade: .1 Loadbearing: Type S. .2 Non-loadbearing: Type N.

.4 Mortar for Interior Masonry: .1 Loadbearing: Type S. .2 Non-loadbearing: Type N.

.5 The following apply regardless of the mortar types and uses specified above: .1 Mortar for grouted reinforced masonry: Type S. .2 Mortar for pointing: Type N.

.6 Pointing Mortar: Prehydrate pointing mortar by mixing ingredients dry, then mix again adding just enough water to produce damp unworkable mix that will retain its form when pressed into ball. Allow to stand for not less than 1 hour nor more than 2 hours then remix with sufficient water to produce mortar of proper consistency for pointing.

2.03 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS

.1 Standard Light Weight Concrete Masonry Units: to CAN/CSA-A165. .1 Use at all above grade interior walls and partitions unless otherwise indicated or specified. .2 Hollow unit classification: H/15/C/M. .3 Solid unit classification: S/15/C/M. .4 Slag aggregate. .5 Size: modular, nominal 200mm by 400mm. .6 Special shapes: provide bull-nosed units for exposed corners. Provide purpose-made

shapes for lintels and bond beams. Provide additional special shapes as indicated. .2 Standard Normal Weight Concrete Masonry Units: to CAN/CSA-A165.

.1 Use at exterior walls, all loadbearing walls, and at walls in contact with earth.

.2 Hollow unit classification: H/15/A/M; H/20/A/M units where indicated on Structural Drawings.

.3 Solid unit classification: S/15/A/M; S/20/A/M units where indicated on Structural Drawings.

.4 Size: modular, nominal 200mm by 400mm.

.5 Special shapes: provide bull-nosed units for exposed corners. Provide purpose-made shapes for lintels and bond beams. Provide additional special shapes as indicated.

.3 Concrete Brick: to CAN/CSA-A165. .1 Type: II. .2 Size: Metric modular.

2.04 CLAY MASONRY UNITS

.1 Face Brick: Salvaged from demolition work.

2.05 FABRICATION

.1 Fabricate reinforcing in accordance with CAN/CSA-A23.1 and Reinforcing Steel Manual of Standard Practice by the Reinforcing Steel Institute of Ontario.

.2 Fabricate connectors in accordance with CAN/CSA-A370.


04 20 00 - 5

April 9, 2020

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION - GENERAL

.1 Do masonry work in accordance with CAN/CSA-A370, CAN/CSA-A371, and CSA-S304.1 except where specified otherwise.

.2 Do masonry mortar work in accordance with CAN/CSA-A179 except where specified otherwise.

.3 Build masonry plumb, level, and true to line, with vertical joints in alignment.

.4 Layout coursing and bond to achieve correct coursing heights, and continuity of bond above and below openings, with minimum of cutting.

.5 Reinforcement: .1 Accurately place reinforcement, support, and secure against displacement as indicated on

structural drawings and in accordance with CAN/CSA-A371. .2 Prior to placing grout, obtain Consultant's approval of placement of reinforcement and

connectors. .3 Do additional reinforcement of masonry as indicated. .4 Locations of Joint Reinforcement:

.1 Single wythe masonry walls and partitions. .5 Install joint reinforcement horizontally at 400mm on centre vertical spacing, unless

indicated otherwise. .6 Reinforce and grout loadbearing masonry walls as shown on the Structural Drawings. .7 Bonding and Tying:

.1 Tie masonry veneer to backing in accordance with OBC, CSA-S304.1, CAN/CSA-A371 and as indicated.

.8 Reinforced Lintels and Bond Beams: .1 Reinforce masonry lintels and bond beams as indicated on Structural Drawings. Make

joints in lintels and bond beams to match adjacent walls. .2 Place and grout reinforcement in accordance with CAN/CSA-A371, and the Structural

Drawings. .9 Extend walls and partitions to underside of deck or slab unless noted otherwise on Drawings. .10 Construct portions of walls and partitions above doors, screens, windows and other openings

to match adjacent wall and partition construction unless noted otherwise on Drawings. .11 Build in loose steel lintels and bearing plates at new openings in existing masonry walls and

partitions. .12 Masonry Accessories:

.1 Install weep hole vents in vertical joints immediately over flashings, in exterior wythes of cavity wall and masonry veneer wall construction, at maximum horizontal spacing of 600mm on centre.

.2 Install vent holes at top of cavities to line-up with weep holes.

.3 Install compressible joint filler at the top of masonry partitions that are not fire separations. Refer to Section 07 84 00 - Fire Stopping and Smoke Seals for joint treatment at fire separations.

.4 Install mortar dropping control devices at base of wall and above wall openings. Install in accordance with the manufacturer’s printed instructions.

.13 Refer to Structural Drawings for load-bearing masonry structural requirements.

3.02 INSTALLATION - CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY

.1 Concrete Masonry Units: .1 Bond: running bond unless indicated otherwise .2 Coursing height: 200mm for one unit and one joint. .3 Jointing: concave where exposed or where paint or other finish coating is specified unless

indicated otherwise.


04 20 00 - 6 April 9, 2020

.2 Concrete Masonry Unit Lintels: .1 Install reinforced concrete masonry unit lintels over openings in masonry where steel or

reinforced concrete lintels are not indicated. .2 End bearing: as indicated on Drawings but not less than 200mm.

.3 All exposed jambs, corners, sills, ledges, and caps of concrete masonry units shall be bullnosed finish.

.4 At walls to receive ceramic tile or rubber base, first block course shall have 90 corners with top edge of block ground round to match bullnose block above.

.5 Cores of hollow concrete masonry units within 400mm of wall openings shall be filled solid with grout.

3.03 INSTALLATION CLAY - UNIT MASONRY

.1 Bond: running bond to match existing.

.2 Coursing Height: to match existing.

.3 Jointing: to match existing.

.4 Clean unglazed clay unit masonry as work progresses.

3.04 CONSTRUCTION

.1 Exposed Masonry: Remove chipped, cracked, and otherwise damaged units in exposed masonry and replace with undamaged units.

.2 Jointing: .1 Allow joints to set just enough to remove excess water, then tool with round jointer to

provide smooth, true to line, compressed, uniformly concave joints unless other jointing is indicated or specified.

.2 Strike flush all joints concealed in walls and joints in walls to tile, insulation, or other applied material except paint or similar thin finish coating.

.3 Wall surfaces and joint treatment for concealed portions of walls above ceilings and behind wall mounted fitments shall match exposed surfaces.

.3 Cutting: .1 Cut out for electrical switches, outlet boxes, and other recessed or built-in objects. .2 Make cuts straight, clean, and free from uneven edges.

.4 Building-In: .1 Build in items required to be built into masonry. .2 Prevent displacement of built-in items during construction. Check for plumb, location and

alignment frequently, as work progresses. .3 Build-in hollow metal frames. Brace door jambs to maintain plumb. Fill spaces between

jambs and masonry with mortar. Set frame anchors as specified in Section 08 11 00 - Steel Doors and Frames.

.5 Toothing In: .1 Tooth in salvaged brick from demolition work at jambs of all new openings in exterior

walls. Exposed cut brick at jambs is not acceptable. .6 Wetting of Bricks:

.1 Except in cold weather, wet bricks having an initial rate of absorption exceeding 1g/minute/1000mm5, wet to uniform degree of saturation, 3 to 24 hours before laying, and do not lay until surface dry.

.2 Wet tops of walls built of bricks qualifying for wetting, when recommencing work on such walls.

.7 Support of Loads: .1 Use grout to CAN/CSA-A179 where grout is used instead of solid units. Cells with

reinforcement shall be grouted. Grout masonry in accordance with CSA-S304.1 and as indicated on Structural Drawings.


04 20 00 - 7

April 9, 2020

.2 Install building paper below voids to be filled with concrete or grout; keep paper 25mm back from faces of units.

.8 Loose Steel Lintels: Install loose steel lintels supplied by Division 5. Centre over opening width.

.9 Bearing Plates and Anchors: Install loose steel bearing plates and anchors supplied by Division 5

.10 Site Tolerances: Tolerances in notes to Clause 5.3 of CAN/CSA-A371 apply.

.11 Lateral Support and Anchorage: .1 Do lateral support and anchorage in accordance with CSA-S304.1 and as indicated. .2 Lateral Support Anchors (for attachment to structural steel): Blok-Lok, Flex-o-Lok.

3.05 FIELD BENDING AND TOUCH-UP

.1 Do not field bend reinforcement and connectors except where indicated or authorized by the Consultant.

.2 When field bending is authorized, bend without heat, applying a slow and steady pressure.

.3 Replace bars and connectors which develop cracks or splits.

.4 Touch up damaged and cut ends of epoxy coated or galvanized reinforcement steel and connectors with compatible finish to provide continuous coating.

3.06 RE-INSTALLATION

.1 Cut openings in existing work as indicated.

.2 Openings in walls to be approved by Consultant.

.3 Make Good existing work. Use materials to match existing.

3.07 CLEANING

.1 Standard Masonry Units: Allow mortar droppings on masonry to partially dry then remove by means of trowel, followed by rubbing lightly with small piece of block and finally by brushing.

.2 Unglazed Clay Units: After mortar has set and cured, protect windows, sills, doors, trim and other work, and clean brick masonry as follows:

.1 Remove large particles with wood paddles without damaging surface. Saturate masonry with clean water and flush off loose mortar and dirt.

.2 Scrub with solution of 25mL trisodium phosphate and 25mL household detergent dissolved in 1 L of clean water using stiff fibre brushes, then clean off immediately with clean water using hose. Alternatively, use proprietary compound recommended by brick masonry manufacturer in accordance with manufacturer's directions.

.3 Repeat cleaning process as often as necessary to remove mortar and other stains.

.4 Use acid solution treatment for difficult to clean masonry as described in BIA Technical Note No. 20.

3.08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

.1 Inspection and testing of masonry work will be carried out by an inspection and testing company designated by the Consultant.

.2 Cost of masonry inspection and testing will be paid from the cash allowance specified in Section 01 00 00 – General Requirements.

.3 Masonry Mortar: As masonry work progresses, the inspection and testing company will test and report on mortar properties as follows: .1 Mortar prepared in accordance with proportion specifications: Aggregate/Cement ratio. .2 Mortar prepared in accordance with property specifications: compressive strength. .3 Provide six 50mm by 50mm by 50mm mortar samples taken at random for each test when

requested by inspection and testing company.

END OF SECTION

Winchester Public School Childcare Renovation 06 10 00 MCA File No. 18044 Rough Carpentry

06 10 00 - 1

April 9, 2020

PART 1 GENERAL


.1 Wood grounds, nailers, blocking in walls

.2 Wood furring.

.3 Plywood sheathing on steel stud partitions



.2 Section 06 20 00 - Finish Carpentry.

1.03 REFERENCES

.1 AWMAC/WI–NAAWS, North American Architectural Woodwork Standards, version 3.1, 2017.

.2 CSA-B111-1974, Wire Nails, Spikes and Staples.

.3 CAN/CSA-G164-M92, Hot Dip Galvanizing of Irregularly Shaped Articles.

.4 CSA-O121-08, Douglas Fir Plywood.

.5 CAN/CSA-O141-05, Softwood Lumber.

.6 CSA-O151-09, Canadian Softwood Plywood.

.7 NLGA, Standard Grading Rules for Canadian Lumber, 2014.


.1 Lumber Identification: by grade stamp of an agency certified by Canadian Lumber Standards Accreditation Board.

.2 Plywood Identification: by grade mark in accordance with applicable CSA standards.

1.05 STORAGE, DELIVERY AND HANDLING

.1 Store clear of ground or other bearing surfaces on blocking to prevent damage from moisture absorption.

.2 Store on site for minimum amount of time prior to incorporating into building.

.3 Tarp or cover exposed materials for protection from elements.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 LUMBER MATERIAL

.1 Lumber: unless specified otherwise, softwood, S4S, moisture content 12% or less in accordance with following standards: .1 CAN/CSA-O141. .2 NLGA Standard Grading Rules for Canadian Lumber.

.2 Furring, Blocking, Nailing Strips, Grounds, Rough Bucks, Curbs, Fascia Backing and Sleepers: .1 S2S is acceptable. .2 Board sizes: "Standard" or better grade. .3 Dimension sizes: "Standard" light framing or better grade.

2.02 PANEL MATERIALS

.1 Canadian Softwood Plywood (CSP): to CSA-O151, standard construction.

2.03 ACCESSORIES

.1 Nails, Spikes and Staples: to CSA-B111. Galvanized for exterior work.

.2 Proprietary Fasteners: toggle bolts, expansion shields and lag bolts, screws and lead or inorganic fibre plugs, recommended for purpose by manufacturer.

06 10 00 Winchester Public School Childcare Renovation Rough Carpentry MCA File No. 18044

06 10 00 - 2 April 9, 2020

2.04 FINISHES

.1 Galvanizing: to CAN/CSA-G164.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

.1 Comply with requirements of OBC, supplemented by the following paragraphs.

.2 Install plywood sheathing to all steel stud partition framing, both sides of partitions including exposed partition ends, from finished floor to top of partitions. Install plywood using screws spaced at 150mm o.c. at perimeter and at intermediate joints of sheathing. Space screws at 300mm o.c vertically at each stud within the field of the sheathing. Ensure all joints in the sheathing occur and are fully supported on a steel stud.

.3 Install furring and blocking as required to space-out and support casework, cabinets, wall and ceiling finishes, facings and other work as required.

.4 Align and plumb faces of furring and blocking to tolerance of 1:600.

.5 Install rough bucks, nailers and linings to rough openings as required to provide backing for frames and other work.

3.02 ERECTION

.1 Frame, anchor, fasten, tie and brace members to provide necessary strength and rigidity.

.2 Countersink bolts where necessary to provide clearance for other work.

END OF SECTION

Winchester Public School Childcare Renovation 06 20 00 MCA File No. 18044 Finish Carpentry

mc | architects 06 20 00 - 1 APRIL 9, 2020

PART 1 GENERAL


.1 Installation of shop fabricated casework.

.2 Site fabricated fitments.

.3 Installation of wood and steel doors.

.4 Installation of door hardware miscellaneous hardware.



.2 Section 06 41 05 - Plastic Laminates.

.3 Section 06 41 10 - Architectural Woodwork.

.4 Section 06 41 93 - Cabinet and Miscellaneous Hardware.

.5 Section 08 11 00 - Steel Doors and Frames.

.6 Section 08 14 00 - Wood Doors.

.7 Section 08 71 00 - Door Hardware.


.9 Division 22 - Plumbing: Sink installations in laminate countertops.


.1 Shop Fabricated Fitments: casework and millwork supplied under Section 06 41 10 - Architectural Woodwork.

.2 Steel Doors: supplied under Section 08 11 00 - Steel Doors and Frames.

.3 Wood Doors: supplied under Section 08 14 00 - Wood Doors.

.4 Door Hardware: supplied under Section 08 71 00 - Door Hardware.

.5 Miscellaneous Hardware: supplied under Section 06 41 93 - Cabinet and Miscellaneous Hardware.

1.04 REFERENCES


.2 CAN/CGSB-1.175-97, Polyurethane Interior Coating.

.3 CSA-B35.4-1972, Wood Screws.



.6 CSA-O115-M1982, Hardwood and Decorative Plywood.

.7 CSA-O121-08, Douglas Fir Plywood.


.9 CSA-O151-09, Canadian Softwood Plywood.

.10 NHLA, Rules for the Measurement and Inspection of Hardwood and Cypress, January 2015.


1.05 SHOP DRAWINGS

.1 Submit Shop Drawings in accordance with Section 01 00 00 – General Requirements.

.2 Indicate details of construction, profiles, jointing, fastening and other related details.

.3 Indicate all materials, thicknesses, finishes and hardware.

1.06 PRODUCT, DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

.1 Protect materials against dampness during and after delivery.

.2 Store materials in ventilated areas, protected from extreme changes of temperature or humidity.

06 20 00 Winchester Public School Childcare Renovation Finish Carpentry MCA File No. 18044


.3 Wood door delivery, storage and handling shall be in accordance with Section 2 and 9, of AWMAC/WI–NAAWS.

.4 Delivered materials, which are damaged in any way will be rejected by the Consultant and shall be removed from the site and replaced with acceptable materials.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 LUMBER MATERIAL

.1 Softwood Lumber: unless specified otherwise, S4S, moisture content of 7% or less in accordance with the following standards: .1 CAN/CSA–O141. .2 NLGA Standard Grading Rules for Canadian Lumber. .3 AWMAC/WI–NAAWS custom grade, moisture content as specified.

.2 Machine stress-rated lumber is acceptable for all purposes.

.3 Hardwood Lumber: Select White Hard Maple moisture content of 7% or less in accordance with the following standards: .1 National Hardwood Lumber Association (NHLA). .2 AWMAC/WI–NAAWS custom grade, moisture content as specified.

2.02 PANEL MATERIAL

.1 Douglas Fir Plywood (DFP): to CSA-O121, standard construction.

.2 Canadian Softwood Plywood (CSP): to CSA-O151, standard construction.

.3 Hardwood Plywood: to CSA-O115. Face veneer: Plain Sliced, bookmatched, Select White Hard Maple. Core as specified.

2.03 ACCESSORIES

.1 Nails and Staples: to CSA-B111; galvanized to CAN/CSA-G164 for exterior work, interior humid areas and for treated lumber; plain finish elsewhere.

.2 Wood Screws: to CSA-B35.4 electroplated, type and size to suit application.

.3 Splines: metal.

.4 Adhesive: as recommended by material manufacturer.

2.04 TREE PLANTER BOXES

.1 All lumber shall be dressed four sides, pressure treated Cedar, kiln dried, free of splits, warps, checks, large knots, or other defects.

.2 Fasteners: All hardware, including nails, spikes, bolts, lag screws, shall be hot dipped galvanized and of the size and weight sufficient to ensure the structural stability of this work.

.3 Wood Finish: Semi-transparent stain. Colour will be selected by the Consultant.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

.1 Do finish carpentry in accordance with AWMAC/WI–NAAWS, except where specified otherwise.

.2 Scribe and cut as required, fit to abutting walls, and surfaces, fit properly into recesses and to accommodate piping, columns, fixtures, outlets, or other projecting, intersecting or penetrating objects.

.3 Form joints to conceal shrinkage.

.4 Install shop fabricated casework and millwork. Refer to Section 06 41 10 - Architectural Woodwork.

.5 Install site fabricated fitments as shown on Drawings.

.6 Install wood doors. Refer to Section 08 14 00 - Wood Doors.

.7 Install steel doors. Refer to Section 08 11 00 - Steel Doors and Frames.

.8 Install door hardware. Refer to Section 08 71 00 - Door Hardware.

Winchester Public School Childcare Renovation 06 20 00 MCA File No. 18044 Finish Carpentry

mc | architects 06 20 00 - 3 APRIL 9, 2020

.9 Install miscellaneous hardware. Refer to Section 06 41 93 - Cabinet and Miscellaneous Hardware.

3.02 CONSTRUCTION

.1 Fastening: .1 Position items of finished carpentry work accurately, level, plumb, true and fasten or

anchor securely. .2 Design and select fasteners to suit size and nature of components being joined. Use

proprietary devices as recommended by manufacturers. .3 Set finishing nails to receive filler. Where screws are used to secure members, countersink

screw in round cleanly cut hole and plug with wood plug to match material being secured. .4 Replace items of finish carpentry with damage to wood surfaces including hammer and

other bruises. .2 Shelving: Install shelving on ledgers or shelf brackets, as indicated.

3.03 SCHEDULE OF SITE FABRICATED FITMENTS

.1 Half Height Wood Door Frames: .1 To AWMAC/WI-NAAWS for custom quality. .2 Fabricate and install as indicated. .3 Wood: Solid White Birch. .4 Finish: prefinished stain and varnish. Touch-up on site as required.

3.04 WOOD TREE BOXES

.1 Layout all work true to line and level, plumb and true. Accurately place in position and brace securely. Receive approval of all layout work by the Consultant prior to commencement of construction.

.2 Construct tree planter boxes from stacked 138mm x 138mm cedar timbers as indicated.

.3 Make all cuts as required with clean sharp tools. Timbers may be pre-cut in shop and delivered to site ready for assembly.

.4 Receive approval of all woodwork prior to finishing.

.5 Apply stain to manufacturer=s recommendations and as specified in Section 09 91 00 - Painting.

END OF SECTION

Winchester Public School Childcare Renovation 06 41 05 MCA File No. 18044 Plastic Laminates

06 41 05 - 1

April 9, 2020

PART 1 GENERAL


.1 Plastic laminate finish for postformed counters.

.2 Plastic laminate finish for flatwork.





.4 Section 07 92 00 - Sealants

1.03 REFERENCES

.1 CAN/CGSB-71.20-M88, Adhesive, Contact, Brushable.

.2 CAN3-A172-M79 (R1996), High Pressure Paper Base, Decorative Laminates.

1.04 SAMPLES

.1 Submit samples in accordance with Section 01 00 00 – General Requirements.

.2 Submit samples of joints, edging, cutouts and postformed profiles.

.3 Provide maintenance data for laminate work for incorporation into manual specified in Section 01 00 00 – General Requirements.

1.05 STORAGE AND PROTECTION

.1 Maintain relative humidity between 25 and 60% at 22C during storage and installation.

1.06 WARRANTY

.1 Submit a warranty for plastic laminate work in accordance with the General Conditions, but for a period of three years.

.2 The warranty shall cover materials, workmanship and delamination.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

.1 Laminated Plastic for Flatwork: to CAN3-A172, general purpose grade, type 1, thickness of 1.6mm.

.2 Laminated Plastic for Postforming Work: to CAN3-A172, postforming grade, type 2 thickness of 1.25mm.

.3 Plastic laminate shall have a matte finish in standard colours selected by the Consultant from the product line of one of the following manufacturers: .1 Arborite. .2 Formica .3 Nevamar. .4 Pionite. .5 Wilsonart

.4 Laminated Plastic Backing Sheet: general purpose grade S not less than 0.5mm thick or same thickness and colour as face laminate.

.5 Laminated Plastic Adhesive: contact adhesive to CAN/CGSB-71.20.

.6 Sealer: water resistant sealer or glue acceptable to laminate manufacturer.

.7 Sealants: Refer to Section 07 92 00 - Sealants.

.8 Draw Bolts and Splines: as recommended by fabricator.

06 41 05 Winchester Public School Childcare Renovation Plastic Laminates MCA File No. 18044

06 41 05 - 2 April 9, 2020

2.02 FABRICATION

.1 Comply with CAN3-A172, Appendix 'A'.

.2 Obtain governing dimensions before fabricating items which are to accommodate or abut appliances, equipment and other materials.

.3 Ensure adjacent parts of continuous laminate work match in colour and pattern.

.4 Veneer laminated plastic to core material in accordance with adhesive manufacturer's instructions. Ensure core and laminate profiles coincide to provide continuous support and bond over entire surface. Use continuous lengths up to 3000 mm. Keep joints 600 mm from sink cutouts.

.5 Form shaped profiles and bends as indicated, using postforming grade laminate to laminate manufacturer's instructions.

.6 Use straight self-edging laminate strip for flatwork to cover exposed edge of core material. Chamfer exposed edges uniformly at approximately 20 degrees. Do not mitre laminate edges.

.7 Apply laminate backing sheet to reverse side of core of plastic laminate work.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

.1 Install work plumb, true and square, neatly scribed to adjoining surfaces.

.2 Make allowances around perimeter where fixed objects pass through or project into laminated plastic work to permit normal movement without restriction.

.3 Use draw bolts and splines in countertop joints. Maximum spacing of 450 mm on centre, 75 mm from edge. Make flush hairline joints.

.4 Provide cutouts for inserts, grilles, appliances, outlet boxes and other penetrations. Round internal corners, chamfer edges and seal exposed core.

.5 At junction of laminated plastic counter back splash and adjacent wall finish, apply small bead of sealant.

.6 Apply laminated plastic to units for on-site laminating as indicated. Adhere laminated plastic over entire surface. Make corners with hairline joints. Use full sized laminate sheets. Make joints only where approved. Slightly bevel arrises.

.7 For site application, offset joints in plastic laminate facing from joints in core.

3.02 PROTECTION

.1 Cover finished laminated surfaces with heavy Kraft paper or place in cartons during shipment.

.2 Protect installed laminated surfaces by approved means. Do not remove protective coverings until immediately before final inspection.

END OF SECTION

Winchester Public School Childcare Renovation 06 41 10 MCA File No. 18044 Architectural Woodwork


PART 1 GENERAL


.1 Shop fabricated fitments: casework and millwork.





.4 Section 06 41 93 - Cabinet and Miscellaneous Hardware.

.5 Section 07 92 00 - Sealants.


.7 Division 22 - Plumbing: Sink Installation.


.1 Millwork hardware supplied under Section 06 41 93 - Cabinet and Miscellaneous Hardware and Section 08 71 00 - Door Hardware.

.2 The architectural millwork Subcontractor shall include in his contract the cost to provide millwork hardware, as specified in Section 06 41 93 - Cabinet and Miscellaneous Hardware.

1.04 REFERENCES

.1 ANSI-A208.1-2009, Particleboard, Mat Formed Wood.

.2 Canadian Softwood Plywood (CSP): to CSA-0151, standard construction


.4 CAN3-A172-M79 (R1996), High Pressure Paper Base, Decorative Laminates.



.7 NHLA, Rules for the Measurement and Inspection of Hardwood and Cypress, January 2015.


1.05 SHOP DRAWINGS


.2 Indicate details of construction, profiles, jointing, fastening and other related details.

.3 Indicate all materials, thicknesses, finishes and hardware.

.4 Indicate locations of all service outlets in casework, typical and special installation conditions, and all connections, attachments, anchorage and location of exposed fastenings.

1.06 SAMPLES


.2 Submit samples: sample size 300mm by 300mm of typical finished door panel.

.3 Submit 300mm by 300mm colour samples of each type of laminated plastic selected.

.4 Submit 300mm by 300mm samples of each type of solid wood and plywood used in exposed work with examples of finish.


.1 The architectural woodwork Subcontractor shall be a member in good standing of the Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada (AWMAC).

.2 Architectural woodwork shall be manufactured and installed to the specified AWMAC/WI–NAAWS standards.

.3 Work which does not meet AWMAC/WI–NAAWS, as specified, shall be replaced by the architectural woodwork Subcontractor, at no additional cost to the Owner and to the satisfaction of the Consultant.

06 41 10 Winchester Public School Childcare Renovation Architectural Woodwork MCA File No. 18044


.4 Architectural woodwork shall be provided by one of the acceptable subcontract bidders. Refer to Specification Section 00 01 60 - List of Prequalified Bidders


.1 Protect casework and millwork against dampness and damage during and after delivery.

.2 Store casework and millwork in ventilated areas, protected from extreme changes of temperature or humidity.

.3 Do not deliver casework and millwork units to site until storage areas are complete and conditions permit, to ensure no damage will occur while in storage.

1.09 WARRANTY

.1 Submit a warranty for architectural woodwork in accordance with the General Conditions, but for a period of three years.

.2 The warranty shall cover replacing and refinishing to make good any defects due to defective materials, faulty workmanship, and delamination, and shall certify that the architectural woodwork has been manufactured and installed in accordance with the standards incorporated in the AWMAC/WI–NAAWS.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

.1 Softwood Lumber: unless specified otherwise, S4S, moisture content 7% or less in accordance with following standards: .1 CAN/CSA-O141. .2 NLGA Standard Grading Rules for Canadian Lumber. .3 AWMAC/WI–NAAWS custom grade, moisture content as specified.

.2 Machine stress-rated lumber is acceptable for all purposes.

.3 Particleboard: medium density M-3 grade to ANSI-208.1.

.4 Plywood: Good two side (G2S) softwood plywood

.5 Laminated Plastic: to CAN3-A172. Refer to Section 06 41 05 - Plastic Laminates for type and finish.

.6 Solid Core Wood Doors: Custom quality, particleboard core to AWMAC/WI–NAAWS, Section 9, thickness as shown on Drawings. Provide interior solid wood blocking at surface-mounted hardware locations and as shown on Drawings. Plastic laminate finish.

.7 Hardwood Edging: .1 All exposed edges shall be banded with 3mm hardwood edging. .2 Edging shall be multi-layered natural wood made from 0.6mm veneers laminated together

with PVA glue containing no hazardous ingredients and having no harmful effects on health or the environment.

.3 Final assembly of the edging shall be surface sanded to 180 grit and roughly sanded on the reverse side for good adhesion.

.4 The top layer of the edging shall have a continuous high quality veneer to match the plywood with minimal colour variation.

.5 All layers of the edging shall have asymmetrical finger joints.

.6 All edging shall be stored in a controlled humidified environment prior to application in order to provide proper adhesion.

.8 Nails and Staples: to CSA-B111.

.9 Wood Screws: steel type and size to suit application.

.10 Splines: metal.

.11 Sealant: Refer to Section 07 92 00 - Sealants. Use aluminum coloured sealant at stainless steel locations.

Winchester Public School Childcare Renovation 06 41 10 MCA File No. 18044 Architectural Woodwork


.12 Millwork Hardware: Refer to Section 06 41 93 - Cabinet and Miscellaneous Hardware and Section 08 71 00 - Door Hardware.

2.02 MANUFACTURED UNITS: BASE BID

.1 Casework: General. .1 This article covers all casework unless detailed or specified otherwise. .2 Fabricate casework to AWMAC/WI–NAAWS custom quality grade and to details and sizes

as indicated. .3 Furring, blocking, nailing strips, grounds, rough bucks and sleepers.

.1 S2S is acceptable.

.2 Board sizes: "Standard" or better grade.

.3 Dimension sizes: "Standard" light framing or better. .4 Finish: plastic laminate unless noted otherwise.

.2 Case Bodies: .1 19mm particle board core with plastic laminate finish. .2 Edging: Plastic laminate. .3 Cabinet base: water-resistant plywood with veneer core, attached to cabinet separately.

Ensure cabinet gables do not come in contact with the floor. .3 Toe Kick Rail: 19mm thick by 100mm high, water resistant plywood with veneer core, machined

to receive four screws for attachment to bottom front edge of gables. .4 Backs: 12mm particle board core with plastic laminate finish unless noted otherwise. .5 Shelving:

.1 Veneer core plywood with plastic laminate finish unless noted otherwise.

.2 For spans up to 900mm: 19mm plywood.

.3 For spans greater than 900mm and up to 1200mm: 25mm plywood.

.4 For spans greater than 1200mm: support with intermediate gable.

.5 Edging: Plastic laminate. .6 Drawers:

.1 Face: 19mm particleboard core with plastic laminate finish.

.2 Drawer Box - Front, Back and Sides: 13mm particleboard core with plastic laminate finish.

.3 Drawer Bottom: 13mm particle board core with plastic laminate finish. .7 Casework Doors:

.1 19mm particleboard core with plastic laminate finish.

.2 Edging: Plastic laminate. .8 Closet Doors: Solid core wood doors with plastic laminate finish. .9 Counter Tops - Plastic Laminate:

.1 Postformed: Laminated plastic on 19mm particleboard.

.2 Plastic laminate: Refer to Section 06 41 05 - Plastic Laminates. .10 Shop install cabinet hardware supplied by Section 06 41 93- Cabinet and Miscellaneous

Hardware for doors, shelves and drawers. Recess shelf standards unless noted otherwise. .11 Shelving to cabinetwork shall be adjustable unless otherwise noted. .12 Provide cutouts for plumbing fixtures, inserts, appliances, outlet boxes and other fixtures. .13 Shop assemble work for delivery to site in size easily handled and to ensure passage through

building openings.

2.03 CLASSROOM CONTROL PANELS

.1 General: material thicknesses shall be as indicated on details.

.2 Control Panel Body: 19mm veneer core plywood with 19mm solid White Hard Maple sides.

.3 Finish: .1 Front: plastic laminate as selected by the Consultant. .2 Sides: semi-transparent stain and urethane finish.

.4 Hardware: Flat headed brass screws and cupwashers.

06 41 10 Winchester Public School Childcare Renovation Architectural Woodwork MCA File No. 18044


.5 Control Panels shall be full height from 150mm above finished floor to underside of finished ceiling.

2.04 CHILDCARE CUBBIES

.1 General: material thicknesses shall be as indicated on details.

.2 Construction: veneer core plywood with 19mm solid White Hard Maple edging.

.3 Finish: Semi-transparent stain urethane finish.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

.1 Prior to fabricating the work of this section verify dimensions on site to minimize site cutting.

.2 Where appropriate incorporate extra material to allow for scribing to adjacent surfaces.

3.02 INSTALLATION

.1 Do architectural woodwork to AWMAC/WI–NAAWS, except where specified otherwise.

.2 Install prefinished millwork at locations shown on Drawings. Position accurately, level, plumb straight.

.3 Fasten and anchor millwork securely. Provide heavy duty fixture attachments for wall mounted cabinets.

.4 Use draw bolts in countertop joints.

.5 Scribe and cut as required to fit abutting walls and to fit properly into recesses and to accommodate piping, columns, fixtures, outlets or other projecting, intersecting or penetrating objects.

.6 At junction of plastic laminate counter back and side splash with adjacent wall finish, apply a small bead of sealant. Refer to Section 07 92 00 - Sealants.

.7 Apply bituminous coating over wood framing members in contact with masonry or cementitious construction.

.8 Install hardware for woodwork of this Section as specified in Section 06 41 93 - Cabinet and Miscellaneous Hardware and Section 08 71 00 - Door Hardware. Fit hardware accurately and securely in accordance with the hardware manufacturer's directions.

3.03 CLEANING

.1 Clean millwork and cabinet work, inside cupboards and drawers and all outside surfaces.

3.04 PROTECTION

.1 Protect millwork and cabinet work from damage until final inspection.

END OF SECTION

Winchester Public School Childcare Renovation 06 41 93 MCA File No. 18044 Cabinet and Miscellaneous Hardware


PART 1 GENERAL


.1 Hardware for custom fabricated millwork.

.2 Miscellaneous hardware.





1.03 PRODUCTS SUPPLIED BUT NOT INSTALLED UNDER THIS SECTION

.1 Millwork Hardware: for installation under Section 06 41 10 - Architectural Woodwork.

.2 Miscellaneous Hardware: for installation under Section 06 20 00 - Finish Carpentry.

1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS

.1 CAN/CGSB-69.17-M86, Bored and Preassembled Locks and Latches.

.2 CAN/CGSB-69.25-M90/ANSI/BHMA-A156.9-1982, Cabinet Hardware.

.3 CAN/CGSB-69.27-93/ANSI/BHMA-A156.11-1991, Cabinet Locks.

.4 CAN/CGSB-69.32-M90/ANSI/BHMA-A156.16-1981, Auxiliary Hardware.

1.05 SAMPLES


.2 Submit one sample of each piece of hardware.

1.06 HARDWARE SCHEDULE

.1 Submit cabinet and miscellaneous hardware schedule in accordance with Section 01 00 00 – General Requirements.

.2 Indicate specified hardware, including make, model, material, function, finish and other pertinent information.

1.07 MAINTENANCE DATA

.1 Provide maintenance data, parts list, and manufacturer's instructions for incorporation into manual specified in Section 01 00 00 – General Requirements.

.2 Brief maintenance staff regarding proper care, cleaning, and general maintenance.

1.08 DELIVERY AND STORAGE

.1 Store hardware in locked, clean and dry area.

.2 Package each item of hardware including fastenings, separately or in like groups of hardware, label each package as to item definition and location.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 HARDWARE ITEMS

.1 Use one manufacturer's Product for all similar items.

2.02 MILLWORK HARDWARE

.1 Cabinet Hardware: to CAN/CGSB-69.25. .1 Hinges: 170 opening, self-closing, full overlay hinges, with factory-installed knock-on

dowels. Wood screw fastening system will not be accepted. Acceptable Products: Blum or Salice.

06 41 93 Winchester Public School Childcare Renovation Cabinet and Miscellaneous Hardware MCA File No. 18044


.2 Hinge Plates: one piece plate with minimum 3mm height adjustment, install using pre-mounted system screws. Wood screw fastening system will not be accepted.

.3 Door Dampener: Blumotion 971A with Cruciform Base.

.4 Bumpers: polyurethane, 3mm high by 10mm diameter. Minimum 2 per door and drawer front.

.5 Pulls: 8mm diameter solid aluminum wire type pull, 96mm centres, silver anodized finish. Häfele Canada Inc.: 116.05.922.

.6 Latches: Elbow catch, Richelieu Heavy Duty Elbow Catch No. 5540180, nickel finish.

.7 Double Door Bolt: Die-cast zinc, Häfele Canada Inc. Automatic Door Bolt No. 245.58.754.

.8 Cabinet Locks: To CAN/CGSB-69.27, cylinder lock recessed in door or drawer front, dead bolt type lock, complete with matching strikes as required. .1 Door locks: CompX National Stock Locks C8704. .2 Drawer locks: CompX National Stock Locks C8703.

.9 Pilasters: "U" shaped for recessed installation steel with zinc plating. Knape and Vogt KV-255.

.10 Shelf Brackets: Clip-in steel brackets - Finish to match pilasters. Knape and Vogt KV-256.

.11 Drawer Slides: 45 kg capacity, full extension, length to suit, with self-closing feature. .1 Accuride No. 3832 EC Easy Close

2.03 MISCELLANEOUS HARDWARE

.1 Auxillary Hardware: to CAN/CGSB-69.32.

.2 Coat Rods: .1 Rod: 27mm diameter polished stainless steel tube. Knape and Vogt, KV-660SS .2 Flanges: Steel end flanges, finish to match coat rod. Knape and Vogt, KV-734CHR. .3 Intermediate Hangers: Vertical hanger rod, finish to match coat rod. Hangers for rods

spanning more than 1200mm. Knape and Vogt, KV -760ANO. .3 Coat Hooks: Install in locations indicated.

.1 Typical: Zinc die cast, satin nickel finish, 89mm high with 50mm projection. Häfele Canada Inc.: 885.06.209.

.2 Double Hook: polished aluminum, 56mm high with 25mm projection. Häfele Canada Inc.: 845.13.200.

2.04 FASTENINGS

.1 Provide screws, bolts, expansion shields and other fastening devices required for satisfactory installation and operation of hardware.

.2 Exposed fastening devices shall match finish of hardware.

.3 Use fasteners compatible with material through which they pass.

2.05 KEYING

.1 Cabinet locks shall be keyed alike by room and master keyed.

.2 Provide keys in duplicate for every lock in this Contract.

.3 Provide three master keys.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS

.1 Furnish manufacturers' instructions for proper installation of each hardware component.

.2 Hardware for millwork units shall be supplied to Section 06 41 10 - Architectural Woodwork for installation.

.3 Miscellaneous hardware shall be installed under Section 06 20 00 - Finish Carpentry.

END OF SECTION

Winchester Public School Childcare Renovation 07 21 13 MCA File No. 18044 Board Insulation


PART 1 GENERAL


.1 Cavity Wall Insulation.

.2 Other Rigid Insulation.



.2 Section 04 20 00 - Masonry


1.03 REFERENCES

.1 ASTM-E96/E96M-10, Standard Test Methods for Water Vapour Transmission of Materials.

.2 CGSB-71-GP-24M-77, Adhesive, Flexible, for Bonding Cellular Polystyrene Insulation.

.3 CAN/ULC-S701-11, Thermal Insulation, Polystyrene, Boards and Pipe Covering.

.4 CAN/ULC-S704-11, Standard Specifications for Thermal Insulation, Polyurethane and Polyisocyanurate Boards, Faced.


.1 Store, handle and protect products under provisions of Section 01 00 00 - General Requirements.

.2 Minimize the time polystyrene insulation Products are stored or exposed to sunlight at Project site.

.3 Store Products away from construction activity and sources of ignition.

.4 Protect products from damage during handling, installation and at point of installation.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 INSULATION

.1 Rigid Under Slab Insulation: .1 Extruded polystyrene to CAN/ULC-S701, Type 4, thickness as indicated. .2 Thermal Resistance: RSI Value of 0.87 per 25mm thickness. .3 Dow Chemical Canada Inc.: Styrofoam SM. .4 Owens Corning Canada LP: FOAMULAR C-300.

.2 Cavity Wall Insulation: .1 Extruded polystyrene to CAN/ULC-S701, Type 3, thickness as indicated. .2 Thermal Resistance: RSI value of 0.87 per 25mm thickness. .3 Dow Chemical Canada Inc.: Styrofoam Cavitymate. .4 Owens Corning Canada LP: FOAMULAR C-200.

2.02 ADHESIVES

.1 Adhesive (for polystyrene): to CGSB 71-GP-24. Henry Company Canada: Air-Bloc 21.

2.03 ACCESSORIES

.1 Air Seal: As specified in Section 07 27 00 - Air Barriers.

.2 Cavity-Wall Insulation Fasteners: Refer to Section 04 05 19 - Masonry Reinforcement and Connectors.

07 21 13 Winchester Public School Childcare Renovation Board Insulation MCA File No. 18044


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

.1 Verify that building substrate surfaces, adjacent materials and installation conditions are ready to accept the work of this section. Ensure insulation materials and surfaces are dry.

.2 Verify that substrate is flat, sound, clean and free of objectionable air surface voids, fins, irregularities, and materials or substances that may impede adhesive bond.

.3 Notify Consultant upon completion of installation of vapour retarder and air seal to allow inspection before insulating material is installed or work is obscured.

.4 Beginning of installation shall mean acceptance of substrate.

3.02 PREPARATION

.1 Clean substrates of substances harmful to insulation.

3.03 INSTALLATION – GENERAL

.1 Use boards of largest possible dimensions to reduce the number of joints. Boards with chipped and broken edges are unacceptable.

3.04 CAVITY WALLS

.1 Ensure air seal is installed in accordance with Section 07 27 00 - Air Barriers.

.2 Cut and fit insulation tight to protrusions or interruptions to insulation plane.

.3 Cavity Walls with Masonry Backup: .1 Install boards horizontally between anchors. .2 Install cavity wall insulation fasteners at each tie location, wedge between reinforcing and

insulation. .3 Ensure fastener positively clips onto reinforcing and holds insulation in firm contact with

the substrate. .4 Where clip installation in confined areas may not be possible, install insulation with adhesive.

.1 Apply adhesive in three continuous beads on each board length. Apply adhesive fully around protrusions.

.2 Position and press boards into firm contact with substrate.

3.05 EXTERIOR FROST SLABS

.1 Place insulation under exterior frost slabs where indicated and after base for slab is complete

.2 Lay boards in two equal layers on level compacted fill. Offset joints between layers by 300mm.

.3 Prevent movement between insulation layers by pinning layers together with 6mm diameter wood pegs or with adhesive.

.4 Ensure that insulation is not displaced or damaged while placing concrete slab.

3.06 PROTECTION

.1 Protect insulation and vapour retarders under provisions of Section 01 00 00 – General Requirements.

.2 Do not permit work to be damaged prior to covering insulation. Protect from harmful weather exposures and physical abuse.

.3 Provide temporary coverings or enclosures when insulation will be subject to damage and cannot be protected by permanent construction immediately after installation.

END OF SECTION

Winchester Public School Childcare Renovation 07 27 00 MCA File No. 18044 Air Barriers


PART 1 GENERAL


.1 Membrane air seal materials and installation methods.

.2 Air seal materials to bridge and seal openings and penetrations of new door frames/screens and at mechanical penetrations.

.3 Repairs to existing air barrier membrane due to demolition work.



.2 Section 04 20 00 - Masonry.

.3 Section 07 21 13 - Board Insulation: Cavity wall insulation.

.4 Section 07 92 00 - Sealants: Sealant materials and installation techniques.

.5 Section 08 11 00 - Steel Doors and Frames: Door Frames.

1.03 REFERENCES

.1 ASTM-C920-14a, Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants.

.2 CGSB-19-GP-14M-84, Sealing Compound, One Component, Butyl-Polyisobutylene Polymer Base, Solvent Curing.

.3 Sealant and Waterproofer's Institute - Sealant and Caulking Guide Specification.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

.1 Submit samples of air barrier material in accordance with Section 01 00 00 – General Requirements.

.2 Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit indicating preparation, installation requirements and techniques, product storage and handling criteria.

.3 Inspection Company Reports: Submit reports on air barrier membrane installation as it progresses.


.1 Perform Work in accordance with Sealant and Waterproofer's Institute - Sealant and Caulking Guide Specification.

.2 Air barrier applicators shall be licensed or approved by the membrane material manufacturer.

.3 Air barrier materials and accessory materials shall be from the Product line of one manufacturer.

1.06 QUALIFICATIONS

.1 Applicator: Company specializing in performing work of this section approved and trained by materials' manufacturers.

.2 The applicator shall have proven experience in the work of this section for jobs of similar size.


.1 Do not install solvent curing sealants or vapour release adhesive materials in enclosed spaces without ventilation.

.2 Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by materials manufacturers before, during and after installation. Ensure materials are stored at a minimum temperature of 5oC.

1.08 SEQUENCING AND COORDINATION

.1 Sequence work to permit installation of materials in conjunction with related materials and seals.

.2 Coordinate work of this section with all sections referencing this section.

07 27 00 Winchester Public School Childcare Renovation Air Barriers MCA File No. 18044


1.09 WARRANTY

.1 Provide a warranty in accordance with the General Conditions, but for a period of two years.

.2 The warranty shall cover defects in material and workmanship.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MEMBRANE AIR BARRIER

.1 Membrane Air Barrier: Self-adhesive, rubberized asphalt bonded to sheet polyethylene, nominal total thickness of 1mm to 1.5mm. .1 Henry Company Canada: Blueskin SA. .2 Soprema Inc.: Sopraseal Stick 1100T. .3 W.R. Grace & Co. of Canada Ltd.: Perm-A-Barrier. .4 W.R. Meadows of Canada Ltd.: Sealtight Air-Shield.

.2 Sealants: Refer to Section 07 92 00 - Sealants. .1 Sealant Primer: Recommended by sealant manufacturers. .2 Substrate Cleaner: Non-corrosive, type recommended by sealant manufacturer,

compatible with adjacent materials. .3 Mastic: Compatible with membrane air barrier and substrate, thick mastic of uniform

consistency. .1 Henry Company Canada: Blueskin Sealant. .2 Soprema Inc.: Sopramastic 200. .3 W.R. Grace & Co. of Canada Ltd.: Bituthene Mastic. .4 W.R. Meadows of Canada Ltd.: Sealtight Pointing Mastic.

.4 Primer: Compatible with membrane air barrier and substrate. .1 Henry Company Canada: Bakor Blueskin Primer. .2 Soprema Inc.: Elastocol 700 Primer. .3 W.R. Grace & Co. of Canada Ltd.: Perm-A-Barrier Primer. .4 W.R. Meadows of Canada Ltd.: Sealtight Mel-Prime.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

.1 Verify that substrate surfaces are dry and clean and conditions are ready to accept the work of this section.

.2 Commencement of work implies the acceptance of substrate surfaces.

3.02 PREPARATION

.1 Remove loose or foreign matter which might impair adhesion of materials.

.2 Clean and prime substrate surfaces to receive air barrier membrane in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

.3 Prime only substrate surface that can be covered with membrane the same day.

.4 Protect all surrounding areas and surfaces from damage and staining during application of air barrier membrane.

3.03 AIR BARRIER MEMBRANE INSTALLATION

.1 Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

.2 Seal joints and perimeter edges of sheet steel air barrier.

.3 Co-operate with other trades to ensure continuity of air barrier membrane at junctions of different components and constructions.

.4 Stagger end laps to avoid four-way joints in air barrier membrane.

Winchester Public School Childcare Renovation 07 27 00 MCA File No. 18044 Air Barriers


.5 Apply a bead of mastic to end laps, application terminations, and around all penetrations of the membrane.

.6 Ensure air barrier membrane is lapped and sealed onto window and door frames.

.7 At the end of each day ensure that the work of this section is protected from adverse weather and other mechanical damage.

3.04 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK AND CLEANING

.1 Protect finished work under provisions of Section 01 00 00 - General Requirements.

.2 Do not permit adjacent work to damage work of this section.

.3 Clean spills, stains, and soiling from construction that would be exposed in the completed work. Use cleaning agents and procedures recommended by the manufacturer of the affected construction.

.4 Remove all masking materials after installation is completed.

3.05 SCHEDULE

.1 Wall Air Seal Over Outer Surface of Inner Wythe of Masonry: Membrane air barrier over masonry units, seal masonry anchor and other penetrations air tight.

.2 Door Frame/Screen Perimeters: Lap and seal air barrier membrane onto door frames/screens and fill space between frames and wall with air barrier foam sealant and elastomeric sealant as specified in Section 07 92 00 - Sealants.

END OF SECTION

Winchester Public School Childcare Renovation 07 84 00 MCA File No. 18044 Fire Stopping and Smoke Seals


PART 1 GENERAL


.1 Fire stopping openings and penetrations at walls and partitions.

.2 Smoke seals for vertical and horizontal fire separations.




.3 Section 09 29 00 - Gypsum Board.

.4 Division 23 – Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning (HVAC): Fire stopping within mechanical assemblies.

.5 Division 26 - Electrical: Fire stopping electrical assemblies.

1.03 REFERENCES

.1 ULC, List of Equipment and Materials, Fire Resistance, latest On-line Edition.

.2 CAN4-S115-M85, Standard Method of Fire Tests of Firestop Systems.

.3 WH, Intertek ETL Semko, Directory of Listed Building Products, latest On-line Edition.

1.04 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

.1 Service Penetration Assemblies and Fire Separation Joint Assemblies: certified in accordance with CAN4-S115 and listed in ULC Guide No. 40 U19 or Intertek ETL Semko Directory of Listed Building Products, Fire Stop Systems. .1 Fire stop rating at vertical fire separations and assemblies having a fire resistance rating:

F rating equal to the fire protection rating required for closures in the fire separation. .2 Fire stop rating at horizontal fire separations: FT rating equal to the fire resistance rating of

the assembly. .2 Service Penetration and Fire Separation Joint Firestop Components: certified by ULC in

accordance with CAN4-S115 and listed in ULC Guide No. 40 U19.13 and ULC Guide No. 40 U19.15, or by Intertek Testing Services and listed in the Directory of Listed Products, Firestop Systems.

.3 The fire-resistance rating of an installed fire stopping assembly shall be in accordance with the OBC.

.4 Fire stopping and smoke seals at openings intended for ease of re-entry such as cables shall be elastomeric seal.

.5 Fire stopping and smoke seals at openings around penetrations for pipes, ductwork and other mechanical items requiring sound and vibration control shall be elastomeric seal.

1.05 SAMPLES


.2 Submit duplicate 300mm by 300mm samples of fire stopping material proposed for the Project.

1.06 SHOP DRAWINGS

.1 Submit Shop Drawings and Product data in accordance with Section 01 00 00 – General Requirements.

.2 Submit Shop Drawings to show proposed material, reinforcement, anchorage, fastenings and method of installation. Construction details should accurately reflect actual job conditions.

.3 Submit manufacturer's Product data for materials and prefabricated devices, providing descriptions are sufficient for identification at job site. Include the manufacturer's printed installation instructions.

07 84 00 Winchester Public School Childcare Renovation Fire Stopping and Smoke Seals MCA File No. 18044


.4 Submit certification agency assembly data sheets for each type of joint and penetration assembly required for the Work.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

.1 Fire Stopping: .1 Asbestos-free materials and systems capable of maintaining an effective barrier against

flame and heat in compliance with requirements of CAN4-S115 and not to exceed opening sizes for which they are intended.

.2 Acceptable Products: .1 A/D Fire Protection Systems Inc.: A/D Firebarrier Mineral Wool Fire Stopping

Insulation. .2 Roxul Inc.: RXL Safe Fire Stop Batt.

.2 Smoke Seals: fire resistant material capable of maintaining an effective barrier against smoke and gases. .1 Fire Rated Sealant - Type 1 (for joints in vertical surfaces): non-sagging, fire rated silicone

listed for use in fire separations: .1 Hilti (Canada) Corporation: CP 601S Elastomeric Firestop Sealant. .2 3M Canada Inc.: Fire Barrier 2000 Silicone Sealant. .3 Tremco Construction Products: TREMstop Fyre-Sil.

.2 Fire Rated Sealant - Type 2 (for head of wall applications): sprayable single component, water-based, acrylic fire stop sealant. .1 Hilti (Canada) Corporation: CP672 Firestop Joint Spray. .2 3M Canada Inc.: 3M FireDam 200 Spray. .3 Tremco Construction Products: TREMstop Acrylic SP.

.3 Primers: to manufacturer's recommendation for specific material, substrate, and end use.

.4 Water: potable, clean and free from injurious amounts of deleterious substances.

.5 Damming and Backup Materials, Supports and Anchoring Devices: to manufacturer's recommendations, and in accordance with tested assembly being installed as acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

.1 Examine sizes and conditions of voids to be filled to establish correct thicknesses and installation of materials. Ensure that substrates and surfaces are clean and dry.

.2 Prepare surfaces in contact with fire stopping materials and smoke seals to manufacturer's instructions.

.3 Maintain insulation around pipes and ducts penetrating fire separations.

.4 Mask where necessary to avoid spillage and over coating onto adjoining surfaces; remove stains on adjacent surfaces.

3.02 INSTALLATION

.1 Install fire stopping and smoke seal material and components in accordance with ULC or Intertek listed assembly and manufacturer's instructions.

.2 Seal holes or voids made by through penetrations, poke-through termination devices, and unpenetrated openings or joints to ensure continuity and integrity of fire separation are maintained.

.3 Provide temporary forming as required and remove forming only after materials have gained sufficient strength and after initial curing.

.4 Tool or trowel exposed surfaces to a neat finish.

.5 Remove excess compound promptly as work progresses and upon completion.

Winchester Public School Childcare Renovation 07 84 00 MCA File No. 18044 Fire Stopping and Smoke Seals


3.03 SCHEDULE

.1 Fire stop for full depth or thickness of the assembly or component being fire stopped.

.2 Apply smoke seal material to both sides of vertical assemblies required to have smoke seals. This applies to all fire separations, whether rated or unrated.

.3 Fire Stop and Smoke Seal At: .1 Penetrations through vertical fire separations of masonry, concrete, or gypsum board

construction. .2 Top of fire separations of masonry construction at underside of fluted steel deck

assemblies: .1 Option No. 1: cUL Design No. HW-D-0098.

.1 Fire stopping: all specified fire stopping Products.

.2 Smoke seal: Hilti Type 2 fire rated sealant. .2 Option No. 2: ULC Design No. HW23.


.2 Smoke seal: 3M Type 2 fire rated sealant. .3 Option No. 3: cUL Design No. HW-D-0092 (Configuration A and B).


.2 Smoke seal: Tremco Type 2 fire rated sealant. .3 Top of fire separations of masonry construction at underside of concrete slabs:

.1 Option No. 1: cUL Design No. HW-D-0097. .1 Fire stopping: all specified fire stopping Products. .2 Smoke seal: Hilti Type 2 fire rated sealant.

.2 Option No. 2: cUL Design No. HW-D-0092 (Configuration C). .1 Fire stopping: all specified fire stopping Products. .2 Smoke seal: Tremco Type 2 fire rated sealant.

.4 Intersection of fire separations of masonry or gypsum board construction.

.5 Openings and sleeves installed for future use through fire separations.

.6 Mechanical assemblies penetrating fire separations: Refer to Division 23 – Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning (HVAC).

.7 Electrical assemblies penetrating fire separations: Refer to Division 26 - Electrical.

3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

.1 Field inspection and testing will be performed by an independent inspection agency selected by the Owner under provisions of Section 01 00 00 – General Requirements.

.2 Cost of testing will be paid from the cash allowance specified in Section 01 00 00 – General Requirements.

.3 Inspections and tests will be made on the installed fire stopping and smoke seals, after application and curing, for integrity of the installation and prior to concealment of the work of this section.

.4 Correct unacceptable work and provide further inspection to verify compliance with Project requirements.

.5 Reinspection of the installed fire stopping and smoke seals will be performed after installation of subsequent work of other sections, and prior to concealment.

.6 Repair damage to fire stopping and smoke seals caused by testing or by other trades before fire stopping and smoke seals are concealed, or if exposed, before final inspection.

3.05 CLEAN UP

.1 Remove excess materials and debris and clean adjacent surfaces immediately after application.

.2 Remove temporary dams after initial set of fire stopping and smoke seal materials.

END OF SECTION

Winchester Public School Childcare Renovation 07 92 00 MCA File No. 18044 Sealants


PART 1 GENERAL


.1 Sealants and caulking for exterior wall openings and joints.

.2 Sealants and caulking for interior wall openings and joints.






.5 Section 08 11 00 - Steel Door Frames.

.6 Section 09 22 16 - Non-Structural Metal Framing.

.7 Section 09 30 13 - Ceramic Tiling.

1.03 REFERENCES


.2 CAN/ULC-S710.1-05, Standard for Thermal Insulation - Bead-Applied One Component Polyurethane Air Sealant Foam, Part 1.

1.04 SAMPLES


.2 Submit samples of sealant colours for selection by the Consultant.

.3 Submit duplicate samples of each type of material and colour selected.


.1 Deliver and store materials in original wrappings and containers with manufacturer's seals and labels intact. Protect from freezing, moisture, water and contact with ground or floor.

1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL AND SAFETY REQUIREMENTS

.1 Comply with requirements of Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS) regarding use, handling, storage, and disposal of hazardous materials, and regarding labeling and provision of material safety data sheets acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction.

.2 Conform to manufacturer's recommended temperatures, relative humidity, and substrate moisture content for application and curing of sealants including special conditions governing use.

.3 Ventilate area of work as required and as may be directed by the Consultant by use of approved portable supply and exhaust fans.


.1 Sealants shall be installed by a qualified caulking Subcontractor with a minimum of five years’ experience and a proven record of good quality workmanship.

.2 Sealants shall be appropriate for the application and materials to be caulked.

1.08 WARRANTY

.1 Submit a warranty for joint sealant installation in accordance with the General Conditions, but for a period of two years.

.2 The warranty shall cover materials and application and shall include joint leakage, hardening, cracking, crumbling, melting, bubbling, shrinkage, running, sagging, change of colour, loss of adhesion, loss of cohesion and staining of adjacent materials or surfaces.

.3 Replacement of joint sealants shall include removal of defective materials, preparation for and application of new materials and the repair and making good of damaged adjacent materials.

07 92 00 Winchester Public School Childcare Renovation Sealants MCA File No. 18044


PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 SEALANT MATERIALS

.1 Polyurethane - Three Part Epoxidized. .1 To ASTM-C920, Type M, Grade NS, Class 50, Use NT, T, A, M, and O, chemical curing

polyurethane, colour selected by Consultant from the manufacturer's special colour range. .2 Acceptable Products:

.1 BASF/Sonneborn: Masterseal NP 2.

.2 Sika Canada Inc.: Sikaflex 2C NS EZ Mix.

.3 Tremco Commercial Sealants & Waterproofing: Dymeric 240. .2 Silicone - One Part Neutral Cure.

.1 To ASTM-C920, Neutral curing, Type S, Grade NS, Class 50, Use NT, M, G, A, and O, custom colour selected by the Consultant.

.2 Acceptable Products: .1 Adfast Inc.: ADSEAL 4940. .2 CSL Silicones Inc.: CSL-343 Silicone Construction Sealant. .3 Dow Corning Corporation: Dow Corning 795 Silicone Building Sealant. .4 General Electric Canada Inc.: Momentive Performance Materials SCS2000 Silpruf

Sealant. .5 Sika Canada Inc.: SikaSil WS-295. .6 Tremco Commercial Sealants & Waterproofing: Spectrem 2.

.3 Silicone - One Part, Mildew Resistant. .1 To ASTM-C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 50, Use NT, G, A, and O, white colour unless

specified otherwise. .2 Acceptable Products:

.1 Adfast Inc.: X-TRASIL 4710.

.2 CSL Silicones Inc.: CSL-160 Consumer Silicone Sealant.

.3 Dow Corning Corporation: Dow Corning 786 Silicone Sealant.

.4 General Electric Canada Inc.: Momentive Performance Materials Sanitary SCS1700 Silicone Sealant.

.5 Sika Canada Inc.: SikaSil GP/GP HT.

.6 Tremco Commercial Sealants & Waterproofing: Tremsil 200. .4 Acrylic Emulsion - One Part.

.1 To ASTM-C920, colour selected by Consultant from manufacturer's standard colour range.

.2 Acceptable Products: .1 BASF/Sonneborn: Sonolac. .2 Tremco Commercial Sealants & Waterproofing: Tremflex 834.

.5 Air Barrier Foam Sealant - One Part. .1 One part polyurethane insulating foam sealant, to CAN/ULC-S710.1. .2 Acceptable Products:

.1 Adfast Inc.: ADFOAM 1885-2.

.2 Dow Chemical Canada ULC: GREAT STUFF PRO Gaps & Cracks Insulating Foam Sealant.

.3 Zerodraft Products Inc.: Zerodraft Foam Sealant. .6 Preformed Compressible and Non-Compressible Back-up Materials.

.1 Polyethylene, Urethane, Neoprene or Vinyl Foam. .1 Extruded closed cell foam backer rod. .2 Size: oversize 30 to 50%.

.2 Neoprene or Butyl Rubber: Round solid rod, Shore A hardness 70.

.3 High Density Foam: Extruded closed cell polyvinyl chloride (PVC), extruded polyethylene, closed cell, Shore A hardness 20, tensile strength 140 to 200kPa, extruded polyolefin foam, 32kg/m; density, or neoprene foam backer, size as recommended by manufacturer.

.4 Bond Breaker Tape: Polyethylene bond breaker tape which will not bond to sealant.

Winchester Public School Childcare Renovation 07 92 00 MCA File No. 18044 Sealants


2.02 JOINT CLEANER

.1 Non-corrosive and non-staining type, compatible with joint forming materials and sealant recommended by sealant manufacturer.

.2 Primer: as recommended by manufacturer.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PROTECTION

.1 Protect installed work of other trades from staining or contamination.

3.02 PREPARATION OF JOINT SURFACES

.1 Examine joint sizes and conditions to establish correct depth to width relationship for installation of backup materials and sealants.

.2 Clean bonding joint surfaces of harmful matter substances including dust, rust, oil grease, and other matter which may impair work.

.3 Do not apply sealants to joint surfaces treated with sealer, curing compound, water repellent, or other coatings unless tests have been performed to ensure compatibility of materials. Remove coatings as required.

.4 Ensure joint surfaces are dry and frost free.

.5 Prepare surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's directions.

3.03 PRIMING

.1 Where necessary to prevent staining, mask adjacent surfaces prior to priming and caulking.

.2 Prime sides of joints in accordance with sealant manufacturer's instructions immediately prior to caulking.

3.04 BACKUP MATERIAL

.1 Apply bond breaker tape where required to manufacturer's instructions.

.2 Install joint back-up to achieve correct joint depth and shape, with approximately 30% compression.

3.05 MIXING

.1 Mix materials in strict accordance with sealant manufacturer's instructions.

3.06 APPLICATION

.1 Unless otherwise specified or indicated sealant colour will be selected by the Consultant to match the colour of the exposed finished surface.

.2 Air Barrier Foam Sealant: .1 Apply air barrier foam sealant in strict accordance with the manufacturer's printed

instructions. .2 Fill joints, pockets and openings using purpose made dispensing gun, making allowance for

post-expansion of foam. .3 Filled joints, pockets and openings shall be free of air pockets and embedded foreign

materials. .4 Cut back excess foam sealant after curing. .5 Where building sealant is to be applied over the installed foam sealant, ensure foam

sealant is cut back or recessed to sufficient depth to allow for installation of joint back-up and building sealant.

.6 Remove sealant smears and droppings immediately after foam sealant has cured to hard surface film.

.7 Clean off any foam sealant from surfaces not intended to receive foam sealant.

07 92 00 Winchester Public School Childcare Renovation Sealants MCA File No. 18044


.8 Make good or replace all such soiled surfaces. Clean surfaces as recommended by applicable trades and leave surfaces in original condition.

.3 Sealant: .1 Apply sealant in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. .2 Mask edges of joint where irregular surface or sensitive joint border exists to provide a

neat joint. .3 Apply sealant in continuous beads. .4 Apply sealant using a gun with properly sized nozzle. .5 Use sufficient pressure to fill voids and joints solid. .6 Form surface of sealant with full bead, smooth, free from ridges, wrinkles, sags, air

pockets, and embedded impurities. .7 Before skinning begins tool exposed surfaces to give slightly concave shape. .8 Remove excess compound promptly as work progresses and upon completion.

.4 Curing: .1 Cure sealants in accordance with sealant manufacturer's instructions. .2 Do not cover up sealants until proper curing has taken place.

.5 Cleanup: .1 Clean adjacent surfaces immediately and leave work neat and clean. .2 As work progresses remove excess material and droppings using recommended cleaners. .3 Remove masking tape after initial set of sealant.

3.07 SEALANT SCHEDULE

.1 Perimeters of exterior openings where frames meet exterior facade of building (ie. brick, concrete masonry units, precast concrete, metal siding, building panels): .1 Three Part Epoxidized Polyurethane. .2 One Part Neutral Cure Silicone.

.2 Seal interior perimeters of exterior openings as detailed on Drawings: .1 One Part, Acrylic Emulsion.

.3 Joints between gypsum board and other dissimilar construction: .1 One Part Acrylic Emulsion.

.4 Perimeters of interior frames and other interior joints not otherwise specified, where paint finish is required: .1 One Part Acrylic Emulsion.

.5 Perimeter of interior frames and other interior joints not otherwise specified, where paint finish is not required: .1 One Part Acrylic Emulsion. .2 One Part Neutral Cure Silicone.

.6 Perimeter of washroom and other plumbing fixtures (e.g. sinks, urinals, water closets, basins, vanities): .1 One Part, Mildew Resistant Silicone.

.7 Joints at cabinets and millwork, as detailed: .1 One Part Mildew Resistant Silicone, clear, colourless.

.8 Sealing air barrier to door frames and other penetrations and gaps in building envelope from 6mm up to 50mm wide: .1 One Part Air Barrier Foam Sealant.

END OF SECTION

Winchester Public School Childcare Renovation 08 11 00 MCA File No. 18044 Steel Doors and Frames


PART 1 GENERAL


.1 Interior steel door frames and sidelights.

.2 Exterior steel doors, frames sidelights and transoms.





.4 Section 07 21 13 - Board Insulation.


.6 Section 07 92 00 - Sealants.



.9 Section 08 80 00 - Glazing.

.10 Section 09 22 16 - Non-Structural Metal Framing.


1.03 REFERENCES

.1 AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440-11, North American Fenestration Standard/Specification for Windows, Doors, and Skylights.

.2 ASTM-A653/A653M-11, Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.

.3 ASTM-A780-93a, Standard Practice for Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of Hot Dip Galvanized Coatings.

.4 ASTM-A924/A924-10a, Standard Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Metallic-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process.

.5 ASTM-A1008/A1008M-12a, Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, Solution Hardened, and Bake Hardenable.

.6 ASTM-E283-04(2012), Standard Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen.

.7 CAN/CGSB-1.40-97, Anticorrosive Structural Steel Alkyd Primer.

.8 CAN/CGSB-1.181-92, Ready-Mixed Organic Zinc-Rich Coating.

.9 CGSB-41-GP-19Ma-84, Rigid Vinyl Extrusions for Windows and Doors.

.10 CAN/CSA-A440.2-09, Fenestration Energy Performance.

.11 CAN/CSA-G40.20-13, General Requirements for Rolled or Welded Structural Quality Steel.

.12 CSA-W59-M1989, Welded Steel Construction (Metal Arc Welding).

.13 Canadian Steel Door Manufacturers Association, (CSDMA), Recommended Dimensional Standards for Commercial Steel Doors and Frames, 2000.

.14 Canadian Steel Door Manufacturers Association, (CSDMA), Recommended Specifications for Commercial Steel Door and Frame Products, 2006.

.15 ANSI/NFRC-100-2017 [E0A1], Procedure for Determining Fenestration Product U-Factors.

.16 ANSI/NFRC-200-2017 [E0A0], Procedure for Determining Fenestration Product Solar Heat Gain Coefficient and Visible Transmittance at Normal Incidence.

08 11 00 Winchester Public School Childcare Renovation Steel Doors and Frames MCA File No. 18044


1.04 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

.1 Maximum air leakage rate for exterior door assemblies shall not exceed 5.1 L/s∙m5 at a pressure of 75Pa as determined in accordance with AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440.

.2 Maximum air leakage rate for exterior glazed steel frame screen assemblies shall not exceed 1.0 L/s∙m5 at a pressure of 75Pa as determined in accordance with AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440.

.3 Maximum overall U-factor for exterior door assemblies shall not exceed 2.84 W/m2∙K as determined in accordance with CAN/CSA-A440.2.

.4 Maximum overall U-factor for exterior glazed steel frame screen assemblies shall not exceed 5.114 W/m2∙K as determined in accordance with CAN/CSA-A440.2.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

.1 Submit in accordance with Section 01 00 00 – General Requirements.

.2 Product Certification: .1 Submit signed report and documentation, prepared by an independent CSA accredited

agency, certifying compliance with specified thermal, optical, and air leakage requirements.

.2 Documentation shall include the following parameters for each exterior door and screen system configuration: .1 Air leakage rate. .2 Overall coefficient of heat transfer (U-factor). .3 Solar heat gain coefficient (SHGC). .4 Overall visible transmittance (VT). .5 Condensation resistance expressed as a Temperature Index (I)

.3 Certification shall be based on full size sample testing and measurement or computer simulation and calculation in accordance with referenced standards.

.4 Submit specified certification documentation together with Shop Drawings. .3 Shop Drawings:

.1 Submit Shop Drawings for the work of this section.

.2 Indicate each type of door, material, steel core thicknesses, mortises, reinforcements, location of exposed fasteners, glazed openings and arrangement of hardware.

.3 Indicate each type of frame material, core thickness, reinforcements, glazing stops, openings, location of anchors and exposed fastenings and finishes.

.4 Include a schedule identifying each unit with door marks and numbered relating to numbering on Drawings and door schedule prepared by the Consultant.

.4 Samples: .1 Submit one 300mm by 300mm corner sample of each type of door. .2 Submit one 300mm by 300mm corner sample of each type of frame. Show butt cutout and

glazing stops.

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING

.1 Frame units shall be braced to prevent distortion during shipment.

.2 Store doors and frames vertically, resting on wood blocking, with sufficient slope to prevent any accumulation of standing water.

.3 Doors and frames shall be removed from packaging. Store doors and frames with spacers/blocking to allow air to circulate. Do not store under tarpaulins, plastic film, or other wrapping materials that may retain moisture or create a humidity tent.

1.07 WARRANTY

.1 Provide a warranty for steel doors and frames under the provisions of the General Conditions, but for a period of five years.



.2 The warranty shall cover defects in materials and workmanship.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

.1 Acceptable Manufacturers and Suppliers: .1 Artek Door (1985) Limited. .2 Baron Metal Industries Inc. .3 Daybar Industries Limited. .4 Fleming Steel Doors and Frames.

.2 All steel door and frame Products shall be supplied from one manufacturer.

2.02 MATERIALS

.1 Steel Sheet: cold rolled, commercial quality to ASTM-A1008/A1008M, matte finish.

.2 Galvanized Steel Sheet: .1 Hot dip coating: To ASTM-A924/A924M, coating designation Z275 in accordance with

ASTM-A653/A653M. .2 Galvannealed coating: To ASTM-A924/A924M, coating designation ZF120 in accordance

with ASTM-A653/A653M. .3 Doors:

.1 Door face sheets for interior doors: 1.6mm base metal thickness, galvannealed coating.

.2 Door face sheets for exterior doors: 1.6mm base metal thickness galvanized hot dip coating.

.4 Door Core: .1 Interior Doors: Hollow steel, vertically stiffened with 1.0mm thick steel ribs spot welded to

face sheet. .2 Exterior Doors: Hollow steel, vertically stiffened with steel ribs spot welded to face sheets

and all voids filled with rigid polyurethane foam insulation. .5 Door Frames: Steel frames for exterior and interior openings, 1.6mm base metal thickness.

.1 Interior frames: galvannealed, wipe coating.

.2 Exterior frames: galvanized, hot dip coating. .6 Provide other door and frame components in accordance with CSDMA requirements. .7 Door Silencers: Single stud rubber or neoprene type. .8 Thermal Breaks: Rigid polyvinylchloride extrusion conforming to CGSB-41-GP-19Ma. .9 Primer: For galvanized steel sheet to CAN/CGSB-1.181. .10 Jamb Anchors:

.1 Cavity Wall: Screw and steel shield.

.2 Solid Masonry: Galvanized adjustable "T" shaped anchor fabricated from 1.6mm thick steel.

.3 Concrete Walls or Existing Walls: Machine screw and steel shield.

.4 Floor Anchor: 1.6mm thick, galvanized steel clip angle welded to frame with holes for securing to floor.

.11 Sealant: Refer to Section 07 92 00 - Sealants.

.12 Air Barrier Foam Sealant: Refer to Section 07 92 00 - Sealants.

.13 Vision Panels: Refer to Door Schedule and Section 08 80 00 - Glazing.

2.03 FABRICATION - GENERAL

.1 Fabricate doors and frames as detailed, to CSDMA Recommended Specifications for Commercial Steel Door and Frame Products, except where specified otherwise. Reinforce door and frames to suit hardware requirements specified in Section 08 71 00 - Door Hardware. Use hardware templates supplied by Section 08 71 00.



.1 For mortised template hinges, provide minimum 3.4mm thick reinforcement, with integral high-frequency angle, and integral field-conversion from standard-weight to heavy-weight hinges, at all hinge locations in both doors and frames.

.2 For continuous hinges, provide minimum 2.7mm thick continuous reinforcement, in both doors and frames.

.3 For mortise locks, provide minimum 1.3mm thick reinforcing box, with integral lock-edge mounting tabs and lock body supports.

.4 For cylindrical locks, provide minimum 1.3mm thick reinforcing, with integral lock-edge mounting tabs and latch case support.

.5 Provide all function holes for all latching and locking hardware, including those for through-bolted lever trim.

.2 Coordinate with hardware Supplier and make provisions for the installation of power door operators, and electronic panic devices provided by Section 08 71 00 - Door Hardware. Coordinate with the electrical Subcontractor and make provisions for security door contacts.

.3 Factory mortise, reinforce, drill and tap doors and frames for mortised hardware. Reinforce doors and frames for surface mounted hardware. Site-drill and tap for installation of surface-applied hardware in accordance with hardware manufacturers= installation templates.

.4 Holes 12.7mm in diameter and larger shall be factory prepared. Holes less than 12.7mm in diameter shall be factory prepared when required for the function of the device or when these holes overlap function holes.

.5 Mortised cutouts shall be protected with steel guard boxes.

.6 Shop prime cold rolled steel sheet.

.7 Apply, at factory, touch up primer to doors and frames manufactured from galvanized steel where coating has been removed during fabrication.

.8 Welding shall conform to CSA-W59.

.9 Glazing stops shall be 0.9mm formed channels 19mm high, accurately fitting butt joints in corners. Anchor with sheet metal screws.

2.04 DOOR FABRICATION

.1 Make provision for glazing as indicated and provide the necessary glazing stops.

.2 Construct rail and stile doors in same manner as flush doors.

.3 Construct matching panels in same manner as doors.

.4 Fabricate all steel doors with longitudinal edges seamless, continuously welded, ground smooth, and sanded flush. No visible seams will be accepted.

.5 Fabricate all steel doors with top and bottom channels flush and filled solid, extending the full width of door and welded to both faces. Coordinate with hardware supplier for recessed hardware requirements. Exterior doors shall have condensation weep-holes at the bottom.

.6 Hollow Metal Construction: .1 Reinforce with vertical stiffeners, securely welded to each face sheet at 150mm on centre

maximum. .2 For exterior doors fill voids between stiffeners with insulation as specified.

2.05 FRAME FABRICATION

.1 Cut mitres and joints accurately, reinforce as required, and weld continuously on inside of frame profile. Knocked-down frames are not acceptable.

.2 Grind welded corners and joints to a flat plane. Fabricate all steel frames with seamless edges and joints, continuously welded, ground smooth, and sanded flush. No visible seams or paste filler will be accepted.

.3 All mullions shall be fabricated with a 1.0mm thick continuous internal assembly channel running the full length of the mullion. This reinforcing is to prevent any deflection of the mullion.



.4 Anchors: .1 Provide clip angles at base of jambs for anchoring to floor. .2 Provide mullion floor anchors for the base of all vertical mullions, including

removable-type where specified. .3 Jamb and mullion anchors shall be of appropriate design, location, and quantity to comply

with fire protection rating requirements for all frames, whether fire-labeled or not. .4 Provide appropriate jamb anchors for type of wall construction and as detailed. Locate

anchors immediately above or below each hinge reinforcement on the hinge jamb and directly opposite on the strike jamb and spaced as follows.

.5 Anchors for Masonry Walls: .1 Frame opening height up to 2300mm: "T" strap: 3 anchors. .2 Frame opening height 2300 to 2450mm: "T" strap: 4 anchors.

.6 Anchors for Cavity Wall, Concrete, or Previously Placed Masonry Walls: Locate anchors not more than 150mm from the top and bottom of each jamb, and intermediate anchors at 600mm on centre maximum.

.5 Install 3 silencers on strike jamb for each single door and 2 silencers at head for pairs of doors.

.6 Fabricate thermally broken frames for exterior doors using steel core, separating exterior portion of frame from interior portion with polyvinylchloride thermal breaks. Closed mullion and centre rail sections shall be factory-insulated with mineral fibre batt insulation.

.7 Make provisions for glazing as indicated and provide necessary glazing stops.

.8 Provide two temporary jamb spreaders per frame to maintain proper alignment during shipment.

.9 When required due to site access as indicated on Drawings, or due to shipping limitations, frames for large openings shall be fabricated in sections with splice joints for field assembly. Splices shall meet all applicable fire labeling requirements.

.10 Provide mortar boxes that protect all threaded screw holes on mortised hardware preparations.

.11 Provide welded-on galvanized steel drip trim at the head of all exterior doors, for the full width of the frame assembly.

2.06 FINISHING

.1 File and grind all exposed welds smooth to a flat plane for appearance of one piece construction. Fill voids with metallic paste filler, grind and sand to a uniform smooth finish.

.2 Primed Surfaces: Clean surfaces to be primed. Shop apply full smooth coat of primer.

.3 Zinc Coated: Use zinc rich paint to meet CGSB-1.181 for coating areas where galvanizing has been removed during fabrication.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 FRAME INSTALLATION

.1 Set frames plumb, square, level and at correct elevation.

.2 Brace frames rigidly in position while building-in. Remove temporary steel shipping jamb spreaders. Install temporary wood spreaders at third points of door frame, to maintain frame width. Provide temporary vertical support at centre of head for openings over 1200mm wide. Remove wood spreaders after frames have been built-in.

.3 Secure anchors and connectors to adjacent construction.

.4 Allow for deflection of structure. Ensure structural loads are not transmitted to frames.

.5 Open sections at jambs, heads, and sills of exterior frames shall be fully filled with foam insulation by the Contractor.

.6 Frames in interior unit masonry walls shall be fully grouted in place.



.7 Fill depressions at screw heads with metallic paste filler, grind, and sand to a uniform smooth finish. Touch-up damaged galvanizing and primed surfaces.

.8 Steel frames and screens shall be glazed by Section 08 80 00 - Glazing.

3.02 DOOR INSTALLATION

.1 Install doors and prepare for hardware installation in accordance with hardware templates and manufacturers= instructions and Section 08 71 00 - Door Hardware.

.2 Provide even margins between doors and jambs and doors and finished floors as follows: .1 Hinge side: 1.0mm .2 Latch side and Head: 1.5mm. .3 Finish Floor: 13mm.

.3 Adjust operable parts for correct clearances and function.

.4 Install door silencers after frames have been painted.

.5 Steel doors shall be glazed by Section 08 80 00 - Glazing.

3.03 CAULKING

.1 Seal joints between framing members and adjacent construction to provide weathertight seal at outside and air vapour seal at inside.

.2 Install air barrier foam sealant at jambs and heads of exterior frames in accordance with Section 07 92 00 - Sealants.

.3 Apply joint sealant in accordance with Section 07 92 00 - Sealants.

3.04 FINISH REPAIRS

.1 Touch up with primer galvanized finish damaged during installation.

END OF SECTION

Winchester Public School Childcare Renovation 08 14 00 MCA File No. 18044 Wood Doors


PART 1 GENERAL


.1 Solid core wood doors.




.3 Section 08 11 00 - Steel Door Frames.


.5 Section 08 80 00 - Glazing.

1.03 REFERENCES


1.04 SAMPLES


.2 Submit one 300mm by 300mm corner sample of each type of wood door.

.3 Show door construction, core, glazing detail and faces.

1.05 SHOP DRAWINGS


.2 Indicate door elevations, sizes, types, core materials and construction, veneer species, swings, undercuts required, special blocking for hardware and cutouts for glazing.


.1 Deliver doors to site wrapped individually with polyethylene.

.2 Protect doors from dampness. Arrange for delivery after work causing abnormal humidity has been completed.

.3 Store doors in well ventilated room, off floor and neatly stacked flat on clean level surface and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

.4 Cover stored doors with opaque covering material where sunlight might bleach veneer.

.5 Seal top and bottom edges if stored more than one week.

.6 Protect doors from scratches, handling marks and other damage.

1.07 WARRANTY

.1 Provide a warranty for wood doors under the provisions of the General Conditions, but for a period of two years.

.2 Include coverage for delamination of veneer, warping beyond specified installation tolerances, defective materials, telegraphing core construction, splitting and deterioration of core.

.3 Replacement shall include fitting, installation, reinstallation of hardware and glass. Door to have same finish to match replaced door.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 WOOD FLUSH DOORS

.1 Solid core doors shall be five ply construction, Custom Grade in conformance with AWMAC/WI–NAAWS.

.2 Door Core Construction: .1 Solid (Non-Rated): AWMAC/WI–NAAWS, Section 9, Type: particleboard. .2 Stiles and Rails: Hardwood.

08 14 00 Winchester Public School Childcare Renovation Wood Doors MCA File No. 18044


.3 Provide solid wood blocking at hardware mounting locations and as shown on Drawings and details.

.3 Door Facing: .1 Face Veneer: Select White Hard Maple grade, to AWMAC/WI–NAAWS, Sections 4 and 9,

Rotary Cut and book-matched. .2 Stile Edges: Wood of same species as face veneer, Type D Edge Detail in accordance with

AWMAC/WI–NAAWS. .3 Stile Edges: in accordance with AWMAC/WI–NAAWS, Section 9, Type D Edge Detail, no

exposed crossband. Select White Hard Maple grade for transparent finish. .4 Adhesive: Type II (Water resistant) for interior doors. On-site and shop applied adhesives shall

not contain added urea-formaldehyde resins. .5 Vision Panels:

.1 Frames: Solid wood, of same species as facing.

.2 Glazing: Refer to the Door Schedule and Section 08 80 00 - Glazing.

2.02 FABRICATION

.1 Fabricate wood doors in accordance with AWMAC/WI–NAAWS, Section 9 and as specified. In addition, requirements of listing organization shall also apply for fire-rated doors.

.2 Laminate door facing, cross banding and assembled core in a hot press.

.3 Bond stiles and rails to cores. Sand for uniform thickness.

.4 Factory sand assembled door leaf.

.5 Factory machine doors for hardware in accordance with hardware requirements and dimensions. Do not machine for surface hardware. Use hardware templates supplied by Section 08 71 00 - Door Hardware.

.6 Factory cut vision panel openings.

.7 Provide inner blocks for hardware reinforcement at lock edge and top for door closers.

2.03 FINISH

.1 All Products provided in this section shall be factory finished using AWMAC/WI–NAAWS with semi-transparent stain and clear ultraviolet (UV) curable polyurethane finish. Stain to match existing wood doors.

.2 Provide touch-up kit for field touch-up.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

.1 Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable.

.2 Do not install doors in frame openings that are not plumb or are out of tolerance for size or alignment.

3.02 INSTALLATION

.1 Doors shall be installed by Section 06 20 00 - Finish Carpentry.

.2 Doors shall be glazed by Section 08 80 00 - Glazing.

.3 Install doors in accordance with AWI/AWMAC Quality Standards, Section 9 and as specified. In addition, requirements of listing organization shall also apply for fire-rated doors.

.4 Trim non-rated door width by cutting equally on both jamb edges. Reseal and refinish all cut or planed surfaces immediately to match factory finish.

.5 Trim door height by cutting bottom edge to a maximum of 19mm.

.6 Pilot drill screw and bolt holes using templates provided.

.7 Machine cut for hinges and closers as required. Core for handsets and cylinders.

Winchester Public School Childcare Renovation 08 14 00 MCA File No. 18044 Wood Doors


.8 Co-ordinate installation of doors with installation of frames specified in Section 08 11 00 - Steel Door Frames and hardware specified in Section 08 71 00 - Door Hardware.

.9 Install light kits plumb and level.

.10 Tolerances: Conform to AWMAC/WI–NAAWS for tolerances and testing methods for warp, cup, bow, and telegraphing.

3.03 ADJUSTMENT

.1 Just prior to completion of building, readjust doors and hardware to function freely and properly with smooth and balanced door movement and operation.

END OF SECTION

Winchester Public School Childcare Renovation 08 71 00 MCA File No. 18044 Door Hardware


PART 1 GENERAL


.1 Supply of door hardware for exterior hollow metal doors, interior wood doors and millwork cabinets as indicated.








.1 CAN/CGSB-69.17-M86, Bored and Preassembled Locks and Latches.

.2 CAN/CGSB-69.18-M90/ANSI/BHMA-A156.1-1981, Butts and Hinges.

.3 CAN/CGSB-69.29-93/ANSI/BHMA-A156.13-1980, Mortise Locks and Latches.

.4 CAN/CGSB-69.34-93/ANSI/BHMA-A156.18-1987, Materials and Finishes.

.5 Canadian Steel Door Manufacturers Association, (CSDMA), Recommended Dimensional Standards for Commercial Steel Doors and Frames, 2000.

.6 NFPA 80-2010, Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives.

1.04 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES

.1 Hardware for doors in fire separations and exit doors shall be certified by a Canadian Certification Organization accredited by the Standards Council of Canada.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

.1 Submit templates to installers and fabricators as required.

.2 Submit four copies of a detailed final Door Hardware List prepared by a qualified Architectural Hardware Consultant. .1 Indicate door hardware proposed including manufacturer, make, catalogue model number,

material, function, finish, location, keying, and other pertinent information. .2 The list shall be in the same format as the hardware list bound in this project manual.

.3 Submit manufacturers= specifications, catalogue cuts, and other data required to identify individual components listed and to demonstrate compliance with specified requirements for items contained in the final door hardware list. Submission of manufacturers= full line brochures is not acceptable.


.1 Provide parts list, manufacturers= instructions, and operation and maintenance data for each type of door hardware for incorporation into maintenance manual specified in Section 01 00 00 – General Requirements.

.2 Brief the Owner=s maintenance staff regarding proper care, cleaning, and general maintenance of door hardware in accordance with Section 01 00 00 – General Requirements.

1.07 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS

.1 Provide maintenance materials in accordance with Section 01 00 00 – General Requirements.

.2 Supply four sets of wrenches for door closers, locksets, latchsets, and exit devices.

.3 Supply four sets of other special parts or tools required for proper maintenance and adjustment of door hardware.

08 71 00 Winchester Public School Childcare Renovation Door Hardware MCA File No. 18044



.1 Package each item of hardware, including fastenings, separately or in like groups of hardware. Label each package as to item definition and location and corresponding with the hardware list.

.2 Ensure shipments are made in a timely manner to ensure progress of the Work and to comply with the Contractor=s construction schedule.

.3 Store door hardware in a locked, clean and dry area.

.4 Maintain a current inventory list and ensure that it is readily available for review in the door hardware storage area.

.5 In the event of damage to hardware items, immediately make repairs or replacements as necessary to the Consultant=s approval and at no additional cost to the Owner.

1.09 WARRANTY

.1 Submit a warranty for door hardware in accordance with the General Conditions, but for a period of three (3) years unless specified otherwise.

.2 Provide a lifetime warranty for all mortise hinges.

.3 Door hardware warranties shall cover all defects in material and workmanship that become apparent during the warranty period and such defects shall be made good or the defective product shall be replaced.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 DOOR HARDWARE - GENERAL

.1 The hardware supplier shall thoroughly review the Door Hardware List included with this project manual, the architectural door and hardware schedules, and the drawings prior to preparing the final Door Hardware List.

.2 The base bid shall be based on the manufacturers and Products specified and listed in the Consultant=s hardware list.

.3 For proposed alternatives refer to Document 01 00 00 – General Requirements.

.4 Use one manufacturer=s Products only for all similar items.

.5 Ensure that the hardware specified is suitable in both dimension and function for the intended purpose. Advise the Consultant of discrepancies or omissions. All door hardware shall be heavy duty commercial grade.

.6 Approved Hardware Suppliers: Door hardware shall be supplied by one of the following companies: .1 Commercial Doors and Hardware. .2 Empire Hardware Co. Ltd. .3 Great Lakes Architectural Hardware. .4 Regional Doors & Hardware. .5 Rivett Hardware. .6 Upper Canada Specialty Hardware.

.7 Keying: .1 Doors shall be keyed differently, keyed alike in groups, master keyed and grand master

keyed as directed and to suit the Owner=s existing master keying system. Submit keying schedule.

.2 Provide keys in duplicate for every lock.

.3 Provide three master keys for each master key or grand master key group.

.4 Stamp keying code numbers on keys and cylinders. .8 Strikes: ANSI with lip except deadlock strikes which shall be ANSI without lip.



2.02 DOOR HARDWARE - PRODUCTS

.1 Finish: Take special care to coordinate all of the various manufactured items furnished under this section to ensure an acceptably uniform finish.

.2 Hardware Finish Codes and Descriptions:

BHMA CODE CANADIAN CODE U.S.CODE DESCRIPTION

600 CP USP Primed for Paint (Steel)

619 C15 US15 Satin Nickel Plated (Brass / Bronze)

626 C26D US26D Satin Chromium Plated (Brass / Bronze)

628 C28 US28 Satin Aluminum, Clear Anodized

630 C32D,AL US32D Satin Stainless Steel

689 SBL,AL --- Aluminum, Painted

B --- --- Brush

NEO --- --- Neoprene

P --- --- Pile

V --- --- Vinyl

Note: not all the codes listed in this table are necessarily used in the Work. Refer to the attached Door Hardware List for final finishes.

.3 Butt Hinges - Full Mortise: .1 Interior: 626 finish. .2 Where doors are required to swing 180 degrees, furnish hinges of sufficient throw to clear

trim. .3 All full mortise hinges shall be concealed ball bearing, standard duty or heavy duty as

required. Economy hinges will not be accepted. .4 Continuous Hinges:

.1 Interior: 600 finish. .5 Locksets: 630 finish. Where lever handles are listed, they shall be solid not hollow. .6 Latchsets: 630 finish. Where lever handles are listed, they shall be solid not hollow. .7 Cylinders and 7-Pin Removable Cores: 626 finish. .8 Kick Plates: 630 finish.

.1 Confirm kick plate sizes prior to ordering.

.2 Minimum thickness: 1.3mm.

.3 Stainless steel: type 304, No. 4 finish, free from rough or sharp edges.

.4 Corners and edges shall be slightly rounded.

.5 Drill plates for countersunk fixing with stainless steel flathead screws flush with finished surface.

.9 Overhead Stops / Holders: 626 finish. .1 Use appropriate overhead door stop and holder where wall stops cannot be used. .2 Do not use floor stops.

.10 Wall Stops: .1 Do not use floor stops. .2 Do not use wall stops on non-masonry walls.

2.03 FASTENINGS

.1 Supply screws, bolts, expansion shields and other fastening devices required for satisfactory installation and operation of hardware, and as recommended by hardware manufacturers for long life under hard use.

.2 Exposed screws for installing hardware shall have Phillips or Robertson heads.

08 71 00 Winchester Public School Childcare Renovation Door Hardware MCA File No. 18044


.3 Exposed fastening devices shall match the finish and material of hardware.

.4 Where pull is scheduled on one side of door and push plate on other side, supply fastening devices, and install so pull can be secured through door from reverse side. Install push plate to cover fasteners.

.5 Use fasteners compatible with material through which they pass.

.6 All door closers shall be through bolt mounted.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS

.1 Furnish door and frame manufacturers with complete instructions and templates for preparation of their work to receive hardware. Advise door and frame manufacturers to be aware that strike heights as listed in the table below are required for this Project.

.2 Furnish manufacturers' instructions for proper installation of each hardware component.

3.02 INSTALLATION

.1 Door hardware shall be installed by Section 06 20 00 - Finish Carpentry.

.2 Architectural Hardware Consultant: .1 The Hardware Supplier shall have in his employ an Architectural Hardware Consultant who

is a current member of the American Society of Hardware Consultants, and who shall be made available for consultation during the course of construction at no additional cost to the Owner.

.3 Locate and mount hardware at standard location dimensions in accordance with CSDMA, Recommended Dimensional Standards for Commercial Steel Doors and Frames, and as indicated in the following table:

HARDWARE MOUNTING HEIGHTS

HARDWARE ITEM DIMENSION ABOVE FINISH FLOOR

LOCKSET or LATCHSET 1025 mm to Centreline of Strike

DEADLOCK 1200 mm to Centreline of Strike

EXIT DEVICE 1025 mm to Centreline of Strike

PUSH PLATE and DOOR PULL 1140 mm to Centreline of Plate or Pull

.1 The Hardware Installer shall carefully check manufacturers= installation instructions supplied with hardware products for conflicts with the above noted dimensions.

.2 The Hardware Installer shall use manual or AYankee@ screw drive to turn screws into pre-drilled pilot holes for the installation of hinges on mineral core fire protection rated doors. Note that other methods of installation may void the door manufacturer=s warranty.

.3 The recommended mounting heights shall be considered a general guide unless conditions such as intermediate rails and lines of glass dictate otherwise.

.4 Locate door stops to contact doors 75 mm from latch edge.

.5 Install hardware and trim square and plumb to doors.

.6 Safeguard keys, tag with opening number, and turn over to the Owner=s representative.

.7 Supply locksets to Section 06 41 10 - Architectural Woodwork for 35mm and 45mm thick doors where such doors are part of millwork closet units. Keying shall be in accordance with the building keying system for doors.

3.03 ADJUSTING, INSPECTION, AND CLEANING

.1 Adjust hardware so that latches, locks and closers operate smoothly and without binding and with minimal resistance in use.



.2 Ensure doors with closers close firmly and against building air pressure and can be opened readily as suitable for installation.

.3 Clean hardware after installation following hardware Suppliers= recommendations.

.4 At Project completion all items of door hardware shall be clean and free from disfigurement. The Contractor shall repair or replace hardware found to be defective.

END OF SECTION

Door Numbers

HwSet#

101A 4 101B 3 101C 3 102 1 104 1 105 5 106A 4 106B 3 106C 3 107A 2 107B 2 108 6 109 5 110 5 CABINETS

7

Hardware Group No. 1

For use on Door#(s) 102 104

Provide each SGL door(s) with the following:

QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 127X114MM 652 IVE 1 EA CLASSROOM SECURITY L9071P6 03B L283-711

Install indicator inside of room 626 SCH

1 EA KICK PLATE CBH 903 200 X SIZE TO SUIT 630 CBH 1 EA WALL STOP WS401/402CVX 626 IVE 1 EA COAT HOOK HENKELHOOK - HD00X

FINISH TBD BY ARCHITECT UNK

1 EA FINGER GUARD MK1A X DR HT FIN 1 EA FINGER GUARD MK1B X DR HT FIN 3 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE


For use on Door#(s) 107A 107B


QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 2 EA HINGE 5BB1 127X114MM 652 IVE 1 EA PASSAGE SET L9010 03B 626 SCH 1 EA WALL STOP WS401/402CVX 626 IVE 1 EA FINGER GUARD MK1A X DR HT FIN 1 EA FINGER GUARD MK1B X DR HT FIN 3 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE


For use on Door#(s) 101B 101C 106B 106C


QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 4 EA HINGE 5BB1HW 127X114MM 652 IVE 1 EA PUSH PLATE CBH 923 127 X 508 630 CBH 1 EA DOOR PULL CBH 9523B #1 MTG. 630 CBH 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4041 DEL HEDA ST-3068 689 LCN 1 EA KICK PLATE CBH 903 200 X SIZE TO SUIT 630 CBH 1 EA WALL STOP WS401/402CVX 626 IVE 1 EA FINGER GUARD MK1A X DR HT FIN 1 EA FINGER GUARD MK1B X DR HT FIN 3 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE 1 EA DOOR POSITION SWITCH BY OTHER, SEE DRAWING # UNK 1 EA MORTAR BOX TA-6410

Door contact GRY TAC


For use on Door#(s) 101A 106A


QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 4 EA HINGE 5BB1HW 127X114MM NRP 630 IVE 1 EA PANIC HARDWARE CD-98-EO 4' 626 VON 1 EA MORTISE CYLINDER 20-001 114 XQ11-949

cylinder dogging 626 SCH

1 EA PUSH/PULL PLATE CBH 380 127 X 508 630 CBH 1 EA OH STOP 100S 630 GLY 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP EDA ST-3068 689 LCN 2 EA JAMB GASKET 328AA X DR HT BK ZER 1 EA HEAD GASKETING 429AA-S

Install prior to mounting soffit hardware

AA ZER

1 EA DOOR SWEEP 8192AA X DR WIDTH AA ZER 3 EA THRESHOLD 522A A ZER 1 EA THRESHOLD 623A-223 A ZER 3 EA PVC BREAK PVC BREAK ZER


For use on Door#(s) 105 109 110




1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4041 DEL EDA ST-3068 689 LCN 1 EA KICK PLATE CBH 903 200 X SIZE TO SUIT 630 CBH 1 EA WALL STOP WS401/402CVX 626 IVE 3 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE


For use on Door#(s) 108




1 EA OH STOP 90S 630 GLY 1 EA KICK PLATE CBH 903 200 X SIZE TO SUIT 630 CBH 1 EA COAT HOOK HENKELHOOK - HD00X

FINISH TBD BY ARCHITECT UNK

1 EA FINGER GUARD MK1A X DR HT FIN 1 EA FINGER GUARD MK1B X DR HT FIN 3 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE

Hardware Group No. 7 - MILLWORK CABINETS

For use on Door#(s) CABINETS


QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 4 EA CLASSROOM LOCK AL70P6D JUP 10-001 1 1/8" LIP 626 SCH

NOTE: BALANCE OF HARDWARE BY MILLWORK SUPPLIER

Winchester Public School Childcare Renovation 08 80 00 MCA File No. 18044 Glazing


PART 1 GENERAL


.1 Glazing for exterior steel doors and entrance screens.

.2 Glazing for interior doors and screens.





1.03 REFERENCES

.1 ANSI-Z97.1-2009, Safety Glazing Materials Used in Buildings - Safety Performance Specifications and Methods of Test.


.3 ASTM-D2240-97, Standard Test Method for Rubber Property-Durometer Hardness.

.4 ASTM-E84-98, Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.

.5 ASTM-E330-97, Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference.

.6 CAN/CGSB-12.1-2017, Safety Glazing.

.7 CAN/CGSB-12.3-M91, Flat, Clear Float Glass.

.8 CAN/CGSB-12.8-M90, Insulating Glass Units.

.9 CAN/CGSB-12.20-M89, Structural Design of Glass for Buildings.

.10 CAN/CSA-A440.2-09, Fenestration Energy Performance.

.11 CPSC 16 CFR 1201-2012, Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials.

.12 Insulating Glass Manufacturers Alliance (IGMA), Glazing Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass Units, 1997.

.13 Insulating Glass Manufacturers Alliance (IGMA), Guidelines for Sloped Glazing, 1990.

.14 Glass Association of North America (GANA), Glazing Manual, 2005.

.15 ANSI/NFRC-100-2017 [E0A1], Procedure for Determining Fenestration Product U-Factors.

.16 ANSI/NFRC-200-2017 [E0A0], Procedure for Determining Fenestration Product Solar Heat Gain Coefficient and Visible Transmittance at Normal Incidence.

.17 ANSI/NFRC-400-2017 [E0A0], Procedure for Determining Fenestration Product Air Leakage.

1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

.1 Structural Design of Glass: .1 Glass thickness:

.1 Specified glass thicknesses are minimums.

.2 Confirm glass thicknesses by analyzing Project loads and in-service conditions.

.3 Provide glass lights in the thicknesses required to meet or exceed these requirements, but not less than the minimum thickness specified.

.2 Size glass units and glass thickness in accordance with CAN/CGSB-12.20.

.3 Size glass to withstand wind loads, dead loads and positive and negative live loads as measured in accordance with ASTM-E330.

.4 Limit glass deflection to 1/175 of span to a maximum of 15mm with full recovery of glazing materials.

.2 Thermal and Optical Performance: .1 Coefficient of Heat Transfer (U): Maximum centre-of-glass U-factor values for glazing

Products shall be as specified in Part 2 of this section and shall be determined in conformance with ANSI/NFRC-100 or CAN/CSA-A440.2.

08 80 00 Winchester Public School Childcare Renovation Glazing MCA File No. 18044


.2 Solar Heat Gain Coefficient (SHGC): Maximum solar heat gain coefficient for glazing Products shall be as specified in Part 2 of this section and shall be determined in conformance with ANSI/NFRC-200 or CAN/CSA-A440.2.

.3 Visible transmittance (VT): minimum visible transmittance for glazing Products shall be as specified in Part 2 of this section and shall be determined in conformance with ANSI/NFRC-200 or CAN/CSA-A440.2.

1.05 SUBMITTALS


.2 Submit all documentation and samples for review by Consultants at one time, prior to ordering glass products.

.3 Product Certification: .1 Submit signed report and documentation, prepared by an independent CSA-accredited

agency, certifying compliance with specified thermal and optical requirements. .2 Documentation shall include the following parameters for each exterior glazing system

configuration: .1 Centre-of-glass coefficient of heat transfer (U-factor). .2 Solar heat gain coefficient (SHGC). .3 Visible transmittance (VT).

.3 Certification shall be based on full size sample testing and measurement or computer simulation and calculation in accordance with referenced standards.

.4 Submit specified certification documentation together with Shop Drawings. .4 Shop Drawings:


.2 Shop Drawings shall include glass type, thicknesses, sizes, shapes, accessories, locations, and glazing methods.

.3 Shop Drawings shall include a glazing schedule listing glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location.

.4 Shop Drawings shall identify the insulating glass unit (IGU) supplier.

.5 Shop Drawings shall bear the seal and signature of the Professional Engineer providing glazing design for the Glazing Subcontractor.

.6 Submit a General Review Commitment Certificate for the work of section as may be required by the municipality or any authority having jurisdiction.

.7 Letter of Compliance: Submit the necessary documentation indicating compliance with the requirements of the Building Code and the approved drawings which formed the basis of the General Review Commitment Certificate.

.5 Samples: .1 Submit 300mm by 300mm size samples of each type of glass specified.

.6 Product Data: .1 Submit Product data for the work of this section. .2 Provide the manufacturer=s transmittance, reflectance, and thermal performance data for

insulating glass units. .3 Submit letter from insulating glass fabricator stating current IGMA compliance number and

identifying the types of edge construction covered by that number. .4 Manufacturers’ certification:

.1 Upon request, the respective manufacturers of specified glass products shall submit with the window and curtain wall assembly Shop Drawings, written certification stating that all glass and glazing materials and requirements as detailed and specified on the Shop Drawings have been reviewed and approved for use relative to their specific application, dimensional design and profile parameters, and conformance to all requirements as detailed and as specified in the Drawings and Specifications.



.2 Certification shall indicate the Shop Drawings reviewed by enumerating sheet number, dates and revisions.

.3 Identify any specified requirements that are in error or cannot legitimately be met, and provide alternates that meet the intent of the Specifications for the Consultant’s approval.


.1 Glass and glazing work of this section shall conform to good glazing practice as described in the IGMA-North American Glazing Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass Units for Commercial and Residential Use, (IGMA-Guidelines for Sloped Glazing), and the GANA Glazing Manual.

.2 Submit all documentation specified to show that all Products used meet or exceed the requirements of these Specifications.

.3 All glass shall bear manufacturer's labels identifying glass type and thickness. Labels shall remain on glass until final cleaning.

.4 Insulating glass manufacturer shall be a member in good standing of IGMA, and be prepared to submit evidence of current membership to the Consultant on demand.

.5 Glazing Subcontractor shall be member in good standing of the Architectural Glass & Metal Contractors Association or the Ontario Glass & Metal Association, and have a minimum of five years uninterrupted experience in successfully carrying out projects of similar size.

.6 Energy performance calculations shall be prepared by qualified practitioners who are prepared to submit evidence of their training and qualifications on demand.

1.07 SITE CONDITIONS AND COORDINATION

.1 Do not install any glazing until all nearby welding, grinding, sandblasting, waterproofing, mortar work and acid etching are complete.

.2 Schedule activities such as welding, sandblasting and grinding of steel or concrete, mortar work, acid etching and any other work harmful to glass, to be completed before start of glass installation. When such activities must be carried out in the vicinity of stored or installed glass, provide hoarding or other suitable protection recommended by Glazing Subcontractor.

.3 Report to the Consultant in writing any defects in existing work, or unsatisfactory site conditions. Start no work until conditions are satisfactory. Starting work shall imply acceptance of existing conditions and surfaces.

.4 Glaze with compounds, sealants, or tapes only when glazing surfaces are at temperatures recommended by the tape or sealant manufacturer, and when the substrates are free of moisture.

.5 When temperature of glazing surfaces is below that recommended by sealant manufacturer, obtain Consultant’s approval for glazing methods and protective measures which are to be used under these conditions.

.6 Cooperate with other Subcontractors and with framing Supplier(s) to ensure the work of this section is completed as specified.

1.08 WARRANTY

.1 Provide a warranty for glazing material and workmanship in accordance with the General Conditions, but for the time periods listed below.

.2 Insulating Glass Units: Manufacturer's 10 year warranty.

.3 Coated Glass: Manufacturer's 5 year warranty.

.4 For the purposes of this article, but without limiting the generality of this article; defects or deficiencies shall include: .1 Defects or deficiencies in design, workmanship or materials forming part of the work of

this section. .2 “Materials” shall include glass and glazing, aluminum, gaskets, tapes and sealants.



.3 With respect to sealed glazing units, the warranty shall cover the replacement of insulating glass units should cracking of glass or any other breakdown, failure, or deficiency of glass units occur, including hermetic seal failure, fogging, reflective coating defects, low emissivity coating defects, breakdown due to edge flaws (chips, gouges, and the like), migration of edge spacers, and breakage due to thermal stress, or should obstruction of vision develop due to dust or film forming on inner glass surfaces.

.4 With respect to spandrel glass, the warranty shall cover frit/scrim defects and breakage due to edge flaws (chips, gouges, and the like).

.5 With respect to applied decorative film, the warranty shall cover films against peeling, cracking, discolouring, deterioration, or failure to perform due to defects in material, workmanship, or installation.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS: FLAT GLASS

.1 Tempered Safety Glass (TGL): conforming to CAN/CGSB-12.1, 6mm minimum thickness. .1 Type 2 - tempered. .2 Class B - Float glass. .3 Category 1.

.2 Laminated Safety Glass (LGL): conforming to CAN/CGSB-12.1, two 3mm layers of annealed clear glass laminated to 1.5mm polyvinyl butyral (PVB) interlayer, 7.5mm minimum overall thickness. .1 Type 1 - laminated. .2 Class B - annealed glass.

2.02 MATERIALS: SEALED INSULATING GLASS

.1 Insulating glass units shall be IGMAC certified and labeled.

.2 IGU Seal: dual seal comprised of polyisobutylene primary seal with a secondary seal of silicone, butyl, polysulphide, or urethane.

.3 IGU Spacers: warm-edge spacer, comprised of rolled stainless steel and integral desiccant. Thermal conductivity of the spacer shall not be greater than 13.63 W/m∙K.

.4 Insulating Glass Units IGU): to CAN/CGSB-12.8, double unit, 25mm minimum overall thickness. .1 Glass: to CAN/CGSB-12.1 .2 Glass thickness (minimum): 6mm each light. .3 Inner-cavity space thickness: 13mm, 90 % Argon/10% air-filled. .4 Outer Pane: Tempered safety glass with low AE@ coating on glass surface number 2, clear.

.1 AGC Flat Glass North America Ltd.: Comfort Ti-AC 36.

.2 Cardinal Glass Industries: LoĒ2-272.

.3 Guardian Industries: Sunguard Super Neutral 68.

.4 PPG Canada Inc.: Solarban 60. .5 Inner Pane: annealed, laminated safety glass, clear. .6 U-V Transmittance: maximum 32%. .7 Visible Transmittance (VT): minimum 65%. .8 Total Solar Energy Transmittance: maximum 35%. .9 Total Solar Energy Reflectance: minimum 29%. .10 Shading Coefficient (SC): maximum 0.46. .11 Solar Heat Gain Coefficient (SHGC): maximum 0.40. .12 Light to Solar Gain (LSG): minimum 1.75. .13 Coefficient of Heat Transfer – U-factor (W/m2$K):

.1 Winter nighttime: maximum 1.42.

.2 Summer daytime: maximum 1.25.



2.03 ACCESSORIES

.1 Setting Blocks: Neoprene, 80 - 90 Shore A durometer hardness to ASTM-D2240, to suit glazing method, glass light weight and area.

.2 Spacer Shims: Neoprene 50 - 60 Shore A durometer hardness to ASTM-D2240, 75mm long by one half height of glazing stop by thickness to suit application. Self-adhesive on one face.

.3 Typical Glazing Tape: Preformed butyl compound with integral resilient tube spacing device, 10 - 15 Shore A durometer hardness to ASTM-D2240; coiled on release paper; size to suit glazing method, black colour.

.4 Sealant: One part neutral cure silicone to ASTM-C920, custom colour selected by the Consultant. .1 Dow Corning Corporation: 795 Silicone Building Sealant. .2 General Electric Canada Inc.: Silpruf Sealant.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

.1 Verify that openings for glazing are correctly sized and within tolerances to maintain uniform face and edge clearances.

.2 Inspect all butt and mitre joints in framing. Seal joints found to be open with a compatible sealant prior to glazing.

.3 Verify that surfaces of glazing channels or recesses are clean, free of obstructions, and ready to receive glazing.

.4 Report to the Consultant in writing any defects in existing work, or unsatisfactory site conditions. Do not begin to install glass until all conditions are satisfactory. Starting work shall imply acceptance of existing conditions and surfaces.

3.02 PREPARATION

.1 Ensure fabricated glass will fit openings and that all required clearances to framing will be maintained.

.2 Clean contact surfaces with solvent and wipe dry.

.3 Seal porous glazing channels or recesses with substrate compatible primer or sealer.

.4 Prime surfaces scheduled to receive sealant. Ensure surfaces are free of moisture and frost.

.5 Contractor shall take all precautions necessary to protect materials, before and after installation, from lime, mortar, water run-off from concrete or copper, careless handling of tools, weld spatter, acids, roofing tar, solvents, abrasive cleaners, and other items that could damage the glass surfaces. Do not rely on use of protective plastic films to protect materials.

3.03 INSTALLATION: GENERAL

.1 Install all materials according to manufacturers’ instructions and reviewed Shop Drawings and best practices as described in IGMA and GANA glazing manuals. Ensure each material used is compatible with the material which it contacts.

.2 Adjust operating sash before glazing. Glaze operating sash in the closed position. Sash to remain closed, and not be opened by any trade, until glazing materials have properly cured.

.3 Provide specified edge and face clearances and glass bite.

.4 Ensure all vent and weep holes and passages remain free of obstructions.

.5 Follow sealant manufacturer's recommendations for proper joint design, including use of joint fillers, primers, and bond breakers, as required to suit jobsite conditions.

.6 Remove excess glazing and sealant compounds, dirt, and other substances from glass and adjacent surfaces at completion of glazing work.



.7 Provide safety markings to installed glass by attaching streamers or tape to face of sash. Do not apply tape directly to the glass. Do not mark glass with paint or any other substance that is hard to remove or could leave permanent stains.

.8 Replace all defective glass products and glass damaged during installation at no cost to the Owner.

3.04 INSTALLATION: EXTERIOR DRY METHOD (PREFORMED TAPE AND GASKET)

.1 Glaze in accordance with window manufacturer's standard methods and as specified here.

.2 Cut glazing tape to length and set against permanent stops, 6 mm below sight line. Seal corners by butting tape and dabbing with sealant.

.3 Place setting blocks at 1/4 points, with edge block maximum 150 mm from corners.

.4 Rest glazing on setting blocks and push against tape with sufficient pressure to attain full contact at perimeter of glass unit.

.5 Install removable stops with gasket inserted between glazing and applied stops.

3.05 INSTALLATION: EXTERIOR - WET/DRY METHOD (PREFORMED TAPE AND SEALANT)

.1 Cut glazing tape to length and set against permanent stops, 6 mm below sight line. Seal corners by butting tape and dabbing with sealant.

.2 Apply heel bead of sealant along the intersection of the permanent stop with the frame ensuring full perimeter seal between the glass and frame to complete the continuity of the air and vapour seal.

.3 Place setting blocks at 1/4 points with edge block a maximum of 150mm from corners.

.4 Rest glazing on setting blocks and push against tape and heel bead of sealant with sufficient pressure to attain full contact at perimeter of pane or glass unit.

.5 Install removable stops with spacer strips inserted between glazing and applied stops 6 mm below sight line.

.6 Fill gap between glazing and stop with sealant to depth equal to bite of frame on glazing and 6 mm below sight line.

.7 Apply cap bead of sealant along void between stop and glazing, to uniform line, flush with sight line. Tool or wipe sealant surface smooth.

3.06 INSTALLATION: INTERIOR - DRY METHOD (TAPE AND TAPE)

.1 Cut glazing tape to length and set against permanent stops, projecting 1.5mm above sight line.

.2 Place setting blocks at 1/3 points, with edge block maximum 150mm from corners.

.3 Rest glazing on setting blocks and push against tape for full contact at perimeter of light or unit.

.4 Cut glazing tape to length and place glazing tape on free perimeter of glazing, projecting 1.5 mm above sight line.

.5 Install removable stop without displacement of tape. Exert pressure on tape for full continuous contact.

.6 Knife trim protruding tape.

3.07 PROTECTION

.1 Contractor shall take all precautions necessary to protect stored glass and installed glass, from lime, mortar, water run-off from concrete or copper, weld spatter, acids, roofing tar, solvents, abrasive cleaners, careless handling of tools, and any other activities by building trades that could permanently damage the glass surfaces.

.2 Install protective cover to glazing where there is a high risk of damage. Use plywood, heavy Kraft paper or non-staining transparent plastic sheet. Do not let protective materials contact surface of glass. Consult with Glazing Subcontractor to determine appropriate protective measures.



.3 Do not rely on use of adhesive plastic films to protect installed glass. When plastic sheeting is used, it must be transparent, suspended away from the surface of the glass, and be provided with adequate ventilation holes to prevent heat build-up.

3.08 CLEANING

.1 Remove all protective materials, glazing materials, and other deposits from finished surfaces.

.2 Remove labels after work is complete.

.3 Clean glass according to instructions from glazing contractor.

.4 Do not use vigorous cleaning methods. Avoid scratching glass.

.5 Clean and restore stained or damaged surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Replace glass if cleaning is impossible.

3.09 GLAZING SCHEDULE

.1 Steel Doors: .1 Specified in Section 08 11 00 .2 Glazed by this section. .3 Method (interior doors): Interior Dry (tape and tape) .4 Method (exterior doors): Exterior Wet/Dry (tape and sealant)

.2 Steel Frames and Screens: .1 Specified in Section 08 11 00. .2 Glazed by this section. .3 Method (interior): Interior Dry (tape and tape). .4 Method (exterior): Exterior Wet/dry (tape and sealant)

.3 Wood Doors: .1 Specified in Section 08 14 00. .2 Glazed by this section. .3 Method (interior): Interior Dry (tape and tape).

END OF SECTION

Winchester Public School Childcare Renovation 09 22 16 MCA File No. 18044 Non-Structural Metal Framing


PART 1 GENERAL


.1 Steel framing for interior gypsum board clad partitions.



.2 Section 06 10 00 – Rough Carpentry

.3 Section 09 29 00 - Gypsum Board

1.03 REFERENCES


.2 ASTM-A924/A924-10a, Standard Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Metallic-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process.

.3 ASTM-C645-96a, Standard Specification for Nonstructural Steel Framing Members.


.5 CSA-A82.31-M1980, Gypsum Board Application.


.1 Ensure that seismic performance and structural loading meet the requirements of the OBC and local authorities.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 PARTITION FRAMING MATERIALS

.1 Non-loadbearing Channel Stud Framing: to ASTM-C645, roll formed from a minimum of 0.79mm thick steel sheet, hot-dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM-A924/A924M, coating designation Z120 in accordance with ASTM-A653/A653M, for screw attachment of gypsum board and with service access holes. Stud size as indicated on Drawings.

.2 Floor and Ceiling Tracks: to ASTM-C645, in widths to suit stud sizes, hot-dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM-A924/A924M, coating designation Z120 in accordance with ASTM-A653/A653M. .1 Typical track: 32mm minimum flange height.

.3 Metal Channel Stiffener: 38mm by 19mm size, 1.4mm thick cold rolled steel, hot-dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM-A924/A924M.

2.02 ACCESSORIES

.1 Dampproof Course: polyethylene film, 0.15mm thick.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 ERECTION

.1 Install floor partition tracks and secure at 600mm on centre maximum spacing for their full length with fasteners appropriate to substrate.

.2 Install dampproof course under stud floor partition tracks on slabs on grade.

.3 Place studs vertically at 400mm on centre spacing unless noted otherwise and not more than 50 mm from abutting walls, and at each side of vertical HSS stiffening posts, openings and corners. Position studs in tracks and install top track. Cross brace steel studs with metal channel stiffeners as required to provide rigid installation to manufacturer=s instructions. Butt runners at wall intersections and corners.

.4 Erect metal studding to a tolerance of 3mm in 3000mm.

09 22 16 Winchester Public School Childcare Renovation Non-Structural Metal Framing MCA File No. 18044


.5 Attach studs to bottom and top track by using screws, crimp method or welding as required, unless noted otherwise on drawings.

.6 Co-ordinate simultaneous erection of studs with installation of service lines. When erecting studs ensure web openings are aligned.

.7 Co-ordinate erection of studs with installation of supports or anchorage for work specified in other sections.

.8 Install steel studs or furring channel between studs for attaching electrical and other boxes. Ensure that electrical boxes are not installed back to back in same stud space.

.9 Install continuous insulating strips to isolate studs from non-insulated surfaces, or at exterior walls.

END OF SECTION

Winchester Public School Childcare Renovation 09 29 00 MCA File No. 18044 Gypsum Board


PART 1 GENERAL


.1 Gypsum Drywall Systems: .1 Interior partitions for tape and joint compound finish. .2 Cementitious backer units for application of tile.

.2 Gypsum Board Attachment: .1 Gypsum and cement board screw-attached to steel framing and furring.



.2 Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry

.3 Section 07 84 00 - Fire Stopping and Smoke Seals.

.4 Section 09 22 16 - Non-Structural Metal Framing: Interior partition stud system.

.5 Section 09 30 13 - Ceramic Tile.

.6 Section 09 51 00 - Acoustical Ceilings.


.8 Supply of work which shall be installed by this Section is specified in: .1 Division 23 - Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning (HVAC): To furnish access panels. .2 Division 26 - Electrical: To furnish access panels.

1.03 REFERENCES


.2 ASTM-A924/A924M-10a, Standard Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Metallic-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process.

.3 ASTM-C36-97, Standard Specification for Gypsum Wallboard.

.4 ASTM-C475-94, Standard Specification for Joint Compound and Joint Tape for Finishing Gypsum Board.

.5 ASTM-C840-96, Standard Specification for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board.

.6 ASTM-C954-11, Standard Specification for Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Steel Studs from 0.033in (0.84mm) to 0.112in (2.84mm) in Thickness.

.7 ASTM-C1047-95, Standard Specification for Accessories for Gypsum Wallboard and Gypsum Veneer Base.

.8 ASTM-C1396/C1396M-11, Standard Specification for Gypsum Board.


.1 Maintain temperature minimum 10C, maximum 21C for 48 hours prior to and during application of gypsum boards and joint treatment, and for at least 48 hours after completion of joint treatment. In cold weather, provide heat to the areas of work to establish required temperature range.

.2 Apply only in areas that are closed in and protected against the weather.

.3 Provide adequate ventilation to draw off excess moisture.


.1 The work of this section shall be carried out by experienced drywallers under the continuous supervision of a competent foreman with a minimum of 5 years’ experience with work of similar size and complexity.

09 29 00 Winchester Public School Childcare Renovation Gypsum Board MCA File No. 18044


PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 BOARD MATERIALS

.1 Abuse-Resistant Gypsum Board (GBA): to ASTM-C1177/C1177M and ASTM-C1396/C1396M, thickness as indicated, square cut ends, tapered edges, 1200mm wide by maximum practical length. .1 Option 1: Moisture-resistant, mold-resistant, and abuse-resistant gypsum core, and

moisture-resistant and mold-resistant paper facings. CertainTeed Gypsum Canada Inc.: AirRenew Extreme Abuse Resistant Gypsum Board with M2 Tech.

.2 Option 2: Moisture-resistant, mold-resistant, and abuse-resistant gypsum core, and fiberglass facings. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum: DensArmorPlus Abuse-Resistant Interior Panel.

.2 Interior (tile backing) Cement Board: 12.7mm thick glass fibre reinforced Portland cement board. .1 CertainTeed Canada: PermaBase Cement Board. .2 CGC Inc.: Durock Cement Board. .3 Laticrete International Inc.: Wonder Board. .4 Unifix: Unipan

2.02 ACCESSORIES

.1 Metal Trims, Cornerbeads, and Reveal Mouldings: to ASTM-C1047, 0.5mm base thickness commercial grade sheet steel, galvanized with perforated flanges; one piece length per location. .1 Edge Trim:

.1 CertainTeed Gypsum Canada Inc.: ProRoc AquaBead Corner Reinforcement L-Trim.

.2 CGC Inc.: Sheetrock Paper Faced Metal Trim AL@ Shape, (B4 Series). .2 Corner beads:

.1 CertainTeed Gypsum Canada Inc.: ProRoc AquaBead Corner Reinforcement Outside 90o.

.2 CGC Inc.: Sheetrock Paper Faced Metal Outside Corner Bead, 90 degree (B1 Series). .2 Polyethylene: to CAN/CGSB-51.34, Type 2, 0.15mm thick. .3 Insulating Strip: rubberized, moisture resistant, 3mm thick foam strip, 12mm wide, with

self-sticking permanent adhesive on one face, lengths as required. .4 Joint Compound and Joint Tape: to ASTM-C475, asbestos-free, as recommended by board

manufacturer.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GYPSUM BOARD INSTALLATION

.1 Do not apply gypsum board until bucks, fastenings, supports, blocking, electrical and mechanical work are installed and approved.

.2 Do not apply gypsum board until plywood sheathing has been installed on stud framing.

.3 Ensure that environmental conditions have been satisfied prior to commencing work and that adjacent construction has been completed so that this work is not impeded.

.4 Apply gypsum board as indicated on Drawings to metal furring or framing using screw fasteners. Maximum spacing of screws shall be 300mm on centre.

.5 Secure all gypsum board parallel to framing, installed over plywood sheathing.

.6 Install interior cement board in areas to receive ceramic wall tile as indicated on drawings or in Construction Legend.

Winchester Public School Childcare Renovation 09 29 00 MCA File No. 18044 Gypsum Board


3.02 ACCESSORIES INSTALLATION

.1 Erect accessories straight, plumb or level, rigid and at proper plane. Use full length pieces where practical. Make joints tight, accurately aligned and rigidly secured. Mitre and fit corners accurately, free from rough edges. Secure at 150mm on centre.

.2 Install metal trims around perimeter of suspended ceilings surfaces.

.3 Install metal trims where gypsum board butts against surfaces, at edges exposed to view, having no trim concealing junction, at control joints and where otherwise indicated.

.4 Install insulating strips continuously at edges of gypsum board and metal trims abutting metal window, screen and exterior door frames, to provide thermal break.

3.03 TRIM AND REVEALS

.1 Minimize joints. Use corner pieces and splicers.

3.04 ACCESS DOORS

.1 Install access doors to electrical and mechanical fixtures specified in respective sections.

.2 Rigidly secure frames to furring or framing systems.

3.05 TAPING AND FILLING - GYPSUM BOARD

.1 Finish face panel joints and internal angles with joint system consisting of joint compound, joint tape and taping compound installed according to manufacturer's directions and feathered out onto panel faces.

.2 Levels of Finish: in accordance with ASTM-C840. .1 Typical finish: Level 4 finish, unless noted otherwise. .2 Fiberglass-faced gypsum board: Level 5 finish.

.3 Finish corner beads, control joints and trim as required with two coats of joint compound and one coat of taping compound, feathered out onto panel faces.

.4 Fill screw head depressions with joint and taping compounds to bring flush with adjacent surface of gypsum board so as to be invisible after surface finish is completed.

.5 Sand lightly to remove burred edges and other imperfections. Avoid sanding adjacent surface of board.

.6 Draw joint compound from bead to bead on board surfaces one metre or less in size.

.7 When finishing of joints and screw head depression on abuse resistant panels is completed, skim coat entire panel surface with joint compound in a continuous application following the manufacturer’s directions.

3.06 CLEANING

.1 Remove excess joint compound from adjacent surfaces and materials, before it sets.

.2 Use joint compound to fill any depressions, holes or defective joints.

.3 Ensure that the completed work is plumb, straight and level with a smooth even texture, to receive subsequent finishes.

END OF SECTION

Winchester Public School Childcare Renovation 09 30 13 MCA File No. 18044 Ceramic Tiling


PART 1 GENERAL


.1 Wall tile over concrete masonry units.

.2 Floor tile over concrete slab.



.2 Section 03 35 00 - Concrete Floor Finishing.

.3 Section 09 29 00 – Gypsum Board.

.4 Section 07 92 00 - Sealants


.1 ANSI-A118.4-1992, Specifications for Latex Portland Cement Mortar.

.2 ANSI-A118.6-1992, Specifications for Ceramic Tile Grouts.

.3 ANSI-A136.1-1992, Organic Adhesives for Installation of Ceramic Tile.

.4 ANSI-A137.1-2012, Specification for Ceramic Tile.

.5 ANSI-A136.1-1992, Organic Adhesives for Installation of Ceramic Tile.

.6 ISO-10545-Series, Ceramic Tiles, Standards for Testing.

.7 ISO-13006-2012, Ceramic Tiles, Definitions, Classifications, Characteristics and Marking.

.8 TTMAC - Specification Guide 09 30 00 - Tile Installation Manual, 2016-2017.


.1 The work of this section shall be carried out by a company that is a member in good standing of the Terrazzo, Tile and Marble Association of Canada.

.2 This work shall be done under proper supervision by persons skilled in the methods following the recommendations of the manufacturer of the Products involved and having a minimum of two years proven experience.

.3 The ceramic tile Subcontractor shall provide proof of having successfully completed at least three projects of similar size and scope.

.4 Prevent any traffic over completed floors for a period of 72 hours after completion.

.5 Provide protection of finished floors subject to construction traffic.

1.05 SAMPLES


.2 Submit samples of grout colour for selection by the Consultant.

.3 Submit samples of transition strip as specified.

1.06 MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS

.1 Provide maintenance instructions as recommended by the material suppliers in accordance with Section 01 00 00 – General Requirements.

.2 Provide four copies of the TTMAC Maintenance Guide, latest edition, for inclusion in the Maintenance Manual.

.3 Give specific warning of any maintenance practice or material which may damage or disfigure the finished work or alter the coefficient of friction (i.e., slip resistance) of the finished surface.

1.07 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL

.1 Provide a minimum of one unopened box of each type and colour of tile required for the Project for maintenance use. Store where directed.

.2 Maintenance material shall be of same production run as the installed material.

09 30 13 Winchester Public School Childcare Renovation Ceramic Tiling MCA File No. 18044


1.08 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS

.1 Portland Cement Mortars and Bond Coats: Maintain air temperature and structural base temperature at ceramic tile installation area above 12C for 72 hours before and during installation, and 48 hours after installation and until setting materials have cured.

.2 Rapid-set Mortars or Latex Modified Mortars: Follow manufacturers= recommendations.

.3 Lighting: Ceramic tile work shall not proceed unless the permanent lighting is in place and operational or a minimum of 161Lm/m5 lighting is provided on the surface to be tiled.

1.09 WARRANTY

.1 Provide a warranty for ceramic tile work in accordance with the General Conditions, but for a period of three years.

.2 The warranty shall cover the complete installation provided under this section against defective material and workmanship.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 CERAMIC TILE

.1 Ceramic Wall Tile - (CWT): meeting requirements of ANSI-A137.1 or ISO-13006, glazed plain face, 8” x 20”. Matching edge trim to suit application. .1 Colour and Dimension Series Tile supplied by Olympia Tile & Stone .2 Colour: Bone CDC Bright

.2 Porcelain Floor Tile - (POR): meeting requirements of ANSI-A137.1 or ISO-13006, 300mm by 300mm, square edges, slip resistant surface. Matching 300mm long and 100mm high base. Colour to be selected by the Consultant from the manufacturer’s standard colour range. .1 Casalgrande Padana: Granitogres, Marte. Supplied by Tribute Tile. Matte finish .2 Royal Mosa: Global Collection. Supplied by Holten Impex International. Matte finish. .3 Stone Tile Group: Meteor, matt finish.

2.02 MORTAR AND ADHESIVE MATERIALS

.1 Portland Cement: to CAN/CSA-A5, Type 10.

.2 Sand: to CAN/CSA-A23.1, clean, washed, sharp sand, passing 1.6mm sieve.

.3 Hydrated Lime: to ASTM-C207.

.4 Water: potable and free of chemicals detrimental to mortar and grout mixes.

.5 Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar: to ANSI-A118.1. Mapei Inc., Kerabond Dry-Set Mortar or Flextile Ltd., No. 51 Floor and Wall Mix.

.6 Latex-Portland Cement Mortar: to ANSI-A118.4. .1 Ardex Engineered Cements: Ardex X77 Microtec Fiber Reinforced, Polymer Modified Thin

Set Mortar. .2 Flextile Ltd.: Flextile 51 Floor and Wall Mortar Mix with Flextile 43 Thin Set Mortar

Additive. .3 Laticrete International Inc.: Floor=N Wall Thin-Set with Laticrete 3701 Latex Grout and

Mortar Admix. .4 Mapei Inc.: Kerabond Dry-Set Mortar and Keralastic Liquid Flexible Additive. .5 TEC: Super Flex - Premium Latex Modified Thin Set Mortar.

.7 Latex Additive: formulated for use in Portland cement mortars and leveling coats. .1 Ardex Engineered Cements: Ardex E90 Mortar Admix. .2 Flextile Ltd.: Flextile Mortar Additive No. 43 or No. 44. .3 Laticrete International Inc.: Laticrete 3701 Latex Grout and Mortar Admix. .4 Mapei Inc.: Keralastic Liquid Flexible Additive .5 TEC: XtraFlex - Premium Acrylic Mortar Additive

Winchester Public School Childcare Renovation 09 30 13 MCA File No. 18044 Ceramic Tiling


2.03 GROUT

.1 Latex-Portland Cement Sanded Grout: to ANSI-A118.6, consisting of blended Portland cement, aggregates, and pigments with latex additive. Provide for 1 colour to be selected by the Consultant. .1 Ardex Engineered Cements: Ardex FL Rapid Set, Flexible, Sanded Grout. .2 Flextile Ltd.: Flextile Polymer Modified Floor Grout, 600 Series. .3 Laticrete International, Inc.: Laticrete Floor Grout and Joint Filler, 500 Series with Laticrete

1776 Grout Admix Plus. .4 Mapei Inc.: KER 200 Sanded Grout. .5 TEC: AccuColor - Premium Sanded Grout.

.2 Latex-Portland Cement Unsanded Grout: to ANSI-A118.6, consisting of blended Portland cement, aggregates, and pigments with latex additive. Provide for 3 colours to be selected by the Consultant. .1 Ardex Engineered Cements: Ardex FG-C Microtec Unsanded Floor and Wall Grout. .2 Flextile Ltd.: Flextile Polymer Modified Wall Grout, 500 Series. .3 Laticrete International, Inc.: Laticrete Dry-Set Wall Grout, 600 Series with Laticrete 1776

Grout Admix Plus. .4 Mapei Inc.: KER 800 Unsanded Grout. .5 TEC: AccuColor-Premium Unsanded Grout.

.3 Grout preparation: follow manufacturer=s printed instructions.

2.04 ACCESSORIES

.1 Sealant: in accordance with Section 07 92 00 - Sealants. Colour will be selected by the Consultant.

.2 Transition Strips: .1 Porcelain Tile to Vinyl Composition Tile: Satin anodized aluminum with integrated

trapezoid-perforated anchoring leg. Schlüter-SCHIENE, size to suit tile thickness.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION

.1 Surfaces shall be clean, dimensionally stable, cured, and free of contaminants such as oil, sealers and curing compounds.

.2 Concrete Substrate Finish: Cure concrete for a minimum of 28 days. .1 Thin-set applications: steel trowel and fine broom finish.

.3 Substrate Surface Variation: .1 Thin-set applications: 3mm in 3000mm and 1.5mm in 305mm maximum. .2 Vertical surfaces: 3mm in 2400 mm.

.4 Examine areas in which the work of this section is to be applied and notify the Consultant of any deficiencies which must be corrected before work can commence.

.5 Do not proceed with the work until improper conditions are corrected.

.6 Protect other work during installation and protect tile work until properly set, grouted and sealed.

.7 Co-ordinate the work of this section related to the work of other sections.

3.02 WORKMANSHIP

.1 Perform all work in accordance with the requirements of the TTMAC Tile Installation Manual.

.2 Apply tile or backing coats to clean and sound surfaces.

.3 Bring every fourth course, vertical and horizontal, to plumb and level continuous lines.

.4 Thoroughly back-up with mortar all cove, cap, nosing, trimmer, and moulded or shaped pieces and secure firmly in place.

09 30 13 Winchester Public School Childcare Renovation Ceramic Tiling MCA File No. 18044


.5 Fit tile around corners, fixtures, drains and other built-in objects. Maintain uniform joint appearance. Cut edges smooth, even, and free from chipping. Edges resulting from splitting are not acceptable. Rub exposed edges smooth with abrasive stone.

.6 Leave or cut opening to correct sizes to receive accessories, fittings, or other built-in work.

.7 Maximum finished surface tolerance shall be 1:800.

.8 Make joints between tile uniform, plumb, straight, true, even and flush with adjacent tile with a tolerance of 1mm per 3mm of joint width. Align patterns. Align joints of wall tile with floor tile.

.9 Lay out tiles so that fields are centred on areas, and according to the drawings with perimeter and cut tiles a minimum 1/2 size. Maintain height of panels in full courses to nearest indicated dimension.

.10 Keep 2/3 of the depth of grout joints free of setting material.

.11 Sound tiles after setting and replace hollow- sounding units to obtain full bond.

.12 Make internal angles square, external angles rounded.

.13 Use round edged tiles at termination of wall tile panels, except where panel abuts projecting surface or differing plane.

.14 Install transition strips at junction of tile flooring and dissimilar materials.

.15 Allow a minimum of 24 hours after installation of tiles before grouting. Grouting shall be in accordance with manufacturer=s directions. Fill joints solidly.

.16 Finished grout shall be uniform in colour, smooth and without voids, pinholes or low spots. Cover setting bed completely.

.17 Protect tiles from grout staining. Test in advance and pre-seal tile if required. Follow grout manufacturer=s recommendations for grout and residue removal. Remove excess grout and polish with clean cloths.

.18 Clean installed tile surfaces after installation and grouting has cured. Final cleaning is specified in Section 01 00 00 – General Requirements.

.19 Finished tile work shall be free of tiles which are pitted, chipped, cracked or scratched.

.20 Transition Strips: .1 Install specified transition strips where ceramic tile flooring meets dissimilar flooring. .2 Install transition strips in mortar, fully bonded to floors following the manufacturers=

recommendations. .3 Install strips under doors at openings. .4 Thoroughly back-up with mortar all hollow areas at underside of transition strips.

.21 Caulk around piping and fittings extending through tiled surfaces. Tool to a smooth, flush surface, free from air bubbles and contamination. Provide backer rod under sealant.

.22 Protect installed areas from traffic until setting materials have cured for the periods specified in the TTMAC Tile Installation Manual.

.23 Barricade grouted areas to prevent foot traffic for 24 hours after grouting.

.24 Apply floor sealer and protective coating in accordance with the manufacturer=s instructions.

3.03 TILE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE

.1 Masonry: Thin-set method. Install in accordance with TTMAC detail 303W-2016-2017, with latex-Portland cement mortar bond coat and latex-Portland cement unsanded grout.

.2 Concrete Floor Slabs: Thin-set method. Install in accordance with TTMAC detail 311F-2016-2017, Detail A, with latex-Portland cement mortar bond coat and latex-Portland cement sanded grout. Back butter tile and set on freshly notched thin-set mortar.

END OF SECTION

Winchester Public School Childcare Renovation 09 51 00 MCA File No. 18044 Acoustical Ceilings


PART 1 GENERAL


.1 Acoustical ceiling panels.

.2 Suspension systems and trim for acoustical ceilings.




.3 Division 23 – Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning (HVAC): Mechanical Ceiling Components.

.4 Division 26 - Electrical: Electrical Ceiling Components.

1.03 REFERENCES

.1 ASTM-C635/C635M-07, Standard Specification for the Manufacture, Performance, and Testing of Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay In Panel Ceilings.

.2 ASTM-C636/C636M-08, Standard Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay In Panels.

.3 CAN/CGSB-92.1-M89, Sound Absorptive Prefabricated Acoustical Units.


.5 CAN/ULC-S102-M88, Standard Method of Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials and Assemblies.

1.04 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

.1 Maximum Deflection: 1/360th of span to ASTM-C635/C635M deflection test.

.2 Installation Tolerances: to ASTM-C636/C636M.

1.05 SUBMITTALS


.2 Shop Drawings: .1 Submit Shop Drawings for the work of this section. .2 Shop Drawings shall indicate layout and details of acoustical ceilings including locations of

items which are to be coordinated with or supported by the ceilings. .3 Samples:

.1 Submit duplicate 300mm by 300mm samples of each type of acoustical unit.

.2 Submit one representative model of ceiling suspension system for approval.

.3 Ceiling system sample shall show basic construction and assembly, treatment at walls, recessed fixtures, splicing, interlocking, finishes, and acoustical unit installation.


.1 Permit wet work to dry before commencement of acoustical panel installation.

.2 Maintain uniform minimum temperature of 15C and humidity of 20 to 40% before and during installation.

.3 Deliver finish materials in unopened packaging provided by manufacturer.

.4 Store materials in work area 48 hours prior to installation, in protected dry areas.

1.07 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS

.1 Provide one sealed carton of acoustical panels for each pattern and type required for the Project.

.2 Extra materials shall be from the same production run as installed materials.

.3 Clearly identify each type of acoustical unit, including colour and texture.

.4 Store where directed by the Owner.

09 51 00 Winchester Public School Childcare Renovation Acoustical Ceilings MCA File No. 18044


1.08 WARRANTY

.1 Provide a warranty for acoustical ceilings in accordance with the General Conditions, but for a period of two years.

.2 The warranty shall cover the complete installation provided under this section against defective material and workmanship.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 ACOUSTICAL PANELS

.1 Acoustical Panels - Typical non-fire rated ceilings: to CAN/CGSB-92.1. .1 Type: Mineral composition acoustical units, sag resistant. .2 Pattern: non-directional fissured. .3 Flame spread rating of 25 or less. .4 Smoke developed class of 50 or less. .5 Noise reduction coefficient (NRC) designation of 0.55 minimum. .6 Ceiling Attenuation Class (CAC) designation of 30 minimum. .7 Light reflectance range of 0.80 and above. .8 Edge type: square. .9 Colour: white. .10 Size: 16 mm minimum thickness, 610mm by 1220mm. .11 Shape: flat. .12 Acceptable Products:

.1 Armstrong World Industries Canada Ltd.: Fine Fissured 1729.

.2 CertainTeed Ceilings: Vantage 10, VAN-197.

.3 CGC Interiors: Radar ClimaPlus 2410.

2.02 SUSPENSION SYSTEM

.1 Intermediate duty system to ASTM-C635.

.2 Basic Materials for Suspension System: commercial quality cold rolled steel zinc coated.

.3 Exposed Tee-bar Grid Components: white colour. Components die cut. Main tee, 43mm high, with double web, rectangular bulb and 25mm rolled cap on exposed face. Cross tee, 43mm high, with rectangular bulb; web extended to form positive interlock with main tee webs; lower flange extended and offset to provide flush intersection; wall moulding, 22mm wide by 22mm high, finished to match main tees and cross tees.

.4 Suspension System - Non-fire rated ceilings: .1 Two directional exposed tee-bar grid, double web. .2 Armstrong World Industries Canada Ltd.: Prelude ML Exposed Tee System. .3 Bailey Metal Products Limited: Lance-Lock System 900 (BEH). .4 CertainTeed Ceilings: Classic Hook System. .5 CGC Interiors: Donn DX Exposed Grid Suspension System. .6 Chicago Metallic Corporation: Series 1200 Suspension System.

2.03 ACCESSORIES

.1 Hanger Wire: galvanized soft annealed steel wire, 3.6mm minimum diameter.

.2 Hanger Inserts: purpose made.

.3 Carrying Channels: 1.2mm cold rolled galvanized steel channel, 38mm deep with 19mm flanges.

.4 Hanger Anchoring Devices: Philips Red Head by Philips Drill Company of Canada Limited. .1 T32, self-drilling for use in concrete deck. .2 WS-3822 wedge anchor with tie wire insert for use in composite concrete and steel deck.

Winchester Public School Childcare Renovation 09 51 00 MCA File No. 18044 Acoustical Ceilings


.5 Suspension System Accessories: splices, bull nose corner caps, hold down clips, wire ties, retainers and typical flush wall moulding, to complement suspension system components, as recommended by system manufacturer.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

.1 Do not install acoustical panels and tiles until work above ceiling has been inspected by the Consultant.

3.02 INSTALLATION - SUSPENSION SYSTEM

.1 Installation: in accordance with ASTM-C636 except where specified otherwise.

.2 Install suspension system to manufacturer's instructions and certification organization=s tested design requirements where referenced.

.3 Do not erect ceiling suspension system until work above ceiling has been inspected by the Consultant.

.4 Do not secure hangers to fluted steel floor. Secure hangers to overhead structure using attachment methods as required for particular structure and acceptable to the Consultant. Where structural spacing exceeds ceiling hanger spacing, provide double carrying channels nested and placed perpendicular to and on top of bottom flange of steel beams or on top of the lower chords of the open web steel joists, and secured to each joist with three loops of 1.2 mm galvanized soft steel wire.

.5 Where obstructions interfere with the placement of ceiling hangers, provide double carrying channels nested and hung from the structure above on both sides of the obstruction.

.6 Install hangers on main tees spaced at maximum 1200mm centres and within 150mm from ends of main tees and tee splices.

.7 Lay out with border units not less than 50% of standard unit width and according to reflected ceiling plans.

.8 Ensure suspension system is coordinated with location of related components.

.9 Install typical wall moulding to provide correct ceiling height.

.10 Completed suspension system shall support super-imposed loads, such as lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers and other ceiling mounted fixtures.

.11 Support at light fixtures and diffusers with additional ceiling suspension hangers within 150mm of each corner and at maximum 600mm around perimeter of fixture. Install an additional hanger immediately above each fastener for ceiling mounted curtain tracks.

.12 Interlock cross member to main runner to provide rigid assembly. Ensure all main tee splices and cross tee end clips are fully engaged.

.13 Frame at openings for light fixtures, air diffusers, speakers and at changes in ceiling heights.

.14 Finished ceiling system shall be square with adjoining walls and level within 6mm in 3000mm.

3.03 INSTALLATION - ACOUSTICAL PANELS

.1 Install acoustical panels and tiles in ceiling suspension system.

.2 Install acoustical units parallel to building lines with edge unit not less than 50% of unit width. Refer to Reflected Ceiling Plan.

.3 Scribe acoustic units accurately and neatly to fit adjacent work. Butt joints tight, terminate edges with moulding.

3.04 INTERFACE WITH OTHER WORK

.1 Co-ordinate ceiling work to accommodate components of other sections, to be built into acoustical ceiling components, such as light fixtures, diffusers, speakers and sprinkler heads.

.2 Neatly cut acoustical units to fit tightly around all building elements that penetrate ceiling.

09 51 00 Winchester Public School Childcare Renovation Acoustical Ceilings MCA File No. 18044


3.05 CLEANING

.1 Clean with non-solvent based commercial cleaners.

.2 Touch up minor scratches, abrasions, voids and other defects in painted surfaces as acceptable. Replace damaged sections when touch-up is not acceptable to the Consultant.

.3 Replace components which are visibly damaged, marred or not cleanable.

.4 Remove all excess material and debris when work of this section is completed.

END OF SECTION

Winchester Public School Childcare Renovation 09 65 19 MCA File No. 18044 Resilient Tile Flooring


PART 1 GENERAL


.1 Resilient tile flooring.

.2 Flooring preparation.



.2 Section 03 35 00 - Concrete Floor Finishing.

1.03 REFERENCES

.1 ASTM-F1066-04(2010)e1, Standard Specification for Vinyl Composition Floor Tile.

.2 ASTM-F1861-08(2012)e1, Standard Specification for Resilient Wall Base.

1.04 SAMPLES


.2 Submit duplicate full size tiles and 300mm long base as specified.

.3 Submit colour samples of flooring accessories for selection by the Consultant.

1.05 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

.1 Provide maintenance data for resilient flooring for incorporation into manual specified in Section 01 00 00 – General Requirements.

1.06 EXTRA MATERIALS

.1 Provide extra materials of resilient tile flooring and base in accordance with Section 01 00 00 – General Requirements.

.2 Provide one unopened box of flooring installed of each colour, pattern and type of flooring material required for this Project for maintenance use.

.3 Provide one 3600mm length of each type and colour of resilient base required for this Project for maintenance use.

.4 Extra materials shall be from same production run as installed materials.

.5 Clearly identify each container of floor tile and label each piece of resilient base.

.6 Store where directed by the Owner.


.1 Maintain air temperature, structural base temperature, and humidity control at flooring installation area above 20C for 48 hours before, during and for 48 hours after installation.

1.08 WARRANTY

.1 Submit the manufacturer=s warranty for the Products of this section in accordance with the General Conditions, but for a period of five years.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 FLOORING MATERIALS

.1 Vinyl Composition Tile (VCT): to ASTM-F1066, 3 mm thick, 300 mm by 300 mm size. Colour will be selected by the Consultant from the standard range. .1 Amtico: ColoursPlus, Fortress Elements. .2 Armstrong: Excelon, Imperial Texture. .3 Flextile: Flex-Thru Architectural Collection. .4 Johnsonite: Azrock VCT.

09 65 19 Winchester Public School Childcare Renovation Resilient Tile Flooring MCA File No. 18044


.5 Mannington Commercial: Essentials/Designer Essentials. .2 Resilient Base (RB): to ASTM-F1861, Type TS-vulcanized thermoset rubber, Group 1-solid, Style

coved, typical. Minimum 1200mm length and 100mm high by 3mm thick, with grooved back. Colour will be selected by the Consultant from the standard range. .1 Coved base:

.1 Johnsonite: Traditional Rubber Wall Base, DC.

.2 Mannington Commercial: Optimum Edge Coved Wall Base.

.3 Roppe Corporation: Pinnacle Rubber Standard Toe Base.

2.02 FLOORING ACCESSORIES

.1 Primers and Adhesives: .1 Primer: as recommended by flooring manufacturer for specific material on applicable

substrate, above, at or below grade. .2 Adhesive: Armstrong S-750 Premium Floor Tile Adhesive. Equivalent Products from Amtico,

Flextile, Johnsonite, or Mannington are also acceptable. Ensure flooring materials and adhesive are compatible.

.2 Sub-floor Filler and Leveler: as recommended by flooring manufacturer for use with their Product.

.3 Sealer: type recommended by flooring manufacturer, meeting the requirements of CAN/CGSB-25.20.

.4 Floor Protection: heavy kraft paper laminated with non-staining adhesive to both sides of glass fibre reinforcing ply.

.5 Resilient Transition Strips: Vinyl, in colours selected by the Consultant. .1 Vinyl Composition Tile to Vinyl Composition Tile:

.1 Johnsonite: FS-XX-DW2 Feature Strip.

.2 Roppe Corporation: No. 195 Feature Strip.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 SITE VERIFICATION OF CONDITIONS

.1 Ensure new concrete infill at service trenches are dry, by using test methods recommended by tile manufacturer.

.2 Check for dusting and other defects which may affect bonding of adhesive.

3.02 SUB-FLOOR TREATMENT

.1 Remove sub-floor ridges and bumps. Fill low spots, cracks, joints, holes and other defects with sub-floor filler.

.2 Clean floor thoroughly of any old adhesives, dirt, oil, grease and other material which may affect adhesive bonding and cause telegraphing. Apply filler; trowel and float to leave smooth, flat hard surface. Prohibit traffic until filler has cured and is dry.

.3 Prime concrete to flooring manufacturer's printed instructions.

.4 At junctions with adjacent thicker floor finishes, raise subfloor level under resilient tile by applying an appropriate cementitious sub-floor leveler and feathering out edges so that slopes do not exceed 1:150. Ensure finish floor surface is flush across such junctions.

3.03 TILE APPLICATION

.1 Use only adhesives recommended and approved by the flooring manufacturer.

.2 Apply adhesive uniformly using recommended trowel in accordance with flooring manufacturer's instructions. Do not spread more adhesive than can be covered by flooring before initial set takes place.

Winchester Public School Childcare Renovation 09 65 19 MCA File No. 18044 Resilient Tile Flooring


.3 Lay flooring with joints parallel to building lines to produce symmetrical tile pattern. Border tiles shall be a minimum half tile width.

.4 Install flooring to square grid pattern with all joints aligned with continuous joints flowing with direction of mottle, with pattern grain parallel for all units and parallel to width of room.

.5 As installation progresses, and after installation, roll flooring in 2 directions from centre area of work with 45 kg minimum three section roller to ensure full adhesion.

.6 Cut tile and fit neatly around fixed objects. Continue flooring over areas which will be under built-in furniture and fitments, without interrupting floor pattern.

.7 Install flooring in pan type floor access covers. Maintain floor pattern.

.8 Terminate flooring at centerline of door in openings where adjacent floor finish or colour is dissimilar.

.9 Coordinate installation of appropriate transition strips at junction with dissimilar floor materials with trades installing these materials and transition strips. Install resilient transition strips fully bonded to floors using manufacturer recommended adhesive.

.10 Install strips under doors at openings.

3.04 BASE APPLICATION

.1 Lay out base to keep the number of joints to a minimum. Base joints shall be at maximum length available or at internal or formed corners.

.2 Clean the substrate and prime with one coat of adhesive.

.3 Apply adhesive to back of base.

.4 Set base tightly against wall and floor surfaces and roll by using a 3 kg hand roller.

.5 Install straight and level to a variation tolerance of 1:1000.

.6 Scribe and fit to door frames and other obstructions. Use premoulded end pieces at flush door frames.

.7 Cut and miter internal corners. Wrap and scribe back of base according to approved fashion for right angle external corners, using a full bedding of adhesive. Use formed straight base material for external corners of other angles, minimum 300mm for each leg. Wrap around toeless base at external corners.

3.05 INITIAL CLEANING

.1 Remove excess adhesive from floor, base and wall surfaces without damage, as work progresses.

.2 Clean vinyl composition tile flooring and resilient base surface to flooring manufacturer's instructions immediately after installation.

.3 Final cleaning is specified in Section 01 74 00 - Cleaning.

.4 Sealing and waxing of new vinyl

3.06 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK

.1 Protect new floors from time of final set of adhesive until Project completion.

.2 Prohibit traffic on floor for 48 hours after installation.

.3 Protect floors by lapping joints of protection material a minimum of 150mm, sealing with non-asphaltic tape.

END OF SECTION

Winchester Public School Childcare Renovation 09 91 00 MCA File No. 18044 Painting


PART 1 GENERAL


.1 Painting and surface preparation for exterior and interior unfinished surfaces as scheduled.

.2 Field-painting and surface preparation of exposed mechanical and electrical piping, conduit, ductwork and equipment.

.3 Repainting and surface preparation at areas of remodeling.

.4 Provide labour, material, equipment and services necessary for completion of the above noted work.




.3 Section 08 11 00 - Steel Doors and Frames


1.03 REFERENCES

.1 The Master Painters Institute (MPI), Architectural Painting Specification Manual (APSM), latest edition.

.2 CAN/CGSB-85.10-99, Protective Coatings for Metals.

.3 CAN/CGSB-85.100-93, Painting.

1.04 SUBMITTALS


.2 Submit duplicate 200mm by 300mm sample colour cards of each paint finish and colour required, appropriately labelled with colour name, number, gloss/sheen, manufacturer, Project name, and Subcontractor name.

.3 Include specifications of materials, Products, and application procedures used to obtain finishes. Re-submit samples until acceptable to the Consultant.

.4 Colours shall match those specified in the Consultant=s colour schedule as identified by an acceptable paint manufacturer=s colour designation system.

.5 Retain samples at the Work site until completion of the Work.

.6 Two weeks before the commencement of painting and finishing, and prior to ordering materials, submit to the Consultant a complete paint finish schedule for approval. The schedule shall list the name of the paint manufacturer, the catalogue number, grade, and quality of the materials proposed for use, surfaces to be painted, room names and numbers, and colour chip sample.

.7 Submit two sets of Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) prior to commencement of work for review and for posting at the job site as required.

.8 Materials and Products delivered to the site shall comply with the approved paint finish schedule.

.9 Submit duplicate samples of each natural or stained finish.


.1 Preliminary Painting Meeting: .1 The Contractor shall arrange and convene a preliminary painting meeting one week prior

to the commencement of the work of this section under the provisions of Section 01 00 00 – General Requirements.

.2 The following parties shall be in attendance: the Contractor, the Owner=s representative, and the Consultant.

09 91 00 Winchester Public School Childcare Renovation Painting MCA File No. 18044


.3 The agenda shall include the review of substrates for acceptability, surface preparation, materials, conditions for paint application, paint application procedures, inspection procedures, and coordination with related work.

.2 Manufacturer=s Qualifications: The paint Products of the Paint Manufacturer shall be as listed in Chapter 5 - Approved Products List of the MPI Manual.

.3 Applicator=s Qualifications: .1 The painting Subcontractor shall have a minimum of ten years proven satisfactory

experience. .2 A crew of painters shall be maintained throughout the duration of the work who shall be

qualified to fully satisfy the requirements of this Specification. .4 Comply with requirements of the MPI Manual and CAN/CGSB-85.100, except where greater

requirements are specified.

1.06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

.1 Conform to the latest edition of Industrial Health and Safety Regulations issued by authorities having jurisdiction in regard to site safety, including, but not limited to, ladders, scaffolding, and ventilation.

.2 Conform to requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction in regard to the storage, mixing, application, and disposal of all paint and related waste materials.


.1 Paint materials shall be delivered to the job site in original sealed and labeled containers bearing the manufacturer=s name, type of paint, brand name, colour designation, and instructions for mixing and reducing, and application requirements.

.2 Store materials in original labeled containers in a secure area as directed by the Contractor. Paint materials shall be stored at a minimum ambient temperature of 7C, in a well-ventilated and heated, single designated area. Keep storage area clean and tidy.

.3 Take all necessary precautionary and safety measures to prevent fire hazards and spontaneous combustion. Provide appropriate fire extinguishers in storage area.

.4 Take appropriate precautions, including no smoking restrictions, where toxic and explosive solvents are used.

1.08 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL

.1 Provide a minimum of one (1) full 4 litre can of each type and colour of paint required for the Project for maintenance use. Store where directed.

.2 Maintenance material shall be of same production run as the installed material.


.1 Do not apply paint finish in areas where dust is being generated.

.2 Temperature: .1 No painting shall be performed when surface and ambient temperatures are below 5C.

.3 Relative humidity shall not be higher than 85%.

.4 Moisture Content of Surfaces: .1 Tests shall be by electronic moisture meter. .2 Gypsum Board: Maximum moisture content of 12%. .3 Concrete and Concrete Masonry Units: Maximum moisture content of 12% for solvent type

paint. Concrete and masonry walls must be installed at least 28 days and must be visually dry on both sides before painting commences.

.4 Wood: Maximum moisture content of 15%. .5 Lighting: Painting shall not proceed unless the permanent lighting is in place and operational or

a minimum of 161 lm/m5 lighting is provided on the surfaces to be painted.



.6 Ventilation: In areas where painting is proceeding provide adequate continuous ventilation and heating to maintain temperatures above 7C for 24 hours before, during and 24 hours after paint application.

.7 Avoid applying paint to surfaces when exposed to direct sunlight.

1.10 WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL

.1 Remove and dispose of excess material and waste resulting from the work of this section.

.2 All excess materials and empty containers shall be removed from the site and disposed of or recycled in accordance with local regulations.

.3 Obtain information regarding applicable Provincial and local government regulations for disposal of paint, stain, wood preservative finishes, and related thinners and solvents.

.4 All waste materials shall be separated and recycled. Collect waste paint by type and provide for delivery to recycling or collection facility. Materials that cannot be reused shall be treated as hazardous waste and disposed of in an appropriate manner.

.5 Place materials defined as hazardous or toxic waste, including used sealant and adhesive tubes and containers, in containers or areas designated for hazardous waste.

.6 Cleaning and Disposal Procedures: .1 Retain cleaning water for water-based materials to allow sediments to be filtered out. In

no case shall equipment be cleaned using free draining water. .2 Retain cleaners, thinners, solvents, and excess paint and place in designated containers

and ensure proper disposal. .3 Return solvent and oil soaked rags used during painting operations for contaminant

recovery, proper disposal, or appropriate cleaning and laundering. .4 Dispose of contaminants in an approved legal manner in accordance with hazardous waste

regulations. .5 Ensure empty paint cans are dry prior to disposal or recycling. .6 Close and seal tightly partly used cans of materials including sealant and adhesive

containers and store protected in well ventilated fire-safe area at moderate temperature. .7 Set aside and protect surplus and uncontaminated finish materials not required by the Owner

and deliver or arrange collection for verifiable re-use or re-manufacturing.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

.1 Acceptable Products: paint Products shall be of a type and brand herein specified and listed under Chapter 5 - Approved Products List of the MPI Manual and selected from the Products supplied by one of the following manufacturers: .1 Benjamin Moore and Co. .2 PPG Architectural Coatings Inc. .3 The Sherwin-Williams Company.

.2 Paint materials for each coating formula shall be Products of a single manufacturer.

.3 Paint materials not specifically mentioned herein, but required for first class work with the finish specified, shall be the highest quality product of an approved MPI listed manufacturer. All coating materials shall be compatible.

.4 All materials used shall be lead and mercury free and shall have low VOC content where possible.

.5 Gloss terms shall have values defined in the MPI Manual. Refer to article below.

.6 Bonding Primer: waterborne acrylic primer, low VOC. .1 Benjamin Moore and Co.: Insl-X Stix Waterborne Bonding Primer SXA-110. .2 PPG Architectural Coatings Inc.: Dulux Gripper Universal Acrylic Primer-Sealer. .3 The Sherwin-Williams Company: Extreme Bond Interior/Exterior Primer.



.7 Interior Colours: .1 Allow for six (6) paint colours.

2.02 MIXING AND TINTING

.1 Paints shall be ready-mixed and pre-tinted unless otherwise specified.

.2 Re-mix all paint in containers prior to and during application to ensure complete dispersion of settled pigment, and colour and gloss uniformity.

.3 Paints shall have good flowing and brushing properties and shall dry or cure free of sags to yield the desired finish specified.

2.03 GLOSS / SHEEN RATINGS

.1 Paint gloss shall be defined as the sheen rating of applied paint, in accordance with the following MPI values:

Gloss Level Description Units @ 60 Units @ 85 G1 Matte or Flat Finish 0 to 5 10 max

G2 Velvet Finish 0 to 10 10 to 35

G3 Eggshell Finish 10 to 25 10 to 35

G4 Satin Finish 20 to 35 35 min

G5 Semi-Gloss Finish 35 to 70 --

G6 Gloss Finish 70 to 85 --

G7 High-Gloss Finish >85 --

.2 Gloss level ratings of painted surfaces shall be as specified herein.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

.1 Thoroughly examine all surfaces scheduled to be painted prior to commencement of the work of this section.

.2 Report in writing to the Contractor and the Consultant any condition adversely affecting this work.

.3 Do not proceed with painting work until defects have been corrected and surfaces are acceptable to the Painting Subcontractor.

.4 Commencement of work shall be held to imply acceptance of surfaces.

3.02 PREPARATION AND PROTECTION

.1 Prepare all surfaces in accordance with MPI requirements. Refer to MPI Painting manual in regard to specific requirements.

.2 Cleaning: .1 Vacuum clean all interior areas and surfaces immediately prior to commencing finishing

work. .2 Ensure surfaces to receive paint finish are free of machine, tool or sandpaper marks, oil,

grease, dirt or other substances which may impair finishing work, appearance or adhesion of paint.

.3 Remove rust from damaged surfaces primed by other Sections. Re-prime as required, using same primer material.



.3 Mildew Removal: .1 Scrub the affected areas with a solution of 150 grams of tri-sodium phosphate (TSP) and

125 grams of bleach per 32 litres of water. .2 Rinse well with clear water and allow surface to dry completely before proceeding with

further surface preparation or painting. .4 Existing Painted Surfaces:

.1 Prepare existing surfaces to be repainted in accordance with CAN/CGSB-85.100.

.2 Remove any finish that is incompletely bonded to substrate.

.3 Smooth uneven or rough surfaces.

.4 Roughen high gloss or very smooth finished surfaces to ensure adhesion of new coatings.

.5 Apply an acrylic bonding primer on existing painted surfaces that have been previously coated with alkyd or oil-based materials. Once bonding primer is dry inspect to ensure proper adhesion. Do not proceed with new finish coats until bonding primer has been inspected.

.6 Reprime areas bared to substrate by preparation. .5 Provide adequate protection from paint and damage for other surfaces. Make good damage

caused by failure to provide suitable protection. .6 Furnish sufficient drop cloths, shields and protective equipment to prevent spray or dropping

from fouling surfaces not being painted and in particular, surfaces within the storage and preparation area.

.7 Removal of Flammable Rubbish: Cotton waste, cloths, and material which may constitute a fire hazard shall be placed in closed metal containers containing water and shall be removed daily from the site.

.8 Removal of Hardware: .1 Remove all electrical plates, surface hardware, canopies of lighting fixtures, fittings, and

fastenings prior to painting operations. .2 Items removed shall be securely stored, cleaned, and replaced on completion of work in

each area. .3 Do not use solvents that may damage finish to clean hardware.

.9 Confirm preparation and primer used with fabricator of steel items.

3.03 APPLICATION–GENERAL

.1 Perform Work of this Section under the supervision of an experienced foreman.

.2 Paint application shall be generally by the accepted trade method.

.3 Each coat of paint shall be slightly darker than the preceding coat unless otherwise approved.

.4 Paint behind surface mounted fixtures and fitments on walls and ceilings with full coats of paint.

3.04 APPLICATION–PRIMERS

.1 Apply one coat of primer to exposed ferrous metal surfaces including exposed mechanical and electrical equipment, piping, ducts, and conduit that have not received a shop coat of primer.

.2 Touch up shop primed metal work after loose paint, rust, and scale have been removed.

.3 Re-seal all cut edges of wood to be painted or finished if the material was cut subsequent to initial sealing.

.4 Apply wood primer or undercoat by brush and work thoroughly into the wood grain, cracks, splits, and recessed nail heads. Spread prime coats evenly and completely to ensure good bond of succeeding coats of paint.

.5 Priming and Back-Priming: .1 Interior woodwork which is to receive a paint or enamel finish shall be back-primed upon

arrival at the site with enamel undercoating paint.



3.05 APPLICATION–FINISH COATS

.1 Conform to Requirements of the MPI Painting Manual, latest edition, for generally accepted trade methods of application.

.2 Mix materials thoroughly before application, apply evenly under adequate illumination and free from sags, runs, crawls and other defects. Do cutting in neatly.

.3 Apply coats of the proper consistency as received from the container, and brush well showing a minimum of brush strokes.

.4 Sand and dust between each coat to remove defects visible from a distance up to 1.5m, and to provide anchor for successive coats.

.5 Permit paint to dry thoroughly between coats. Apply each coat at proper consistency. Each coat of finish shall be dry and hard before the next coat is applied. Ensure that the number of coats required has been applied.

.6 Apply filler to open grain woods. Tint filler to match wood when clear finishes are specified. Work filler well into the grain and wipe excess from the surface before it sets.

.7 When the primer-sealer coat is dry, touch up all visible suction spots before the next coat is applied and do not proceed with the work until all suction spots are sealed.

.8 Finish work uniformly as to sheen, gloss, colour, and texture. Touch up suction or Ahot spots@ in surfaces after first coat.

.9 Apply materials in accordance with the directions and instructions of the manufacturers of the various materials. Do not use adulterants.

.10 Finish closets, alcoves, and other areas not specifically identified as specified for adjoining surfaces of rooms unless otherwise indicated. Paint unexposed surfaces, that will be hidden in the finished work by built-in furniture or fitments, to match adjacent exposed painted surfaces. Finish all other surfaces the same as the nearest or adjoining surfaces unless otherwise specified or indicated.

.11 Grilles and perforated items required to be painted shall be sprayed.

.12 Repaint the entire plane of areas showing incomplete coverage. Touch-ups are not acceptable.

.13 Do not paint over fire protection rating labels on door frames nor over identification labels on mechanical and electrical equipment.

.14 Paint removable and operable items, such as access panels, doors, grilles and similar items, while the item is removed, or the door open so as not to create a paint seal at the juncture of the opening or removable item and its fixed frame or substrate.

.15 Existing Surfaces: .1 On existing painted surfaces apply the two final finish coats as specified in the Painting

Schedule below. .2 On surfaces with acrylic bonding primer ensure primer is well bonded prior to proceeding

with finish coats .3 Primer coat is required on surfaces bared by preparation. .4 Repaint existing surfaces and finishes where shown on Room Finish Schedule where

alterations or renovations have been carried out, and where finished surfaces have been disturbed by the alterations or renovations.

.5 Repaint surfaces entirely between changes of plane. .16 Final finishes shall provide uniform colour and sheen across the full surface area.

3.06 APPLICATION–MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT

.1 Paint exposed conduits, ducts, pipes, hangers and other mechanical and electrical equipment occurring in finished areas as well as inside cupboards and cabinet work. Colour and texture shall match adjacent surfaces, except as noted otherwise. Co-ordinate with mechanical trades applying banding and labeling after pipes have been painted.

.2 Paint disconnect switches for fire alarm system and exit light systems in red enamel.

.3 Paint gas piping "gas standard yellow" where visible in service spaces.



.4 Keep fire detection equipment, and smoke detection equipment free of paint.

.5 Paint surfaces inside of ductwork and elsewhere behind grilles where visible using primer and one coat of matte black paint.

.6 Paint both sides and edges of plywood backboards for equipment before installation.

.7 Leave equipment in original finish except for touch-up as required, and paint conduits, mounting accessories and other unfinished items.

.8 Leave name plates unpainted.

3.07 CLEANING

.1 Promptly as the work proceeds and on completion of the work, remove all paint where spilled, splashed or spattered using means and materials that are not detrimental to affected surfaces.

.2 During the progress of the work keep the premises free from any unnecessary accumulation of tools, equipment, surplus materials and debris.

.3 At the conclusion of the work leave the premises neat and clean to the satisfaction of the Consultant and the Contractor.

3.08 PAINTING SCHEDULE

.1 General: .1 Paint system references listed, unless indicated otherwise, are based on Chapters 2 and 3

of the MPI Manual. .2 Paint systems are Premium Grade unless noted otherwise. .3 Use low odour, low VOC products wherever possible.

.2 Interior Finishes - MPI Manual Chapter 3: .1 Concrete Masonry Units: INT 4.2A Latex (over latex block filler), Gloss Level G5

(Semi-Gloss) finish. Use 2 coats of block filler on lightweight concrete block surfaces. .2 Gypsum Board (Walls): INT 9.2B High Performance Architectural Latex (over latex primer

sealer), Gloss Level G5 (Semi-Gloss) finish. [Double prime fiberglass faced gypsum board.] .3 Painted Woodwork: INT 6.3A High Performance Architectural Latex (over latex primer

sealer), Gloss Level G5 (Semi-Gloss) finish. .4 Clear Finish Woodwork: INT 6.3K, Polyurethane Varnish, Gloss Level G4 (Satin) finish. .5 Ferrous Metal: INT 5.1L Epoxy (over epoxy primer) finish. .6 Zinc-Coated Metal: INT 5.3M, High Performance Architectural Latex (over water based

galvanized primer), Gloss Level G5 (Semi-Gloss) finish.

3.09 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL / STANDARD OF ACCEPTANCE

.1 All surfaces, preparation, and paint applications shall be inspected.

.2 Painted surfaces shall be considered to lack uniformity and soundness if any of the following defects are apparent to the Consultant: .1 brush and roller marks, streaks, laps, runs, sags, drips, heavy stippling, hiding or shadowing

by inefficient application methods, skipped or missed areas, and foreign materials in paint coatings;

.2 evidence of poor coverage at rivet heads, plate edges, lap joints, crevices, pockets, corners and re-entrant angles;

.3 damage due to touching before paint is sufficiently dry or any other contributory causes;

.4 damage to application on moist surfaces or caused by inadequate protection from the weather;

.5 damage or contamination of paint due to blown contaminants; .3 Painted surfaces shall be considered unacceptable if any of the following are evident under

natural lighting source for exterior surfaces and final lighting source (including daylight): .1 visible defects are evident on vertical surfaces when viewed at normal viewing angles from

a distance of 1000mm;



.2 visible defects are evident on horizontal surfaces when viewed at normal viewing angles from a distance of 1000mm;

.3 visible defects are evident on ceiling, soffit, and other overhead surfaces when viewed at normal viewing angles;

.4 when the final coat on any surface exhibits a lack of uniformity of colour, sheen, texture, and hiding across full surface area.

.4 Painted surfaces rejected by the Consultant shall be made good at the expense of the Painting Subcontractor. Small affected areas may be touched up; large affected areas without sufficient dry film thickness of paint shall be repainted. Runs, sags, or damaged paint shall be removed by scraper or by sanding prior to application of paint.

END OF SECTION

Winchester Public School Childcare Renovation 10 11 15 MCA File No. 18044 Markerboards


PART 1 GENERAL


.1 Markerboards.

.2 Trim and Accessories




.3 Section 10 11 20 - Tackboards.

1.03 REFERENCES

.1 AAMA-611-14, Voluntary Specification for Anodized Architectural Aluminum.

.2 ASTM-A653/A653M-11, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.

.3 ASTM-A924/A924M-10, Standard Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Metallic-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process.

.4 CAN/ULC-S706-09, Standard for Wood Fibre Insulating Boards for Buildings.

1.04 SHOP DRAWINGS


.2 Indicate location, type, size, panel arrangement, backing, hardware, anchor or mounting details, frame or trim and accessories.

1.05 SAMPLES


.2 Submit duplicate 300mm by 300mm sample of each type of markerboard, and a 150mm long sample of each type of trim.


.1 Provide operation and maintenance data for incorporation into the manual specified in Section 01 00 00 – General Requirements.

.2 Affix removable maintenance instruction labels markerboards.

1.07 WARRANTY

.1 Submit a warranty for markerboard writing surfaces in accordance with the General Conditions but for a period of 10 years.

.2 The warranty shall cover defects other than those due to normal wear and usage, and shall include fading, crazing, peeling, chipping and the surface becoming slick, glassy or otherwise unsuitable for use.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

.1 Base Bid: Architectural School Products. (ASP)

.2 Alternates: Refer to Section 01 23 00 - Alternates. .1 Delta Products Ltd. (DPL). .2 Global School Products (GSP). .3 Martack Specialties Ltd. (MSL).

2.02 MATERIALS

.1 Laminating Adhesive: to manufacturer=s standards.

10 11 15 Winchester Public School Childcare Renovation Markerboards MCA File No. 18044


.2 Joint Reinforcement: concealed mechanical jointing system to provide straight, rigid, continuously supported, tight butt, flush joints at surface.

.3 Anchor Clips, Brackets and Fasteners: concealed type for fixed mounting.

.4 Facings: .1 Steel sheet: 0.7 mm thickness, commercial quality to ASTM-A653/A653M, pre-cleaned and

treated to ensure maximum adhesion of an acid resistant type A (for Markerboard) porcelain enamel.

.2 Core: Fibreboard, to CAN/CSA A247, 11 mm thick, impregnated type.

.3 Backing: Galvanized, 0.4 mm thick steel, with Z275 zinc coating to ASTM-A924/A924M.

2.03 MANUFACTURED UNITS AND COMPONENTS

.1 The components listed below are selected from the Product line of Architectural School Products (ASP). Equivalent components supplied by the other companies listed in article 2.01 above are also acceptable.

.2 Markerboards: ASP, Vit-Rite White Porcelain Enamel Markerboard.

.3 Maprail: ASP, No. 206, across entire width of markerboards.

.4 Marker Tray: ASP, No. 212.

.5 Extruded Aluminum: Aluminum Association alloy AA6063-T5. Minimum 1.5 mm thick.

.6 Perimeter Trim: ASP, No. 205.

.7 Divider/Joiner Trim: ASP, No. 207.

.8 Concealed Mechanical Joining System: Integral, slotted PVC insert laminated into ends of panels and 25mm wide, 2mm thick galvanized steel spline.

2.04 ACCESSORIES

.1 Manufacturer=s standard accessories.

.2 Roller Map Hooks: two for each 1830 mm length of maprail.

.3 End Stops: At each end of maprail.

.4 End Closures: At each end of marker tray.

.5 Cork Insert: Natural grain cork, continuous at maprail.

2.05 FABRICATION

.1 Fabricate markerboard panels to sizes indicated.

.2 Factory laminate markerboards, consisting of 0.7mm thick facing sheet with 11mm core and 0.4mm thick backing sheet. Adhesive shall be in accordance with manufacturer=s recommendations.

.3 Make finished panels flat and rigid and fit with joint reinforcement.

.4 Fit joints between abutting panels with joint reinforcement except where covering trim is required.

.5 Install trim on panels in factory. Make mitres and joints to hair-line fit, free of rough edges. Use concealed brackets to reinforce and hold joints tight and flush. No exposed fasteners are permitted.

.6 Overlap trim 6 mm onto panels. Provide closed ends for marker trays and open-end extrusions.

.7 Factory fit assemblies too large for shipment to site in one piece, disassemble for delivery and site assemble.

2.06 FINISHES

.1 Porcelain Enamel: To Porcelain Enamel Institute Standards PEI S104 with regards to durability, smoothness of texture, colour continuity. Gloss factor of 6-8 as measured by 45 degree glossometer: .1 Surface finish for dry erasable markers and suitable for use as a projection screen: white

colour.

Winchester Public School Childcare Renovation 10 11 15 MCA File No. 18044 Markerboards


.2 Aluminum Trim Finishes: Finish exposed surfaces of aluminum components in accordance with AAMA-611, clear satin anodic finish, AA-A41.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

.1 Installation of materials shall not commence until overhead work such as mechanical, electrical, ceiling and painting is completed.

.2 Millwork that co-ordinates with markerboards shall be in place before material is installed.

.3 Install markerboards in accordance with manufacturer=s instructions, parallel to floor with uniform vertical surface, plumb and level, to provide rigid, secure writing surface.

.4 Joints in adjoining markerboards shall be tight, hairline, butt joints properly aligned by means of continuous steel splines, let into slotted PVC inserts.

.5 Mechanical Attachment: .1 To concrete or solid masonry use lag screw and expansion bolts or screws and fibre plugs

as appropriate for stresses involved. .2 To hollow masonry use toggle bolts or equivalent.

3.02 CLEANING

.1 Clean surfaces after installation using manufacturer=s recommended cleaning procedures.

END OF SECTION

Winchester Public School Childcare Renovation 10 11 20 MCA File No. 18044 Tackboards


PART 1 GENERAL


.1 Tackboards.

.2 Trim and Accessories




.3 Section 10 11 15 - Markerboards.

1.03 REFERENCES

.1 AAMA-611-14, Voluntary Specification for Anodized Architectural Aluminum.

.2 CAN3-O188.1-M78, Interior Mat-Formed Wood Particleboard.

.3 CAN/ULC-S102-10, Standard Method of Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials and Assemblies.

1.04 SHOP DRAWINGS


.2 Indicate location, type, size, panel arrangement, backing, hardware, anchor or mounting details, frame or trim and accessories.

1.05 SAMPLES


.2 Submit duplicate 300mm by 300mm sample of tackboard and a 150mm long sample of each type of trim.

1.06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

.1 Surface burning characteristics of materials: listed and labeled by an organization accredited by the Standards Council of Canada.

PART 2 PRODUCTS


.1 Architectural School Products (ASP).

.2 Delta Products Ltd. (DPL).

.3 Global School Products (GSP).

.4 Martack Specialties Ltd. (MSL).

2.02 MATERIALS

.1 Laminating Adhesive: to manufacturer's standards.

.2 Joint Reinforcement: concealed mechanical jointing system to provide straight, rigid, continuously supported, tight butt, flush joints at surface.

.3 Anchor Clips, Brackets and Fasteners: concealed type for fixed mounting.

.4 Natural cork tackboards: single layer natural cork, fine grain large granular sheet, 6 mm thick, natural colour, laminated to backing as specified below. Classified as to surface burning characteristics in accordance with CAN/ULC-S102, flame spread 55, smoke developed 55-70, fuel contributed 20

.5 Backing: Particleboard: to CAN3-O188.1, Grade R, 6mm thick.

10 11 20 Winchester Public School Childcare Renovation Tackboards MCA File No. 18044


2.03 COMPONENTS

.1 The components listed below are selected from the Product line of Architectural School Products (ASP). Equivalent components supplied by the other companies listed in article 2.01 above are also acceptable.

.2 Extruded Aluminum: Aluminum Association alloy AA6063-T5. Minimum 1.5mm wall thickness.

.3 Perimeter Trim: ASP: No. 205.

.4 Divider/Joiner Trim: ASP: No. 207.

.5 Tack Strips: ASP, No. 74 Maprail.

2.04 FABRICATION

.1 Fabricate tackboard panels to sizes indicated.

.2 Factory laminate tackboards, consisting of 6 mm cork sheet, with backing.

.3 Install trim on panels in factory. Make mitres and joints to hair-line fit, free of rough edges with concealed brackets to reinforce and hold joints tight and flush. No exposed fasteners are permitted.

.4 Overlap trim 6mm onto panels. Provide closed ends for open-end extrusions.

.5 Factory fit assemblies too large for shipment to site in one piece, disassemble for delivery and site assemble.

2.05 FINISHES

.1 Aluminum Trim Finishes: Finish exposed surfaces of aluminum components in accordance with AAMA-611, clear satin anodic finish, AA-A41.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

.1 Installation of materials shall not commence until overhead work such as mechanical, electrical, ceiling and painting is completed.

.2 Install tackboards in accordance with the manufacturer=s instructions, parallel to floor with uniform vertical surface, plumb and level, to provide rigid, secure surface.

.3 Mechanical attachment (typical unless indicated otherwise): .1 To concrete or solid masonry use lag screw and expansion bolts or screws and fibre plugs

as appropriate for stresses involved. .2 To hollow masonry use toggle bolts or equivalent. .3 To metal studs use screws. Secure into framing members built-in to stud partitions.

3.02 CLEANING

.1 Clean surfaces after installation using manufacturer=s recommended cleaning procedures.

END OF SECTION

Winchester Public School Childcare Renovation 10 28 13 MCA File No. 18044 Washroom Accessories


PART 1 GENERAL


.1 Washroom accessories.

.2 Metal-framed washroom mirrors.

.3 Miscellaneous accessories.



.2 Section 09 22 16 - Non-Structural Metal Framing: Installation of steel back plates for grab bar mounting.

1.03 REFERENCES

.1 ASTM-A167-96, Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip.

.2 ASTM-A653/A653M-11, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.

.3 ASTM-A924/A924M-10a, Standard Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Metallic-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process.

.4 ASTM-B456-95, Standard Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Copper Plus Nickel Plus Chromium and Nickel Plus Chromium.

.5 CAN/CGSB-1.81-M90, Air Drying and Baking Alkyd Primer for Vehicles and Equipment.

.6 CAN/CGSB-1.88-92, Gloss Alkyd Enamel, Air Drying and Baking.

.7 CAN/CGSB-12.5-M86, Mirrors, Silvered.

.8 CGSB 31-GP-107Ma-90, Non-Inhibited Phosphoric Acid Base Metal Conditioner and Rust Remover.


1.04 SHOP DRAWINGS


.2 Submit a washroom accessories schedule indicating all accessories to be provided on a room by room basis.

.3 Indicate quantity, manufacturer, model numbers, size and description of components, base material, surface finish inside and out, hardware and locks, attachment devices, description of rough-in-frame and building-in details of anchors for grab bars.


.1 Provide operation and maintenance data for washroom accessories for incorporation into manual specified in Section 01 00 00 – General Requirements.

1.06 EXTRA MATERIALS

.1 Provide special tools and keys required for accessing, assembly and disassembly or removal for washroom accessories in accordance with requirements specified in Section 01 00 00 – General Requirements.

.2 Deliver special tools and keys to the Owner=s representative.

1.07 WARRANTY

.1 Provide a warranty for washroom mirrors in accordance with the General Conditions, but for a period of five years.

.2 The warranty shall cover the replacement of the mirror should defects in silvering occur during the warranty period.

10 28 13 Winchester Public School Childcare Renovation Washroom Accessories MCA File No. 18044


PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

.1 Sheet Steel: commercial quality, hot dip coating to ASTM-A924/A924M, coating designation ZF75 in accordance with ASTM-A653/A653M..

.2 Stainless Steel Sheet Metal: to ASTM-A167, Type 304, with satin finish.

.3 Stainless Steel Tubing: Type 304, commercial grade, seamless welded, 1.2mm wall thickness, satin finish.

.4 Fasteners: concealed screws and bolts hot dip galvanized, exposed fasteners shall match face of unit. Expansion shields of fibre, lead or rubber at solid walls and toggle bolts at hollow walls as recommended by accessory manufacturer for the component and its intended use.

2.02 WASHROOM ACCESSORIES

.1 Acceptable Manufacturers: .1 ASI Group Canada (A). .2 Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. (B).

.2 Toilet Tissue Dispenser: S.B.O.

.3 Surface-Mounted Paper Towel Dispenser: 0.7mm stainless steel with satin finish, complete with tumbler lock. Provide adapters as required for paper towel roll operation. .1 Acceptable Products: A-0245-SS or B-263.

.4 Soap Dispenser: S.B.O.

2.03 METAL FRAMED WASHROOM MIRRORS

.1 Acceptable Manufacturers: .1 ASI Group Canada. (A). .2 Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. (B).

.2 Fixed Framed Mirrors - Type 1: 610mm by 1220mm by 6mm thick tempered glass mirror and one-piece stainless steel channel frame with 90 mitred corners, with concealed fasteners and locking screws. .1 Acceptable Products: A-0600-B2448 or B-1658 2448.

2.04 FABRICATION

.1 Weld and grind joints of fabricated components flush and smooth. Use mechanical fasteners only where approved.

.2 Wherever possible form exposed surfaces from one sheet of stock, free of joints.

.3 Brake form sheet metal work with 1.5mm radius bends.

.4 Form surfaces flat without distortion. Maintain flat surfaces without scratches or dents.

.5 Back paint components where contact is made with building finishes to prevent electrolysis.

.6 Hot dip galvanize concealed ferrous metal anchors and fastening devices to CAN/CSA-G164.

.7 Shop assemble components and package complete with anchors and fittings.

.8 Deliver inserts and rough-in frames to job site at appropriate time for building-in. Provide templates, details and instructions for building in anchors and inserts.

.9 Provide steel anchor plates and components for installation on studding and building framing.

2.05 FINISHES

.1 Chrome and Nickel Plating: to ASTM-B456, polished finish.

.2 Baked Enamel: condition metal by applying one coat of metal conditioner to CGSB- 31-GP-107Ma, apply one coat Type 2 primer to CAN/CGSB-1.81 and bake, apply two coats Type

Winchester Public School Childcare Renovation 10 28 13 MCA File No. 18044 Washroom Accessories


2 enamel to CAN/CGSB-1.88 and bake to hard, durable finish. Sand between final coats. Colour selected from standard range by the Consultant.

.3 Manufacturer's or brand names on face of units are not acceptable.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

.1 Install and secure accessories rigidly in place as follows: .1 Hollow masonry units or existing plaster or drywall: use toggle bolts drilled into cell/wall

cavity. .2 Solid masonry or concrete: use bolt with lead expansion sleeve set into drilled hole.

.2 Use tamper-proof screws and bolts for fasteners.

.3 Fill units with necessary supplies shortly before final acceptance of building.

.4 Install mirrors in locations indicated using concealed fasteners.

3.02 SCHEDULE

.1 Locate accessories where indicated on Drawings. Exact locations will be determined by the Consultant.

END OF SECTION

Winchester Public School Childcare Renovation 10 57 13 MCA File No. 18044 Coat Hooks and Hat Racks


PART 1 GENERAL


.1 Removal, re-installation and modifications to existing hat rack shelf and coat hooks.



1.03 SUBMITTALS


.2 Shop Drawings: .1 Submit Shop Drawings or Product data sheets. .2 Indicate materials, thicknesses, sizes and dimensions, finishes, colours, construction

details, and mounting methods.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS/SUPPLIERS

.1 Coat and Hat Racks with Hooks: .1 Architectural School Products Ltd.: Model STL 1001. .2 Global School Products Inc.: Model SCR 1000.

2.02 COMPONENTS

.1 Additional Shelf: Four-20mm square steel tubes, baked enamel finish. Colour to match existing.

.2 Additional Mounting Brackets: cast aluminum brackets complete with extruded aluminium dovetail standards, baked enamel finish, colour to match existing.

.3 Additional Coat Hooks: double prong, ABS plastic, colour to match existing.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

.1 Remove existing hat rack/coat hooks as indicated on the drawings and store on site for re-use.

.2 Install/relocate mounting brackets and provide new mounting brackets as required.

.3 Cut back/modify tubular steel shelf rails as required to suit new coat and hat rack layout. Provide additional new tubular rails as required. File any cut ends to remove burrs or sharp edges. Provide new end caps.

.4 Adjust positioning of existing hooks and provide new hooks as required.

3.02 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

.1 Refinish damaged surfaces so that completed installation presents a consistent appearance with no visible defects.

.2 Clean and polish all exposed surfaces. Exercise care to avoid damage to coatings.

END OF SECTION

Winchester Public School Childcare Renovation 12 24 13 MCA File No. 18044 Window Shades


PART 1 GENERAL


.1 Manual window shades and shade accessories.

.2 Supply and installation of window shades is under the Cash Allowance specified in Section 01 00 00 General Requirements



.2 Section 08 51 13 - Aluminum Windows.

1.03 REFERENCES

.1 CAN/ULC-S109-03, Standard for Flame Tests of Flame-Resistant Fabrics and Films.

1.04 SAMPLES


.2 Submit samples of shade fabric for selection by the Consultant.

.3 Submit duplicate 300mm by 300mm samples of selected shade fabric for approval by the Consultant.

1.05 SHOP DRAWINGS


.2 Indicate finishes, dimensions, operator details, anchorage details, and hardware and accessories details.

1.06 TEST REPORTS

.1 Submit test reports affirming that the shading fabric conforms to flame retardance criteria as tested in accordance with CAN/ULC-S109.

1.07 WARRANTY

.1 Provide a warranty for window shades in conformance with the General Conditions, but for a period of five years.

.2 The warranty shall cover the complete installation against defective materials and workmanship.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS AND FABRICATION

.1 Manual Window Shading System: Chain and sprocket roller shade system. .1 Where blackout shades are indicated on the Drawings, the system below shall be modified

to accommodate a dual shade system. .2 Operation: Chain operated with infinite positioning. Left or right hand operation as

required. .3 Mounting Type: Face of mullions. .4 End Brackets: 77mm by 96mm, two piece moulded ABS with 64mm diameter nylon drive

sprocket. .5 Shade Tube: Extruded aluminum, 1.52mm thick with internal continuous fins for strength

and drive capabilities when attached to the nylon sprocket. .6 Fascia: Extruded 6063-T5 aluminum with clear anodized finish. Fascia shall be complete

with extruded aluminum mounting clips and brackets. Do not use exposed fasteners.

12 24 13 Winchester Public School Childcare Renovation Window Shades MCA File No. 18044


.7 Drive Assembly: Capable of being field adjusted from the exterior of the shade unit without having to disassemble the hardware. Provide with built-in shock absorber system to prevent chain breakage under normal usage conditions.

.8 Drive Chain: No. 10 stainless steel bead chain formed in a continuous loop.

.9 Hem Bar: Exposed type, extruded 6063-T5 aluminum, clear anodized finish with steel inserts and end caps.

.10 Side and Bottom Blackout Channels: Extruded aluminum channels, 38mm by 29mm complete with blackout bristles on both sides of channels to minimize light infiltration.

.11 Acceptable Manufacturers and Products: .1 Hunter Douglas Architectural: RB500 Manual Roller Shades. .2 Solarfective Products Limited: Teleshade Shading System. .3 SunProject Canada Inc.: Moduline Lite-Lift Shading System.

.2 Shading Fabric: woven cloth of vinyl coated polyester yarn consisting of 75% PVC and 25% polyester, 3% open area. The fabric shall be dimensionally stable. Colour will be selected by the Consultant from the manufacturer=s standard range. Fabric shall be certified by an independent laboratory to pass flame retardant tests according to CAN/ULC-S109. .1 Acceptable Product: Phifer Incorporated, SheerWeave Style 4400. .2 Colour will be selected by the Consultant from the manufacturer=s standard range.

.3 Blackout Fabric: 100% opaque, four ply glass fibre shade material coated with vinyl. If sewn, needle holes shall not permit light penetration. The fabric shall be washable with soap and water. The fabric shall be dimensionally stable, hang flat without buckling or distortion and shall be certified by an independent laboratory to pass flame retardant tests according to CAN/ULC-S109. .1 Acceptable Product: Phifer Incorporated, SheerWeave Style 7100 Blackout Fabric. .2 Colour will be selected by the Consultant from the manufacturer=s standard range.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

.1 Install window shades where shown on Drawings following the manufacturer=s printed specifications.

.2 Provide support brackets as required to prevent deflection of components.

.3 Use non-corroding metal fasteners for installation.

.4 Adjust system to provide for smooth operation without binding.

3.02 DEMONSTRATION

.1 Demonstrate to the Owner=s personnel the operation and maintenance requirements for the equipment of this section under the provisions of Section 01 00 00 – General Requirements.

END OF SECTION

Winchester Public School Childcare Renovation 12 93 00 MCA File No. 18044 Site Furnishings


PART 1 GENERAL


.1 Sandboxes.



.2 Section 31 23 00 - Grading, Excavating and Backfilling

.3 Section 32 18 13 - Synthetic Grass Surface

1.03 SHOP DRAWINGS AND PRODUCT DATA

.1 Submit Shop Drawings and Product data in accordance with Section 01 00 00 – General Requirements.

.2 Indicate dimensions, sizes, assembly, anchorage and installation details for sandbox perimeter borders.

.3 Submit product data on landscape filter fabric and play sand.


.1 Provide maintenance data for care and cleaning for incorporation into the manual specified in Section 01 00 00 – General Requirements.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 SAND BOXES

.1 Perimeter Borders: TuffTimbers - high density polyethylene pre-molded borders 100mm wide x 300mm high x 1200mm long with lap joint ends complete with 750mm long galvanized stakes. Colou: Black. Acceptable Suppliers: Landscape Structures.

.2 Filter Fabric: Heavy duty, commercial grade, needle-punched polypropylene landscape filter fabric

.3 Play Sand: Crystalline silica, silica and quartz free, washed river or beach sand specifically graded to minimize ultra-fine dust particles.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

.1 Install sandboxes in locations shown on Drawings.

.2 Ensure that sub-grade is prepared to the correct elevation.

.3 Install landscape filter fabric over sub-grade. Extend landscape fabric under perimeter borders and up sides to finished grade.

.4 Lap joints in filter fabric 150mm minimum.

.5 Assemble pre-molded sandbox borders in accordance with manufacturer=s instructions.

.6 Install borders true, plumb, anchored and firmly supported. Top of borders to be flush with adjacent synthetic grass surface.

.7 Fill sandbox with play sand to 25mm below top of perimeter borders.

.8 Trim excess landscape filter fabric to 50mm below finished grade

END OF SECTION

Winchester Public School Childcare Renovation 31 23 00 MCA File No. 18044 Grading, Excavating and Backfilling


GENERAL


.1 Stripping of topsoil.

.2 Rough grading.

.3 Excavating, grading and backfilling for new paved play areas, parking areas, driveways and synthetic grass surfaced areas.



.2 Section 32 16 00 – Concrete Walks, Curbs and Gutters

.3 Section 32 18 13 – Synthetic Grass Surfaces


.5 Section 32 12 16 - Asphalt Pavement.

.6 Section 32 92 23 – Sodding

1.03 REFERENCES

.1 ASTM-C117-95, Standard Test Method for Materials Finer Than 75[mu]m (No. 200) Sieve in Mineral Aggregates by Washing.

.2 ASTM C136-96a, Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates.

.3 ASTM-D422-63(1990)e, Standard Test Method for Particle-Size Analysis of Soils.

.4 ASTM-D698-91, Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12,400 ft-lbf/ft).

.5 ASTM-D1557-91, Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft-lbf/ft).

.6 ASTM-D4318-95a, Standard Test Method for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index of Soils.

.7 CAN/CGSB-8.2-M88, Sieves, Testing, Woven Wire, Metric.


.9 OPSS.PROV 206, Construction Specification for Grading.

.10 OPSS.PROV 1010, Material Specification for Aggregates - Base, Subbase, Select Subgrade, and Backfill Material.

1.04 DEFINITIONS

.1 Topsoil: material capable of supporting good vegetative growth and suitable for use in top dressing, landscaping and seeding.

.2 Waste Material: excavated material unsuitable for use in work or surplus to requirements.

.3 Unsuitable Materials: .1 Weak and compressible materials under excavated areas. .2 Frost susceptible materials under excavated areas. .3 Frost susceptible materials: Fine grained soils with plasticity index less than 10 when tested

to ASTM-D4318, and gradation within limits specified when tested to ASTM-D422 and ASTM-C136. .1 Coarse grained soils containing more than 20% by mass passing 0.075 mm sieve.

1.05 PROTECTION OF EXISTING FEATURES

.1 Existing Buried Utilities and Structures: .1 Size, depth and location of existing utilities and structures as indicated are for guidance

only. Completeness and accuracy are not guaranteed. .2 Prior to commencing excavation work, notify applicable owner or authorities having

jurisdiction, establish location and state of use of buried utilities and structures. Owners or

31 23 00 Winchester Public School Childcare Renovation Grading, Excavating and Backfilling MCA File No. 18044


authorities having jurisdiction are to clearly mark such locations to prevent disturbance during work.

.3 Confirm locations of buried utilities by careful test excavations.

.4 Maintain and protect from damage, water, sewer, gas, electric, telephone and other utilities and structures which are to remain.

.5 Record locations of maintained, re-routed and abandoned underground lines. .2 Existing Buildings and Surface Features:

.1 Conduct, with the Consultant, a condition survey of existing buildings and surface features including trees and other plants, lawns, fencing, service poles, wires and pavement, which may be affected by the work.

.2 Protect existing buildings and surface features from damage while work is in progress. In event of damage, immediately make repairs to the approval of the Consultant.

.3 Where required for excavation, cut roots or branches of trees and shrubs as approved by the Consultant in accordance with Section 32 01 90 - Tree and Shrub Preservation.

.3 Maintain existing driveways to prevent accumulation of mud on roads.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

.1 General: The moisture content of all fill material shall be at optimum moisture content for proper compaction.

.2 Fill Type No.1 - Granular A Aggregate, gravel or crushed limestone in accordance with OPSS.PROV 1010.

.3 Fill Type No.2 - Granular B Type I Aggregate, in accordance with OPSS.PROV 1010.

.4 Fill Type No.3 - Imported material, approved by the geotechnical engineer, free of rocks larger than 50mm, organic or foreign matter.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

.1 Accept site as it exists at the time of Bid Submission.

.2 Examine site, report any discrepancies to the Consultant regarding grades, surface materials, building and underground service locations.

3.02 SITE PREPARATION

.1 Remove obstructions from surfaces to be excavated within limits indicated.

.2 Cut pavement or sidewalk neatly along limits of proposed excavation in order that surface may break evenly and cleanly.

3.03 STRIPPING OF TOPSOIL

.1 Do not handle topsoil while in wet condition or in any manner in which soil structure is adversely affected.

.2 Commence topsoil stripping in areas of new paved and synthetic turf areas and as indicated and as directed by the Consultant after area has been cleared of weeds and grasses and are removed from site.

.3 Strip topsoil down to native inorganic soil. Do not mix topsoil with subsoil.

.4 Stockpile topsoil in locations as indicated or as directed by the Consultant. Stockpile height shall not exceed 2m.

.5 Dispose of unused topsoil off site.

.6 Protect stockpiles from contamination and compaction.

.7 The exposed subgrade shall be inspected and approved by the geotechnical engineer.



3.04 STOCKPILING FILL MATERIALS

.1 Stockpile fill materials in areas designated by the Consultant. Stockpile granular materials in manner to prevent segregation.

.2 Protect fill materials from contamination.

.3 Dispose of surplus material in an approved site. Make up any shortfall of material.

3.05 DEWATERING AND HEAVE PREVENTION

.1 Keep excavations free of water while work is in progress.

.2 Protect open excavations against flooding and damage due to surface run-off.

.3 Dispose of water in a manner not detrimental to public and private property, or any portion of the work completed or under construction.

.4 Dewatering shall continue during construction as required to permit completion of work below grade including drains and waterproofing.

3.06 EXCAVATION AND ROUGH GRADING

.1 Excavate and rough grade to lines, levels, grades, elevations, profiles, contours and dimensions as indicated and as required.

.2 At areas to receive synthetic turf surface, subgrade to be true and flat with no variation in elevation of more than 3mm in 3000mm in any direction.

.3 All rough grading work shall be in accordance with OPSS.PROV 206.

.4 Rough grade to the following depths below level of finish grades: .1 Grassed areas: 150mm. .2 Asphalt paving: As indicated. .3 Concrete paving and walks: As indicated .4 Synthetic Turf Surfaces: As indicated .5 Sandboxes: As indicated.

.5 Remove and dispose off-site, tree root systems, boulders, cobbles, debris, and other obstructions encountered during excavation.

.6 Do not disturb soil within branch spread of trees or shrubs that are to remain. If excavating through roots, excavate by hand and cut roots with a sharp axe or saw.

.7 Dispose of surplus and unsuitable excavated material off site.

.8 Do not obstruct flow of surface drainage.

.9 Bottoms of excavations shall be free of disturbed soil, level, free from loose, soft or organic matter.

.10 The exposed subgrade shall be inspected and approved by the inspection and testing company.

.11 Remove all loose and compressible organic fill, including topsoil, from the areas under new paved areas.

.12 Protect subgrade under new paved areas. Rectify deterioration of subgrade due to weather conditions by replacement of the damaged subgrade material with Type No. 2 fill.

.13 Proofroll exposed subgrade with heavy rollers under the full-time supervision of the inspection and testing company. Sub-excavate soft spots and replace with suitable material as specified.

.14 Correct unauthorized over-excavation as follows: .1 Fill for unauthorized over-excavation shall be provided at the Contractor=s expense. .2 Fill with Type 2 fill compacted to not less than 98% of the Standard Proctor maximum dry

density. .15 Where material at bottom of excavation is disturbed, hand trim, and remove loose material

and debris from excavations. .16 Prior to placing fill over existing ground, scarify surface to a depth of 150mm. Maintain fill and

existing surface at approximately same moisture content to facilitate bonding.

31 23 00 Winchester Public School Childcare Renovation Grading, Excavating and Backfilling MCA File No. 18044


3.07 FILL TYPES AND COMPACTION

.1 Compact all areas to be backfilled by mechanical tamping or rolling.

.2 Compaction of subgrade (Compaction densities are percentages of Standard Proctor maximum dry densities obtained from ASTM-D698.): .1 Compact subgrade in areas of slabs, paving or synthetic turf surface to 98%. .2 Compact subgrade under landscaped areas to 90%. .3 To determine the location of soft spots proofroll exposed subgrade with heavy rollers

under the full-time supervision of the geotechnical engineer. Remove soil at these locations to obtain firm subgrades and replace with compacted fill Type 2. Compact to 98%.

.3 Use fill of types as indicated or specified below. Compaction densities are percentages of Standard Proctor maximum dry densities obtained from ASTM-D698. .1 Raise exterior sub-grade levels for paved areas with fill Type No.2. Compact to 98%. .2 Raise exterior sub-grade levels for landscaped areas with fill Type No.3. Compact to 90%. .3 In confined areas use sand backfill. .4 Base course under synthetic turf surfaces: 20mm clear limestone, compacted thickness of

300mm.

3.08 BACKFILLING

.1 Do not proceed with installation of topsoil or granular material until the geotechnical engineer and the Consultant have inspected and approved the prepared subgrade.

.2 Areas to be backfilled shall be free from debris and water.

.3 Do not use backfill material which contains debris.

.4 Place backfill material in uniform 300mm loose lifts up to finished sub-grade levels. Compact each layer uniformly to specified density before placing succeeding layer.

.5 Backfill around installations.

.6 Do not backfill around or over cast-in-place concrete within 24 hours after placing of concrete.

3.09 RESTORATION

.1 Upon completion of work, remove waste materials and debris, trim slopes, and correct defects as directed by the Consultant.

.2 Reinstate existing lawns which are to remain to elevations which existed before excavation.

.3 Prepare sub-grade ready for new surface treatments as indicated and specified in related sections.

3.10 TESTING

.1 An inspection and testing company selected by the Owner will inspect and report on compliance with the requirements of this Section.

.2 Cost of inspection and testing will be paid from the cash allowance specified in Section 01 00 00- General Requirements.

.3 The geotechnical engineer shall be in full time attendance for subgrade preparation and all backfilling and compaction operations in order to examine and approve material, monitor placement, and verify compaction densities.

.4 Inspection and Testing will include: .1 Verification of subgrade elevations at paved areas. .2 Inspection and compaction testing of subgrade and verification of earth bearing capacity at

pavements, and walks. .3 Verification and approval of backfill materials. .4 Sampling fill materials to determine:

.1 Natural moisture content.

.2 Optimum moisture and density.



.3 Amount of moisture to be deleted or added to ensure proper compaction and maximum density.

.5 Verification of subgrade preparation and compaction density.

.6 Verification of all placement and compaction densities. .5 Submit required material samples to inspection and testing company as directed.

END OF SECTION

Winchester Public School Childcare Renovation 32 12 16 MCA File No. 18044 Asphalt Pavement


PART 1 GENERAL


.1 Granular base and granular sub-base.

.2 Asphalt concrete pavement for new parking areas and driveways

.3 Asphalt concrete pavement for play areas.




.3 Section 32 16 00 - Concrete Walks, Curbs and Gutters.

.4 Section 32 17 23 – Painted Pavement Markings.

1.03 REFERENCES

.1 ASTM-D698-91, Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12,400 ft-lbf/ft).

.2 ASTM-D1559-89, Standard Test Method for Resistance to Plastic Flow of Bituminous Mixtures Using Marshall Apparatus.

.3 CAN/CGSB-16.2-M89, Emulsified Asphalt Anionic Type for Road Purposes.

.4 CAN/CGSB-16.3-M90, Asphalt Cements for Road Surfaces.

.5 OPSS 310, Construction Specification for Hot Mix Asphalt.

.6 OPSS.PROV 1003, Material Specification for Aggregates - Hot Mix Asphalt.


.8 OPSS.PROV 1150, Material Specification for Hot Mix Asphalt.

1.04 PRODUCT DATA


.2 Submit asphalt concrete mix design and trial mix test results to the Consultant for review and approval.

.3 Materials shall be tested by testing laboratory approved by Consultant.

.4 Submit test certificates showing suitability of materials at least 4 weeks prior to commencing work.

1.05 SAMPLES


.2 Inform Consultant of proposed source of aggregates and provide access for sampling at least 4 weeks prior to commencing work.


.1 Asphalt paving shall be performed by a paving Subcontractor who has equipment adequate for the work, and skilled tradesmen so that placement is performed expeditiously.

.2 The paving Subcontractor shall have a minimum of 5 years’ experience in installations similar to that specified herein.

.3 Do not perform the work of this section during rainy or inclement weather. Conform to OPSS 310.

1.07 WARRANTY

.1 Provide a warranty for the work of this section in accordance with the General Conditions, but for a period of two years.

32 12 16 Winchester Public School Childcare Renovation Asphalt Pavement MCA File No. 18044


.2 The warranty shall cover defects in asphalt pavement due to faults in workmanship or materials provided in this section.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

.1 Granular Base and Sub-base Material: .1 Base - Granular A Aggregate, gravel or 19mm crushed limestone in accordance with

OPSS.PROV 1010. .2 Sub-base: Granular B Aggregate, in accordance with OPSS.PROV 1010. Use 50mm crushed

limestone if sub-base installed during wet seasons. .2 Asphalt Base Course: HL8 complying with OPSS 1150. .3 Asphalt Surface Course: HL3 complying with OPSS 1150. Use HL3F fine asphalt for Light Duty

pavement areas. .4 Prime Coat: Emulsified asphalt, type 2, CGSB-16.2. .5 Asphalt Cement: CGSB-16.3. .6 Tack Coat: Emulsified asphalt, CAN/CGSB-16.2 Type 3, Slow Setting (SS-1). .7 Pavement Reinforcement Mesh:

.1 Knitted, glass fibre strand grid, coated with an elastomeric polymer coating, with pressure-activated self-adhesive.

.2 Acceptable product: Tensar International Corporation, GlasGrid Pavement Reinforcement Mesh. Supplied by Terrafix Geosynthetics Inc.

2.02 EQUIPMENT

.1 Asphalt Milling Equipment: .1 Milling equipment shall be self-propelling, designed and built for milling of bituminous

pavements without addition of heat. .2 The equipment shall contain automatic grade and slope controls, capable of cold milling

existing asphalt pavements to an accurate depth of cut, profile, and cross slope and shall be capable of loading the milled materials directly into trucks.

.3 The equipment shall be equipped with a spray bar and water tank of sufficient size to provide thorough soaking of asphalt millings to reduce air-borne dust and particulates.

.4 The equipment shall be able to mill flush to all curbs and gutters, maintenance holes, catch basins, and the like.

.5 Provide smaller milling machines as required to trim areas inaccessible to larger machines. .2 Pavers: mechanical self-powered pavers capable of spreading mix within specified tolerances,

true to line, grade and crown indicated. .3 Rollers: sufficient number of rollers of type and weight to obtain specified density of

compacted mix. Hand operated rollers shall weigh not less than 135 kg. .4 Vibratory rollers for parking lots and driveways.

.1 Minimum drum diameter: 750mm.

.2 Maximum amplitude of vibration (machine setting): 0.5mm for lifts less than 40mm thick. .5 Suitable hand tools. In areas not accessible to rolling equipment, compact to specified density

with approved mechanical tampers.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 ASPHALT SURFACE MILLING

.1 Refer to Drawings for location and extent of asphalt surfaces to be milled. Depth of removal shall be 40mm.

.2 Prior to milling, determine the location of any buried utilities or objects that may be damaged by milling operations.



.3 Prior to milling operations the Contractor shall contact the relevant authorities to locate all underground utility services within the area of work.

.4 If sub-surface utilities or structures are damaged by milling operations, the Contractor shall immediately notify the relevant authorities and arrange for the damage to be repaired to preconstruction condition. All costs associated with such repair shall be at no extra cost to the Owner.

.5 Milling of asphalt pavement shall be performed in a manner which prevents the tearing and breaking of underlying and adjacent pavement and the contamination of the milled material with granular, subgrade, or deleterious materials.

.6 All reclaimed asphalt pavement (RAP) shall be loaded directly into trucks from the milling machine and hauled to disposal/recycling facility.

.7 The milled surface shall be swept clean using power sweepers, in a manner which minimizes dust.

.8 The Contractor shall arrange for the Owner’s inspection and testing company to inspect the surface prior to the removal of the milling equipment from site.

.9 If the inspection and testing representative identifies unsuitable areas in the milled surface, the unsuitable material shall be milled to a further depth.

.10 The remaining surface after milling shall have an even texture, and shall be free of significantly different groves and ridges in all directions.

.11 Milled asphalt material shall not remain on site after completion of the day’s operation.

3.02 SUB-GRADE PREPARATION AND INSPECTION

.1 Do not unnecessarily disturb the subgrade surface. Soft or spongy subgrade area shall be sub-excavated and properly backfilled and compacted to 98% of Standard Proctor Modified Dry Density in accordance with ASTM-D698.

.2 For preparation of sub-grade refer to Section 31 23 00 - Grading, Excavating and Backfilling.

.3 Verify grades of sub-grade, and other items set in paving area for conformity with elevations and sections before placing granular base and sub-base material.

.4 Ensure that sub-grade is prepared such that slopes of finished pavement in new parking areas will not be less than 2%.

.5 Ensure that sub-grade is prepared such that finished pavement in play areas will slope away from walls.

.6 Obtain approval of sub-grade by the inspection and testing company before placing granular sub-base and base.

3.03 GRANULAR SUB-BASE AND GRANULAR BASE

.1 Place granular sub-base and base material on clean surface, properly shaped and compacted. Confirm with the Consultant the depth of granular base required.

.2 Place granular sub-base and base to compacted thicknesses as indicated.

.3 Begin spreading base material on a crown line or on high side of a one-way slope.

.4 Place using methods that do not lead to segregation or degradation of aggregate.

.5 Place in uniform layers not exceeding 150mm compacted thickness. Compact to a density not less than 100% of the standard Proctor maximum dry density in accordance with ASTM-D698.

.6 Shape each layer to a smooth contour and compact to specified density before placing succeeding layer.

.7 Finished base surface shall be within 10mm of specified grade, but not uniformly high or low. Correct any surface that is not within the specified tolerances.

.8 Remove and replace that portion of a layer that becomes segregated during spreading.

.9 Apply water as necessary during compacting to obtain specified density. If material is excessively moist aerate by scarifying with suitable equipment until moisture content is corrected.

32 12 16 Winchester Public School Childcare Renovation Asphalt Pavement MCA File No. 18044


.10 The Contractor shall maintain finished base in a condition conforming to this section until succeeding materials are applied.

3.04 ASPHALT PRIMER

.1 Do not apply primer when air temperature is less than 5C or when rain is forecast within 2 hours.

.2 The Contractor shall inform the Consultant at least 48 hours prior to commencing or re-commencing asphalt paving operations.

.3 Apply primer at least 24 hours prior to asphalting.

.4 Apply primer at approximately 1.8 L/m5. Allow to cure to sticky or tacky condition.

.5 If asphalt primer fails to set within 24 hours, spread sand blotter material in amounts required to absorb excess material. Sweep and remove excess blotter material.

.6 Apply asphalt before primer becomes hard.

3.05 ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVING

.1 Before placing asphalt mix, obtain the inspection and testing company’s approval of the prepared milled surface, granular base, and primer.

.2 Immediately prior to placement of asphalt surfacing, coat surface of milled substrate with specified tack coat in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.

.3 Place asphalt mix only when base or previous course is dry and air temperature is above 7 C. Do not dump hot mix faster than it can be properly raked and screened. Correct irregularities before starting compaction.

.4 Place asphalt concrete in compacted layers not exceeding 50mm in one lift.

.5 Place asphalt concrete to total compacted thicknesses as indicated on Drawings.

.6 Minimum 135C mix temperature is required when spreading.

.7 Maximum 150C mix temperature is permitted at any time.

.8 Compact each course with roller as soon as it can support roller weight without undue cracking or displacement. The temperature of the mix after spreading and prior to initial rolling shall not be less than 115 C.

.9 Compact asphalt concrete to density not less than 97% of density obtained with Marshall specimens prepared in accordance with ASTM D1559-89 from samples of mix being used. Roll until roller marks are eliminated. Overlap previous roller passes to ensure smooth surface.

.10 Keep roller speed slow enough to avoid mix displacement and do not stop roller on fresh pavement.

.11 Moisten roller wheels with water to prevent pick up of material.

.12 Compact mix with hot tampers or other equipment approved by Consultant, in areas inaccessible to roller.

.13 Finished surface shall be within 6mm of design elevation and with no irregularities or depressions greater than 6mm in 3m.

.14 Repair areas showing checking, rippling or segregation as directed by the Consultant.

3.06 JOINTS

.1 Joints shall be straight, clean, vertical, and free of broken or loose material.

.2 Remove surplus material from surface of previously laid strip. Do not deposit on surface of freshly laid strip.

.3 Paint contact surfaces of existing structures such as manholes, curbs or gutters with bituminous material prior to placing adjacent pavement.

.4 For cold joints, cut back to full depth vertical face and tack face with hot asphalt.

.5 For longitudinal joints, overlap previously laid strip with spreader by 600mm.

.6 Where new pavement abuts existing asphalt pavement ensure that existing edge is neat and properly prepared by saw cutting. .1 Construct as a lap joint to key new asphalt into existing surface.



.2 Grind, to a depth of 40mm, existing asphalt around complete perimeter of area to be resurfaced including existing catch basins, manholes, and islands. Asphalt surface shall be milled to a minimum width of 1200mm.

.3 Sweep clean milled areas prior to placing new asphalt surface.

.4 At interfaces with existing asphalt surfaces, and after all grinding operations, install pavement reinforcement mesh.

.5 Prior to pavement reinforcement mesh installation, seal cracks and fill potholes. Place a 20mm thick asphalt leveling course over the prepared milled surface. The surface temperature before laying the mesh shall be between 5 C and 60 C.

.6 Install pavement reinforcement mesh in strict conformance with the manufacturer=s specifications.

3.07 INSPECTION AND TESTING

.1 Inspection and testing of asphalt pavement will be carried out by a testing and inspection company designated by the Owner.

.2 Costs of tests shall be paid under the cash allowance specified in Section 01 00 00 – General Requirements.

.3 Inspection and Testing will include: .1 Inspection of milled surface of existing asphalt substrate to be resurfaced. .2 Full time supervision by the geotechnical engineer during subgrade preparation,

compaction of granular sub-base and base courses, and placement of asphalt. .3 Grain size analysis. .4 Monitoring moisture content of granular fill. .5 Verification of granular sub-base and granular base materials and thicknesses. .6 Verification of granular sub-base and granular base compaction densities .7 Verification of asphalt base course and asphalt surface course materials and thicknesses. .8 Verification of asphalt base course and asphalt surface course compaction densities. .9 Verification of suitability of equipment used.

3.08 PROTECTION

.1 Protect asphalt surfaces from damage of any kind.

.2 Keep vehicular traffic off newly paved areas until paved surface temperature has cooled below 38C. Do not permit stationary loads on pavement for a minimum of 7 days after asphalt placement.

.3 Keep pedestrian traffic off newly paved areas until paving surface temperature has cooled sufficiently to prevent deformation.

.4 Provide access to buildings as required. Arrange paving schedule so as not to interfere with other trades.

3.09 CLEANING AND MAINTENANCE

.1 The Contractor shall remove asphalt contamination from curbs, catch basins, manholes, walls, structures, and other works and remove from site.

.2 Protect and maintain asphalt surfaces until acceptance of the Work by the Consultant.

END OF SECTION

Winchester Public School Childcare Renovation 32 16 00 MCA File No. 18044 Concrete Frost Slabs and Curbs


PART 1 GENERAL


.1 Installation of poured concrete frost slabs.

.2 Installation of poured concrete barrier curbs.



.2 Section 03 30 00 - Cast-In-Place Concrete.



.5 Section 32 91 19 - Topsoil and Finish Grading

.6 Section 32 92 23 - Sodding

1.03 REFERENCES

.1 ASTM-D698-91, Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12,400 ft-lbf/ft)

.2 ASTM-D1557-91, Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft-lbf/ft)

.3 ISO-23599-2012, Assistive Products for Blind and Vision-Impaired Persons - Tactile Walking Surface Indicators.


PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS - GENERAL

.1 Concrete Mixes and Materials: .1 Compressive strength (28 days): 35 MPa. .2 Class; C2 .3 Air entrainment: 7.0% + 1.5%. .4 Slump: 60mm.

.2 Joint Filler: 12mm thick asphalt impregnated fibreboard.

.3 Granular Base: Fill type No. 1 - Granular A aggregate in accordance with Section 31 23 00 - Grading, Excavating, and Backfilling.

.4 Non-staining mineral type form release agent: chemically active release agents containing compounds that react with free lime to provide water soluble soap.

.5 Concrete Reinforcement for Sidewalks: Pro Technologies Ltd., Conloc fibrillated polypropylene fibres, 51mm long, grey colour.

.5 Curing Compound: white pigmented, with a resin base.

.6 Formwork: steel or wood to produce a smooth finish.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GRADE PREPARATION

.1 For preparation of sub-grade refer to Section 31 23 00 - Grading, Excavating and Backfilling.

.2 Provide borrow material for fill when required.

.3 Place fill in maximum 300mm loose lifts and compact to at least 98% of the Standard Proctor maximum dry density to ASTM-D698.

32 16 00 Winchester Public School Childcare Renovation Concrete Frost Slabs and Curbs MCA File No. 18044


3.02 GRANULAR BASE

.1 Obtain the Consultant's approval of subgrade before placing granular base.

.2 Place granular base material to lines, widths, and depths as indicated.

.3 Compact granular base to 100% of the Standard Proctor maximum dry density to ASTM-D698.

3.03 CONCRETE PLACEMENT AND FINISHING

.1 Obtain the Consultant's approval of granular base prior to placing concrete.

.2 Place and screed concrete to the proper grade, wood float to a uniform surface. Do not use rakes to place and level concrete. Concrete frost slabs shall be minimum 150mm thick unless noted otherwise.

.3 Place concrete in a continuous operation until section is complete between joints.

.4 Once bleed water has dissipated trowel surface with magnesium trowels, leaving no trowel marks. Do not apply a steel trowel finish to air-entrained concrete.

.5 Round edges, including edges of joints, with 10mm radius edging tool.

.6 Ensure new curbs blend smoothly and evenly with existing curbs.

.7 Do not allow concrete surfaces to be damaged or pitted by rain. During the first 12 hours following placement of concrete provide protective covering against rain damage. Ensure availability of protective covering at all times at the job site.

3.04 TOLERANCES

.1 Finish surfaces to within 3mm in 3m as measured with straightedge placed on surface.

3.05 EXPANSION AND CONTRACTION JOINTS

.1 Install tooled transverse contraction joints after floating, when concrete is stiff, but still plastic, at intervals of 1.5m in both directions.

.2 Install 12mm expansion joints at intervals of 4.5m.

.3 Install expansion joints around manholes and catch basins and along length adjacent to concrete curbs, catch basins, buildings, or permanent structures.

3.06 CURING

.1 Cure concrete by adding moisture to exposed finished surfaces for at least 24 hours after placing, or sealing moisture in by curing compound approved by the Consultant.

.2 Where burlap is used for moist curing, place two pre-wetted layers on concrete surface and keep continuously wet during curing period.

.3 Alternatively apply curing compound evenly at a minimum rate of 1 litre for every 5m5 to form continuous film. Follow manufacturer's instructions.

3.07 BACKFILL

.1 Allow concrete to cure for seven days prior to backfilling.

.2 Backfill to designated elevations with material approved by the Consultant. Compact and shape to required contours as indicated or as directed by the Consultant.

END OF SECTION

Winchester Public School Childcare Renovation 32 18 13 MCA File No. 18044 Synthetic Turf Surface


PART 1 GENERAL


.1 Installation of synthetic turf surface system including shock and drainage pad underlayment and resilient infill material.



1.03 REFERENCES

.1 ASTM-D1577, Standard Test Method for Linear Density of Textile Fibre.

.2 ASTM-D5848, Standard Test Method for Mass Per Unit Area of Pile Yarn Floor Covering

.3 ASTM-D418, Standard Test Method for Testing Pile Yarn Floor Covering Construction.

.4 ASTM-D1338, Standard Test Method for Tuft Bind of Pile Yarn Floor Coverings

.5 ASTM-D1682, Standard Test Method of Test for Breaking Load and Elongation of Textile Fabrics

.6 ASTM-D5034, Standard Test Method of Test for Breaking Load and Elongation of Textile Fabrics (Grab Test)

.7 ASTM-F1551, Standard Test Methods for Water Permeability

.8 ASTM-D2859, Standard Test Method for Ignition Characteristics of Finished Textile Floor Covering Materials

.9 ASTM-F355, Standard Test Method for Shock-Absorbing Properties of Playing Surfaces.

.10 Synthetic Turf Council (STC) Guidelines for the Essential Elements of Synthetic Turf Systems


.1 Install synthetic turf surfacing when ambient air temperature is above 2 degrees Celsius and relative humidity is below 35% or as specified by the Product manufacturer

.2 Do not install synthetic turf surfacing if rain is imminent.

.3 Install synthetic turf surfacing after sub-grade has been inspected and approved. Sub-grade must be dry and free of any contaminants such as oils or debris.


.1 Manufacturers Qualifications: .1 Shall be a company specializing in manufacturing tall pile synthetic infill turf systems using

products specified in Part 2 of this specification section. .2 Shall be a member in good standing of the Synthetic Turf Council

.2 The work of this section shall be executed by a company having at least five years continuous Canadian experience in the successful installation and maintaining in-fill synthetic turf projects of a similar size and quality as specified.

.3 Submit proof of such experience to the Consultant upon request.

.4 The work shall be under the direction of a skilled foreman with at least three years supervisory experience.

.5 Work shall be executed by a premium turf installer with suitable equipment and experience installing 4.5m wide tufted materials

1.06 SUBMITTALS


.2 Product Certification: .1 Submit documentation on exact product name and full description of all components

including manufacturers and suppliers of each component. .2 Submit product data information sheets certifying that the Products of this section meet or

exceed specified requirements. .3 Submit copies of independent third-party test reports for:

.1 Pile Height, Face Width and Total Fabric Weight, (ASTM-D418 or D5848).

32 18 13 Winchester Public School Childcare Renovation Synthetic Turf Surface MCA File No. 18044


.2 Primary and Secondary Backing Weights, (ASTM-D418 or D5848)

.3 Tuft Bind (ASTM-D1335).

.4 Grab Tear Strength (ASTM-D1682 or D5034). .3 Shop Drawings


.2 Provide cross sections and all related details indicating all materials and components of the synthetic turf system. Provide details of turf termination at adjacent surfaces.

.4 Samples: .1 Submit two (2) 300mm by 300mm samples illustrating details of finished product including

full cross section of sub-base, turf and infill material. .2 Submit a 1kg sample of infill materials


.1 Provide maintenance data for incorporation into the manual specified in Section 01 00 00 – General Requirements

.2 Submit copies of the manufacturers recommended installation and maintenance information, including any technical criteria for evaluation of the installed Product. Include descriptions of all equipment recommended for the maintenance and repair of the turf product as well as a list of any activities not recommended relative to the warranty


.1 Deliver products to site in original containers and wrappings. Inspect products upon delivery for any damage

.2 Store products in a location and in a position acceptable to the General Contractor to protect them from damage.

.3 Handle and store all material to ensure their physical properties are not adversely affected.

.4 Adhesives and infill materials shall be delivered to site in sealed containers.

1.09 WARRANTY

.1 Provide a warranty in accordance with the General Conditions, but for a period of eight (8) years.

.2 The warranty shall cover any defects in materials and workmanship and shall include, but not be limited to, ultraviolet fading; and degradation or excessive wear of turf fibers or decrease to 50% of pile height as a result of UV degradation.

.3 The warranty shall be non-prorated, with no usage limits and shall cover the full replacement of any damaged product during the warranty period

.4 The warranty shall be comprehensive and sufficient to replace all of the synthetic turf.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 SYNTHETIC TURF SYSTEM

.1 To establish a standard for bidding purposes, the Drawings and Specifications are based on the “Fresh Grass 929” Synthetic Turf System as manufactured by Sporturf.

.2 For proposed alternates refer to Section 01 00 00-General Requirements, 1.14 Materials and Equipment.

2.02 ACCESSORY MATERIALS

.1 Adhesives: .1 All adhesives shall be hot melt technology or equivalent as approved by the synthetic turf

manufacturer. .2 All adhesives shall be purpose-suited for the installation of synthetic turf systems. Apply in

strict accordance with the adhesive manufacturers written instructions.

Winchester Public School Childcare Renovation 32 18 13 MCA File No. 18044 Synthetic Turf Surface


.3 Acceptable Adhesives: .1 Nordot 34G, as manufactured by Synthetic Surfaces Inc .2 Ultrabond Turf PU 2K, as manufactured by Mapei

.3 Turf Claw Adhesive as manufactured by SynLok .2 Infill Material:

.1 Hollow, cylindrical shock absorbing infill granules manufactured from thermoplastic elastomer compounds

.2 Acceptable Product: HOLO TPE as manufactured by Celanese So.F.TER. .3 Shock and Drainage Pad:

.1 23mm thick shock and drainage pad manufactured from non-contaminated, post-industrial cross linked (closed cell) PEX foam bonded to a non-woven geotextile fabric.

.2 Acceptable Product: .1 SportLite as manufactured by Thermagreen Environment.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

.1 Inspect sub-base and verify grades. Report any deficiencies in writing to the Consultant. Do not proceed with installation of synthetic turf system until all deficiencies have been corrected.

.2 Obtain test results for compaction, permeability and planarity of the sub-base from the General Contractor. Confirm that sub-base is true and flat with no variations in grade exceeding 6mm in 3000mm in any direction.

.3 Confirm sub-base conditions are in compliance with synthetic turf manufacturers written recommendations.

.4 Provide written certification indicating sub-base construction is acceptable for Work of this section to proceed. Commencement of Work under this section constitutes acceptance of dimensions and sub-base condition and a such no claims for extra work based upon these conditions will be permitted.

3.02 INSTALLATION

.1 Install shock and drainage pad in accordance with the manufacturers written installation instructions.

.2 Install synthetic turf system in accordance with the manufacturers written installation instructions.

.3 Synthetic turf shall be secured to perimeter edging as detailed on the reviewed shop drawings and as required by the turf manufacturer.

.4 All terminations shall be completed as detailed on the reviewed shop drawings

.5 Thoroughly brush synthetic turf to remove any wrinkles prior to installation of infill material.

.6 Install infill material in accordance with the manufacturers written instructions

.7 Synthetic turf shall remain free draining at all times before, during and after the infill materials are installed.

3.03 PROTECTION

.1 Protect all installed Work from other construction activities until completion of the Project.

.2 Provide temporary barriers, hoarding or fencing as may be required to protect the Work of this section until completion of the Project.

3.04 CLEANING:

.1 Maintain area of work in a clean condition throughout the installation process

.2 Remove construction debris on a daily basis.

.3 Dispose of adhesive containers in strict accordance with local authorities’ requirements with respect to hazardous substances.

32 18 13 Winchester Public School Childcare Renovation Synthetic Turf Surface MCA File No. 18044


.4 Upon completion of the Work, thoroughly clean all surfaces and remove all refuse resulting from the installation process.

.5 Make good any damage to adjacent existing surfaces or finishes resulting from the installation of the synthetic turf system

END OF SECTION

Winchester Public School Childcare Renovation 32 31 13 MCA File No. 18044 Chain Link Fences and Gates


PART 1 GENERAL


.1 Supply and installation of play area fencing.



.2 Section 32 18 13 - Synthetic Turf Surfaces


1.03 REFERENCES

.1 ASTM-A53/A53M-10, Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated Welded and Seamless.

.2 ASTM-A90/A90M-95a, Standard Test Method for Weight [Mass] of Coating on Iron and Steel Articles with Zinc or Zinc Alloy Coatings.

.3 CAN/CGSB-1.181-92, Ready-Mixed Organic Zinc-Rich Coating.

.4 CAN/CGSB-138.1-96, Fabric for Chain Link Fence.

.5 CAN/CGSB-138.2-96, Steel Framework for Chain Link Fence.

.6 CAN/CGSB-138.3-96, Installation of Chain Link Fence.

.7 CAN/CGSB-138.4-96, Gates for Chain Link Fence.



1.04 SHOP DRAWINGS


.2 Drawings shall indicate extent of fencing, post sizes and spacing, fence height, corner/end post configuration, gate details, hardware details and finishes.

PART 2 PRODUCTS


.1 The chain link fence manufacturer shall be a member in good standing of the Canadian Fence Industry Association (CFIA).

2.02 MATERIALS

.1 Concrete Mixes and Materials: to CSA-A23.1. Compressive strength: 35MPa minimum at 28 days, containing 20mm maximum size aggregate, with water to cement ratio for Class below grade foundation applications, air entrainment between 5 and 7 percent.

.2 Chain-link Fence Fabric: to CAN/CGSB-138.1. .1 Mesh size: 44mm by 44mm. .2 Wire size: 4.9mm core wire size galvanized finish. .3 Height of fabric as indicated on Drawings. .4 Knuckled selvedge at top and bottom.

.3 Posts, Braces and Rails: to CAN/CGSB-138.2, galvanized steel pipe, standard weight. Dimensions as indicated. Finish to match chain-link fabric. .1 Terminal, End, and Corner Posts: minimum 89mm outside diameter steel pipe, minimum

weight of 11.28kg/m. .2 Line Posts: minimum 60mm outside diameter steel pipe, minimum weight of 5.45kg/m. .3 Top Rail and Bottom Rail: minimum 42mm outside diameter steel pipe, minimum weight of

3.38kg/m. Couplings used to join rail sections shall be 180mm long.

32 31 13 Winchester Public School Childcare Renovation Chain Link Fences and Gates MCA File No. 18044


.4 Intermediate Rails and Braces: minimum 42mm outside diameter steel pipe, minimum weight of 3.38kg/m.

.4 Tie Wire Fasteners: to CAN/CGSB-138.1, single strand, 3.7mm core wire size. Finish to match chain-link fabric.

.5 Tension Bar: 5mm by 20mm minimum galvanized steel. Finish to match chain-link fabric.

.6 Gate Frames: to ASTM A53, galvanized steel pipe, standard weight 48mm outside diameter, minimum weight of 4.05kg/m pipe for outside frame and for interior bracing. .1 Fabricate gates as indicated with electrically welded joints, and hot-dip galvanized after

welding. Finish to match chain-link fabric. .2 Fasten fence fabric to gate. .3 Furnish gates with galvanized malleable iron hinges, latch and latch catch with provision

for padlock which can be attached and operated from either side of installed gate. Hardware finish to match chain-link fabric.

.7 Fittings and Hardware: to CAN/CGSB-138.2, cast aluminum alloy, galvanized steel or malleable or ductile cast iron. .1 Tension bar bands: 3mm by 20mm minimum galvanized steel. .2 Terminal post dome caps to provide waterproof fit. .3 Line post loop caps to provide waterproof fit, to fasten securely over posts and to carry top

rail. .4 Rail end fittings at terminal and corner posts for all rails. .5 Line post rail connectors for intermediate and bottom rails. .6 Fittings and hardware finish to match chain-link fabric. .7 Bolts shall not extend more than 10mm beyond nuts.

.8 Organic Zinc Rich Coating: to CAN/CGSB-1.181.

2.03 FINISHES

.1 Galvanizing: .1 For chain link fabric: to CAN/CGSB-138.1. .2 For pipe: To ASTM-A90, zinc coating weight of 600g/m5. .3 For other fittings: to CAN/CSA-G164.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GRADING

.1 Remove debris and correct ground undulations along fence line to obtain smooth uniform gradient between posts.

.2 Provide clearance between bottom of fence and ground surface of 30 mm to 50 mm.

3.02 ERECTION OF FENCE

.1 Erect fence along lines as indicated and in accordance with CAN/CGSB-138.3.

.2 Excavate post holes to 1200mm below finished grade level, and to four times the diameter of the post to be embedded.

.3 Space line posts 3000mm apart, measured parallel to ground surface.

.4 Space straining posts at equal intervals not exceeding 50m if distance between end or corner posts on straight continuous lengths of fence over reasonably smooth grade is greater than 50m.

.5 Install corner post where change in alignment exceeds 20.

.6 Install end posts at end of fence and at buildings. Install gate posts on both sides of gate openings.

.7 Place concrete in post holes then embed posts into concrete to 150mm above bottom of concrete. Terminate concrete 100mm below finished ground level and slope to drain away

Winchester Public School Childcare Renovation 32 31 13 MCA File No. 18044 Chain Link Fences and Gates


from posts. Brace to hold posts in plumb position and true to alignment and elevation until concrete has set.

.8 Do not install fence fabric until concrete has cured a minimum of 7 days.

.9 Install brace between end and gate posts and nearest line post, placed in centre of panel and parallel to ground surface. Install braces on both sides of corner and straining posts in similar manner.

.10 Top Rail Installation: .1 Top rail shall pass through secure line post tops and form a continuous brace for each

stretch of fence. .2 Top rail shall be secured to each terminal post with receptacle fittings.

.11 Install bottom rails between posts and fasten securely to posts.

.12 Lay out fence fabric. Stretch tightly to tension recommended by manufacturer and fasten to end, corner, gate and straining posts with tension bar secured to post with tension bar bands spaced at 300mm intervals.

.13 Secure fabric to top rails, line posts and bottom rails with tie wires at 300mm intervals. Give tie wires minimum two twists.

3.03 INSTALLATION OF GATES

.1 Install gates in locations as indicated. Provide 3 hinges, at top, bottom, and mid-height.

.2 Level ground between gate posts and set gate bottom approximately 40 mm above ground surface.

.3 Install gate stops, latch, and latch catch.

3.04 TOUCH UP

.1 Clean damaged surfaces with wire brush removing loose and cracked coatings. Prime with two coats of organic zinc-rich paint to damaged areas in accordance with Section 09 91 00 - Painting.

.2 Pre-treat damaged surfaces according to manufacturers' instructions for zinc-rich paint. Paint with final colour to match fabric.

3.05 CLEANING

.1 Clean and trim areas disturbed by operations.

.2 Dispose of surplus material and replace damaged turf with sod.

END OF SECTION

Winchester Public School Childcare Renovation 32 91 19 MCA File No. 18044 Topsoil and Finish Grading


PART 1 GENERAL


.1 Final grading.

.2 Installation of topsoil.




.3 Section 32 16 00 - Concrete Walks and Curbs and Gutters.

.4 Section 32 92 23 - Sodding

.5 Section 32 93 00 - Plants.

1.03 REFERENCES

.1 OPSS.PROV 206, Construction Specification for Grading.

.2 OPSS 802, Construction Specification for Topsoil.

.3 OPSS 803, Construction Specification for Sodding.

.4 OPSS.PROV 804, Construction Specification for Seed and Cover.

1.04 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

.1 Advise the Consultant of sources of topsoil to be utilized seven days in advance of starting work. Documentation from the sources of supply shall be made available to the Owner=s representative upon request.

.2 The Contractor is responsible for soil analysis and requirements for amendments to supply topsoil as specified.

.3 Topsoil Analysis: .1 Submit topsoil analysis reports in conformance with Section 01 00 00 – General

Requirements. .2 Test topsoil for soil type, major nutrients (N, P, K), micronutrients, organic matter content,

pH value, and herbicide and atrazine content. The report shall make recommendations for amendments to be added prior to installation and for the maintenance program.

.3 Test topsoil in place and stockpiled at site, and at source of supply if imported. Retest for each additional source of supply.

.4 Provide topsoil sample to the Consultant for testing and analysis. All topsoil supplied shall conform to the approved sample provided.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 TOPSOIL

.1 Topsoil: a mixture of mineral particulates, micro-organisms, and organic matter which provides a suitable medium for supporting the intended vigorous plant growth.

.2 Soil texture based on the Canadian System of Soil Classification, to consist of 20% to 70% sand and contain 5% to 10% organic matter by weight.

.3 Fertility: major soil nutrients shall be present in the following ratios: .1 Nitrogen (N): 20 to 40 micrograms of available N per gram of topsoil. .2 Phosphorous (P): 10 to 20 micrograms of phosphate per gram of topsoil. .3 Potassium (K): 80 to 120 micrograms of potash per gram of topsoil. .4 Calcium, magnesium, and micro-nutrients (including iron, zinc, boron, sulfur, copper, and

molybdenum) present in balanced ratios to support germination and establishment of intended vegetation.

.4 Acidity: pH value of 6.0 to 7.5.

.5 Topsoil shall not contain toxic elements or growth inhibiting materials.

32 91 19 Winchester Public School Childcare Renovation Topsoil and Finish Grading MCA File No. 18044


.6 Topsoil shall be free from: .1 Debris and stones over 25mm diameter. .2 Course vegetative material over 10mm diameter or 100mm length, occupying more than

2% of soil volume. .7 Consistence: friable when moist.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION OF EXISTING GRADE

.1 All work shall be in accordance with OPSS.PROV 206.

.2 Verify that existing grades are correct. If discrepancies occur, notify the Consultant and do not commence work until instructed by the Consultant.

.3 Import sub-grade fill material as required to reach proposed grades and contours.

.4 Grade soil, eliminating uneven areas and low spots, ensuring positive drainage.

.5 Remove debris, roots, branches, stones in excess of 25mm diameter and other deleterious materials. Remove debris which protrudes more than 75mm above the surface. Dispose of removed material off site.

.6 Remove soil contaminated with calcium chloride, toxic materials and petroleum products. Report to the Consultant any soil contaminated with toxic materials.

.7 Course cultivate the entire area which is to receive topsoil to depth of 100mm. Cross cultivate those areas where equipment used for hauling and spreading has compacted soil.

3.02 PLACING AND SPREADING OF TOPSOIL/PLANTING SOIL

.1 All work shall be in accordance with OPSS 802, OPSS 803, and OPSS.PROV 804.

.2 Import topsoil as required to reach proposed grades and contours and to meet minimum depth requirements specified below.

.3 Place topsoil after the Consultant has accepted the subgrade. Schedule placing of topsoil and finish grading to permit sodding operations under optimum conditions.

.4 Spread topsoil with adequate moisture in uniform layers not exceeding 150mm, over unfrozen subgrade free of standing water.

.5 For sodded areas keep topsoil 15mm below finished grade.

.6 Spread topsoil as indicated to the following minimum depths after settlement and 80% compaction: .1 150mm for sodded areas.

.7 Manually spread topsoil/planting soil around trees, shrubs and obstacles.

3.03 FINISH GRADING

.1 Fine grade by Laser Grading process and loosen topsoil.

.2 Grade to eliminate rough spots and low areas and ensure positive drainage. Prepare loose friable bed by means of cultivation and subsequent raking. Do all find grading with approved equipment being careful not to excessively compact topsoil and with a fine loose texture.

.3 Consolidate topsoil to required bulk density using equipment approved by the Consultant. Leave surfaces smooth, uniform and firm against deep foot printing.

.4 If site areas are not designated for grade changes, the Contractor shall nonetheless fine grade those areas as well. Topsoil in place shall be thoroughly worked-up with a roto tiller, or other approved mechanical means, and fine graded as outlined above.

3.04 TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE

.1 The Consultant will inspect topsoil in place to determine acceptability of material, depth of topsoil and finish grading. Approval of topsoil material is subject to soil testing and analysis.

Winchester Public School Childcare Renovation 32 91 19 MCA File No. 18044 Topsoil and Finish Grading


.2 The Consultant=s testing of topsoil in place will be carried out by a testing laboratory designated by the Consultant. Soil sampling, testing and analysis shall be in accordance with Provincial regulations and standards.

.3 Cost of testing will be paid from the cash allowance specified in Section 01 00 00 – General Requirements.

3.05 SURPLUS MATERIAL

.1 Dispose of materials not required off site.

END OF SECTION

Winchester Public School Childcare Renovation 32 92 23 MCA File No. 18044 Sodding


PART 1 GENERAL


.1 Installation of nursery grown sod.




.3 Section 32 93 00 - Plants.

1.03 REFERENCES

.1 OPSS 803, Construction Specification for Sodding.

1.04 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

.1 Obtain approval from the Consultant of sod at source.

.2 When proposed source of sod is approved, use no other source without written authorization.

1.05 SCHEDULING

.1 Schedule sod laying to coincide with preparation of topsoil.

.2 Schedule sod installation for before August 31st


.1 The work of this section shall be executed by a company having at least five years continuous Canadian experience in the successful execution of work of the type and quality shown and specified.

.2 Submit proof of such experience to the Consultant upon request.

.3 The work shall be under the direction of a skilled foreman with at least three years supervisory experience.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 TURFGRASS SOD

.1 Number One Grade Turfgrass Nursery Sod: Sod that has been especially sown and cultivated in nursery fields as turfgrass crop.

.2 Sod Grass Classification: .1 Kentucky Bluegrass Sod: Nursery sod grown from one or more Kentucky Bluegrass

cultivars.

2.02 ACCESSORY MATERIALS

.1 Water: Potable and free of impurities.

.2 Fertilizer: .1 To Canada "Fertilizers Act" and "Fertilizers Regulations". .2 Complete, synthetic, slow release with 35% of nitrogen content in water-soluble form.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

.1 Verify that grades are correct and prepared in accordance with Section 32 91 19 - Topsoil and Finish Grading. If discrepancies occur, notify the Consultant and do not commence work until instructed by the Consultant.

.2 Do not perform work under adverse field conditions such as excessively wet or dry soil or soil covered with standing water.

32 92 23 Winchester Public School Childcare Renovation Sodding MCA File No. 18044


.3 Prepare the soil by roto tilling to a depth of 100mm, first one way and then perpendicular to first direction.

.4 Add fertilizer at the rate of 10kg per 100m5 and roto fill or rake to a depth of 50mm.

.5 Fine grade surface free of humps and hollows to smooth, even grade, to contours and elevations indicated, to tolerance of plus or minus 8mm, for Turfgrass Nursery Sod surface to drain naturally.

.6 Remove and dispose off-site weeds, debris, stones 25mm in diameter and larger, and soil contaminated by oil, gasoline and other deleterious materials.

.7 Cultivate fine grade approved by the Consultant to 25mm depth immediately prior to sodding.

.8 Deliver sod to site within 24 hours of being lifted.

3.02 SOD PLACEMENT

.1 Lay sod within 36 hours of being lifted.

.2 Lay sod sections in rows, longitudinally, along contours of slopes, joints staggered. Butt sections closely without overlapping or leaving gaps between sections. Cut out irregular or thin sections with sharp implements.

.3 Roll sod as directed by the Consultant. Provide close contact between sod and soil by light rolling. Use of heavy roller to correct irregularities in grade is not permitted.

3.03 MAINTENANCE DURING ESTABLISHMENT PERIOD

.1 Perform the following operations from time of installation until 30 days following final acceptance at project completion or until second cutting of lawn if 30 days are exceeded.

.2 Water sodded areas in sufficient quantities and at frequency required to maintain optimum soil moisture condition to a depth of 75mm to 100mm.

.3 Cut grass to 40mm when it reaches a height of 60mm. Remove clippings which will smother grassed areas.

.4 Maintain sodded areas weed free.

.5 Fertilize one month before estimated date of sod acceptance with 10:10:10 ratio fertilizer spread at rate of 10kg of nitrogen/100m5. Water in well.

3.04 ACCEPTANCE

.1 Turfgrass Nursery Sod areas will be accepted by the Consultant at Substantial Performance of the Work or when the following conditions are met, whichever comes later: .1 Sodded areas are properly established. .2 Sod is free of bare and dead spots and without weeds. .3 No surface soil is visible when grass has been cut to height of 40mm. .4 Sodded areas have been cut minimum 2 times, and within 24 hours prior to acceptance. .5 Fertilizing in accordance with fertilizer program has been carried out at least once.

END OF SECTION

Winchester Public School Childcare Renovation 32 93 00 MCA File No. 18044 Plants


PART 1 GENERAL


.1 Planting of new trees.

.2 Staking and protection for new trees.




.3 Section 32 92 23 - Sodding.


.1 Canadian Nursery Trades Association, Metric Guide Specification for Nursery Stock, latest edition.


.1 Obtain approval from the Consultant for plant material at the source at least seven days prior to shipping. No work in this section shall proceed without approval.

.2 Imported plant material must be accompanied with necessary permits and import licenses. Conform to federal and provincial regulations.

.3 Acceptance of plant material source does not prevent rejection on site prior to or after planting.

.4 The work of this section shall be executed by a company having at least five years of continuous Canadian experience in the successful execution of work of the type and quality shown and specified. Submit proof of such experience to the Consultant.

.5 The work shall be under the direction of a skilled foreman with at least three years of supervisory experience.

1.05 PRODUCT DATA

.1 Submit Product data in accordance with Section 01 00 00 – General Requirements.

.2 Provide Product data for: .1 Fertilizer. .2 Anti-desiccant. .3 Guying assembly including clamps, collar, guying wire, anchors and wire tightener. .4 Mulch.

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND PROTECTION

.1 Protect plant material from frost, excessive heat, wind and sun during delivery.

.2 Immediately store and protect plant material which will not be installed within 1 h after arrival at site in storage location approved by the Consultant.

.3 Protect plant material from damage during transportation: .1 When delivery distance is less than 30km and vehicle travels at speeds under 80km/h, tie

tarpaulins around plants or over vehicle box. .2 When delivery distance exceeds 30km or vehicle travels at speeds over 80km/h, use

enclosed vehicle. .4 Tie branches of trees and shrubs securely and protect against abrasion. .5 Avoid binding that would damage bark, break branches or destroy shape of plant. .6 Give full support to root balls of large trees.

32 93 00 Winchester Public School Childcare Renovation Plants MCA File No. 18044


.7 Protect stored plant material from frost, wind and sun and as follows: .1 For balled and burlapped and wire basket root balls, place to protect branches from

damage. Maintain moisture level in root zones.

1.07 WARRANTY

.1 Provide a warranty for plant material as itemized on plant list in accordance with the General Conditions, but for 2 full growing seasons.

.2 An end-of-warranty inspection will be conducted by the Consultant.

.3 The Consultant reserves the right to extend the Contractor's warranty responsibilities for an additional one year if, at end of the initial warranty period, leaf development and growth are not sufficient to ensure future survival.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 PLANT MATERIAL

.1 Type of Root Preparation, Sizing, Grading and Quality: comply with Metric Guide Specification for Nursery Stock, of the Canadian Nursery Trades Association.

.2 Source of Plant Material: grown in Zone in accordance with Agriculture Canada Plant Hardiness Zone Map.

.3 Plant Material: .1 Free of disease, insects, defects or injuries and structurally sound with strong fibrous root

system. .2 Root pruned regularly, but not later than one growing season prior to arrival on site.

.4 Trees - Autumn Blaze Maple .1 Straight trunks, well-developed crowns and characteristically branched for specie. .2 70mm in caliper, with no more than 40% of overall height may be free of branches. .3 Shall have large firm root balls. Root balls shall include 75% of fibrous and feeder root

system.

2.02 ACCESSORIES

.1 Water: Potable water free of impurities and minerals that would inhibit plant growth.

.2 Stakes: T-bar, steel, 40mm by 40mm by 5mm by 2440mm and wood, pointed one end, 38mm by 38mm by 2450mm as indicate

.3 Wire Tightener: .1 Type 1: galvanized steel. .2 Type 2: turnbuckle, galvanized steel, 9.5mm diameter with 270mm open length.

.4 Guying Wire: .1 Type 1: steel, 3mm wire. .2 Type 2: 1.5mm diameter multi-wire steel cable. .3 Type 3: 3mm diameter multi-wire steel cable.

.5 Clamps: .1 U-bolt: galvanized, 13mm diameter, complete with curved retaining bar and hexagonal

nuts. .2 Crimp type.

.6 Guying Collar: Plastic tube, 13mm diameter, nylon reinforced.

.7 Trunk Protection: .1 Wire mesh: Galvanized, electrically welded 1.4mm wire with 25mm by 25mm mesh and

fastener. .2 Burlap: clean, minimum 2.5kg/m5 mass and 150mm wide, and twine fastener.

.8 Mulch: All-Treat Farms Limited: Red Canadian shredded bark mulch, free of small branches and leaves.



.9 Fertilizer: Synthetic commercial type, ratio 5:3:2.

.10 Anti-Desiccant: Wax-like emulsion, permeable enough to permit transpiration.

.11 Flagging Tape: Fluorescent colour.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PRE-PLANTING OPERATIONS

.1 Ensure plant material is acceptable to the Consultant.

.2 Remove damaged roots and branches from plant material.

.3 Apply anti-desiccant to conifers and deciduous trees in leaf in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.

3.02 GROUND PREPARATION

.1 Establishment of sub-grade and preparation for planting beds is specified in Section 32 91 19 - Topsoil and Finish Grading.

.2 For individual planting Boxes: .1 Stake out location and obtain approval from the Consultant prior to excavating. .2 Excavate to depth and width as indicated. .3 Remove subsoil, rocks, roots, debris and toxic material from excavated material that will

be used as planting soil for trees and individual shrubs. Dispose of excess material. .4 Scarify sides of planting hole. .5 Remove water which enters excavations prior to planting. Notify Consultant if water

source is ground water.

3.03 PLANTING

.1 Plant deciduous material during dormant period before buds have broken.

.2 If the Consultant permits planting of deciduous material after buds have broken, spray plants with anti-desiccant.

.3 For jute burlapped root balls, cut away top one third of wrapping and wire basket without damaging root ball. Do not pull burlap or rope from under root ball.

.4 Plant vertically in locations as indicated. .1 Backfill soil in 150mm lifts. Tamp each lift to eliminate air pockets. When two thirds of

depth of planting pit has been backfilled, fill remaining space with water. After water has penetrated into soil, backfill to finish grade.

.2 Form watering saucer as indicated. .5 Water plant material thoroughly. .6 After soil settlement has occurred, fill with soil to finish grade. .7 Dispose of burlap, wire and container material off site.

3.04 TRUNK PROTECTION

.1 Install trunk protection on deciduous trees as indicated.

.2 Install trunk protection prior to installation of tree supports when used.

3.05 TREE SUPPORTS

.1 Install tree supports as indicated.

.2 Use single stake tree support for deciduous trees less than 3m tall and evergreens less than 2m tall. .1 Place stake on prevailing wind side and 150mm from trunk. .2 Drive stake a minimum 150mm into undisturbed soil beneath roots. Ensure stake is secure,

vertical and unsplit. .3 Install 150mm long guying collar 1500mm above grade.

32 93 00 Winchester Public School Childcare Renovation Plants MCA File No. 18044


.4 Thread Type 1 guying wire through guying collar tube. Twist wire to form collar and secure firmly to stake. Cut off excess wire.

.3 Use 3 guy wires and anchors for deciduous trees more than 3m tall .1 Use Type 2 guying wire with clamps for trees less than 75mm in diameter and Type 3

guying wire with clamps for trees greater than 75mm in diameter. .2 Use Type 1 anchors for trees less than 75mm in diameter and Type 2 anchors for trees

greater than 75mm in diameter. .3 Install guying collars above branch to prevent slipping at approximately 2/3 height for

evergreens and 2 height for deciduous trees. Collar mounting height shall not exceed 2.5m above grade.

.4 Guying collars shall be of sufficient length to encircle tree plus 50mm space for trunk clearance. Thread guy wire through collar encircling tree trunk and secure to lead wire by clamp or multi-wraps; cut wire ends close to wrap. Spread lead wires equally proportioned about trunk at 120 degrees.

.5 Install anchors at equal intervals about tree and away from trunk so that guy wire will form 45 degree angle with ground. Install anchor at angle to achieve maximum resistance for guy wire.

.6 Attach guy wire to anchors. Tension wire and secure by installing clamps.

.7 Install wire tightener ensuring that guys are secure and leave room for slight movement of tree.

.8 Install flagging tape to guys. .4 After tree supports have been installed, remove broken branches with clean, sharp tools.

3.06 MULCHING

.1 Ensure soil settlement has been corrected prior to mulching.

.2 Loosen soil, remove weeds and debris.

.3 Spread mulch as indicated.

3.07 MAINTENANCE DURING ESTABLISHMENT PERIOD

.1 Perform the following maintenance operations from time of planting to 30 days following final acceptance at project completion. .1 Water to maintain soil moisture conditions for optimum establishment, growth and health

of plant material without causing erosion. For evergreen plant material, water thoroughly in late fall prior to freeze-up to saturate soil around root system.

.2 Remove weeds monthly.

.3 Replace or respread damaged, missing or disturbed mulch.

.4 Where mulch is in place, remove prior to freeze-up and replace in spring after soil thaws and warms up.

.5 Apply pesticides in accordance with Federal, Provincial and Municipal regulations as and when required to control insects, fungus and disease. Obtain product approval from Consultant prior to application.

.6 Remove dead or broken branches from plant material.

.7 Keep trunk protection and guy wires in proper repair and adjustment.

.8 Remove and replace dead plants and plants not in healthy growing condition. Make replacements in same manner as specified for original plantings.

3.08 ACCEPTANCE

.1 Plant material will be accepted by Consultant 90 days after planting operation is completed provided that plant material exhibits healthy growing condition and is free from disease, insects and fungal organisms.

.2 Plant material installed less than 90 days prior to frost will be accepted in the following spring, 30 days after the start of the growing season provided that acceptance conditions are fulfilled.



3.09 MAINTENANCE DURING WARRANTY PERIOD

.1 From time of acceptance by the Consultant to the end of the warranty period, perform the following maintenance operations. .1 Water to maintain soil moisture conditions for optimum growth and health of plant

material without causing erosion. .2 Reform damaged watering saucers. .3 Remove weeds monthly. .4 Replace or respread damaged, missing or disturbed mulch. .5 Where mulch is in place, remove prior to freeze-up and replace in the spring after soil

thaws and warms up. .6 Apply pesticides in accordance with Federal, Provincial and Municipal regulations as and

when required to control insects, fungus and disease. Obtain product approval from the Consultant prior to application.

.7 Apply fertilizer in the early spring at the manufacturer's suggested rate.

.8 Remove dead, broken or hazardous branches from plant material.

.9 Keep trunk protection and tree supports in proper repair and adjustment.

.10 Remove trunk protection and tree supports and level watering saucers at the end of the warranty period.

.11 Remove and replace dead plants and plants not in healthy growing condition. Make replacements in same manner as specified for original plantings.

.12 Submit monthly written reports to the Consultant identifying: .1 Maintenance work carried out. .2 Development and condition of plant material. .3 Preventative or corrective measures required which are outside the Contractor's

responsibility.

END OF SECTION